To resize thickness, move all items on the front cover

and center registration marks to left or right

Owner’s Manual
Owner’s Manual

Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: “IMPORTANT SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS” (p. 2), “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” (p. 3, 4, 5), and “IMPORTANT NOTES”
(p. 6, 7, 8). These sections provide important information concerning the proper operation
of the unit. Additionally, in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of
every feature provided by your new unit, Owner’s Manual should be read in its entirety.
The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference

202
Copyright © 2005 ROLAND CORPORATION
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without
the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.
* 0 3 9 0 3 1 0 1 - 0 4 * 03903101 ’06-04-4N
 To resize thickness, move all items on the front cover
and center registration marks to left or right.

WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture.

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an

CAUTION
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the
product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to
ATTENTION: RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). intended to alert the user to the presence of important
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the product.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING - When using electric products, basic precautions should always be followed, including the following:

1. Read these instructions. 10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched
2. Keep these instructions. particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
3. Heed all warnings. point where they exit from the apparatus.
4. Follow all instructions. 11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
5. Do not use this apparatus near water. manufacturer.
6. Clean only with a dry cloth. 12. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket,
7. Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in or table specified by the manufacturer, or
accordance with the manufacturers instructions. sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used,
8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus For EU Countries
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
This product complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89/336/EEC and LVD 73/23/EEC.
amplifiers) that produce heat. 13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when
9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or unused for long periods of time.
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with 14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing For the USA
one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any
blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the
third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug
way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid
has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus,
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
replacement of the obsolete outlet. not operate normally, or has been dropped.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
For the U.K. television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
IMPORTANT: THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE. interference by one or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
BLUE: NEUTRAL – Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
BROWN: LIVE – Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Under no circumstances must either of the above wires be connected to the earth terminal of a three pin plug. Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.

For Canada

NOTICE
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

AVIS
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.

2
KR107_e.book 3 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

USING THE UNIT SAFELY

Used for instructions intended to alert The symbol alerts the user to important instructions
the user to the risk of death or severe or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is
injury should the unit be used determined by the design contained within the
improperly. triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for
general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of injury or material The symbol alerts the user to items that must never
be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that
damage should the unit be used
must not be done is indicated by the design contained
improperly. within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it
* Material damage refers to damage or means that the unit must never be disassembled.
other adverse effects caused with The ● symbol alerts the user to things that must be
respect to the home and all its carried out. The specific thing that must be done is
furnishings, as well to domestic indicated by the design contained within the circle. In
animals or pets. the case of the symbol at left, it means that the power-
cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.

001 009
• Before using this unit, make sure to read the • Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord,
instructions below, and the Owner’s Manual. nor place heavy objects on it. Doing so can
damage the cord, producing severed elements
.......................................................................................................... and short circuits. Damaged cords are fire and
002a
• Do not open or perform any internal modifica- shock hazards!
tions on the unit. ..........................................................................................................
010
.......................................................................................................... • This unit, either alone or in combination with an
003 amplifier and headphones or speakers, may be
• Do not attempt to repair the unit, or replace parts capable of producing sound levels that could
within it (except when this manual provides cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for
specific instructions directing you to do so). Refer a long period of time at a high volume level, or at
all servicing to your retailer, the nearest Roland a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience
Service Center, or an authorized Roland any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should
distributor, as listed on the “Information” page. immediately stop using the unit, and consult an
.......................................................................................................... audiologist.
004
• Never use or store the unit in places that are: ..........................................................................................................
011
• Subject to temperature extremes (e.g., direct • Do not allow any objects (e.g., flammable
sunlight in an enclosed vehicle, near a heating material, coins, pins); or liquids of any kind
duct, on top of heat-generating equipment); or (water, soft drinks, etc.) to penetrate the unit.
are
• Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet floors);
..........................................................................................................
or are 012a
• Humid; or are • Immediately turn the power off, remove the
power cord from the outlet, and request servicing
• Exposed to rain; or are
by your retailer, the nearest Roland Service
• Dusty; or are Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as
• Subject to high levels of vibration. listed on the “Information” page when:
.......................................................................................................... • The power-supply cord, or the plug has been
007
• Make sure you always have the unit placed so it is damaged; or
level and sure to remain stable. Never place it on • If smoke or unusual odor occurs
stands that could wobble, or on inclined surfaces. • Objects have fallen into, or liquid has been
.......................................................................................................... spilled onto the unit; or
008a
• The unit should be connected to a power supply • The unit has been exposed to rain (or otherwise
only of the type described in the operating has become wet); or
instructions, or as marked on the rear of unit. • The unit does not appear to operate normally
.......................................................................................................... or exhibits a marked change in performance.
008e
• Use only the attached power-supply cord. Also, ..........................................................................................................
the supplied power cord must not be used with
any other device.
..........................................................................................................

3
KR107_e.book 4 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

013 101a
• In households with small children, an adult • The unit should be located so that its location or
should provide supervision until the child is position does not interfere with its proper venti-
capable of following all the rules essential for the lation.
safe operation of the unit. ..........................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................... 102b
014 • Always grasp only the plug on the power-supply
• Protect the unit from strong impact. cord when plugging into, or unplugging from, an
(Do not drop it!) outlet or this unit.
..........................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................... 103a
015 • At regular intervals, you should unplug the
• Do not force the unit’s power-supply cord to power plug and clean it by using a dry cloth to
share an outlet with an unreasonable number of wipe all dust and other accumulations away from
other devices. Be especially careful when using its prongs. Also, disconnect the power plug from
extension cords—the total power used by all the power outlet whenever the unit is to remain
devices you have connected to the extension unused for an extended period of time. Any
cord’s outlet must never exceed the power rating accumulation of dust between the power plug
(watts/amperes) for the extension cord. Excessive and the power outlet can result in poor insulation
loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat and lead to fire.
up and eventually melt through. ..........................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................... 104
016 • Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming
• Before using the unit in a foreign country, consult entangled. Also, all cords and cables should be
with your retailer, the nearest Roland Service placed so they are out of the reach of children.
Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as ..........................................................................................................
listed on the “Information” page. 106
.......................................................................................................... • Never climb on top of, nor place heavy objects on
019 the unit.
• Batteries must never be recharged, heated, taken
apart, or thrown into fire or water. ..........................................................................................................
107b
• Never handle the power cord or its plugs with
wet hands when plugging into, or unplugging
from, an outlet or this unit.
.......................................................................................................... ..........................................................................................................
023
108d: Selection
• DO NOT play a CD-ROM disc on a conventional • If you need to move the instrument, take note of
audio CD player. The resulting sound may be of a the precautions listed below. At least two persons
level that could cause permanent hearing loss. are required to safely lift and move the unit. It
Damage to speakers or other system components should be handled carefully, all the while keeping
may result. it level. Make sure to have a firm grip, to protect
.......................................................................................................... yourself from injury and the instrument from
026
• Do not put anything that contains water (e.g., damage.
flower vases) on this unit. Also, avoid the use of 1

insecticides, perfumes, alcohol, nail polish, spray • Check to make sure the screw securing the unit
cans, etc., near the unit. Swiftly wipe away any to the stand have not become loose. Fasten
liquid that spills on the unit using a dry, soft them again securely whenever you notice any
cloth. loosening.
2
..........................................................................................................
• Disconnect the power cord.
3
• Disconnect all cords coming from external
devices.
4
• Raise the adjusters on the stand (p. 19).
5
• Close the lid.
7
• Fold down the music rest.
..........................................................................................................
109a
• Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power and
unplug the power cord from the outlet (p. 18).

..........................................................................................................
110a
• Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning
in your area, pull the plug on the power cord out
of the outlet.
..........................................................................................................

4
KR107_e.book 5 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

111: Selection
• If used improperly, batteries may explode or leak
and cause damage or injury. In the interest of
safety, please read and observe the following
precautions (p. 18).
1
• Carefully follow the installation instructions
for batteries, and make sure you observe the
correct polarity.
2
• Avoid using new batteries together with used
ones. In addition, avoid mixing different types
of batteries.
3
• Remove the batteries whenever the unit is to
remain unused for an extended period of time.
5
• If a battery has leaked, use a soft piece of cloth
or paper towel to wipe all remnants of the
discharge from the battery compartment. Then
install new batteries. To avoid inflammation of
the skin, make sure that none of the battery
discharge gets onto your hands or skin.
Exercise the utmost caution so that none of the
discharge gets near your eyes. Immediately
rinse the affected area with running water if
any of the discharge has entered the eyes.
6
• Never keep batteries together with metallic
objects such as ballpoint pens, necklaces,
hairpins, etc.
..........................................................................................................
112
• Used batteries must be disposed of in compliance
with whatever regulations for their safe disposal
that may be observed in the region in which you
live.
• The power-supply cord, or the plug has been
damaged; or
• If smoke or unusual odor occurs
• Objects have fallen into, or liquid has been
spilled onto the unit; or
• The unit has been exposed to rain (or otherwise
has become wet); or
• The unit does not appear to operate normally
or exhibits a marked change in performance.
..........................................................................................................
116
• Be careful when opening/closing the lid so you
do not get your fingers pinched (p. 18). Adult
supervision is recommended whenever small
children use the unit.
..........................................................................................................
118c
• Always keep the following parts including with
the KR107 and small components that may be
removed out of the reach of small children to
avoid accidental ingestion of these parts.
Included Parts
• External memory anti-theft lock securing screw
Removable parts
• Screws fastening the stand
• Screws fastening music rest
• the thumbscrew fastening the headphone hook
..........................................................................................................

5
KR107_e.book 6 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

IMPORTANT NOTES
291b
In addition to the items listed under “IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS” and “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” on pages 2 and 3,
please read and observe the following:

Power Supply 359

• Do not paste stickers, decals, or the like to this instrument.
301
Peeling such matter off the instrument may damage the exterior
• Do not connect this unit to same electrical outlet that is being finish.
used by an electrical appliance that is controlled by an inverter
(such as a refrigerator, washing machine, microwave oven, or air
conditioner), or that contains a motor. Depending on the way in Maintenance
which the electrical appliance is used, power supply noise may 401b
cause this unit to malfunction or may produce audible noise. If it • To clean the unit, use a dry, soft cloth; or one that is slightly
is not practical to use a separate electrical outlet, connect a power dampened. Try to wipe the entire surface using an equal amount
supply noise filter between this unit and the electrical outlet. of strength, moving the cloth along with the grain of the wood.
306b Rubbing too hard in the same area can damage the finish.
• Batteries are supplied with the unit. The life of these batteries 402
may be limited, however, since their primary purpose was to • Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or solvents of any kind, to
enable testing. avoid the possibility of discoloration and/or deformation.
307 403
• Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off the power to • The pedals of this unit are made of brass.
all units. This will help prevent malfunctions and/or damage to Brass eventually darkens as the result of the natural oxidization
speakers or other devices. process. If the brass becomes tarnished, polish it using commer-
308 cially available metal polisher.
• Although the LCD and LEDs are switched off when the POWER
switch is switched off, this does not mean that the unit has been
completely disconnected from the source of power. If you need to
turn off the power completely, first turn off the POWER switch,
Repairs and Data
then unplug the power cord from the power outlet. For this 452
reason, the outlet into which you choose to connect the power • Please be aware that all data contained in the unit’s memory may
cord’s plug should be one that is within easy reach and readily be lost when the unit is sent for repairs. Important data should
accessible. always be backed up on an external memory, or written down on
paper (when possible). During repairs, due care is taken to avoid
the loss of data. However, in certain cases (such as when circuitry
Placement related to memory itself is out of order), we regret that it may not
be possible to restore the data, and Roland assumes no liability
351 concerning such loss of data.
• Using the unit near power amplifiers (or other equipment
containing large power transformers) may induce hum. To
alleviate the problem, change the orientation of this unit; or move
it farther away from the source of interference.
Additional Precautions
352a 551
• This device may interfere with radio and television reception. Do • Please be aware that the contents of memory can be irretrievably
not use this device in the vicinity of such receivers. lost as a result of a malfunction, or the improper operation of the
352b unit. To protect yourself against the risk of loosing important
• Noise may be produced if wireless communications devices, such
data, we recommend that you periodically save a backup copy of
as cell phones, are operated in the vicinity of this unit. Such noise
important data you have stored in the unit’s memory on an
could occur when receiving or initiating a call, or while
external memory.
conversing. Should you experience such problems, you should 552
relocate such wireless devices so they are at a greater distance • Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the contents of
from this unit, or switch them off. data that was stored on an external memory once it has been lost.
354b Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning such loss of
• Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it near devices
data.
that radiate heat, leave it inside an enclosed vehicle, or otherwise 553
subject it to temperature extremes. Also, do not allow lighting • Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit’s buttons,
devices that normally are used while their light source is very sliders, or other controls; and when using its jacks and
close to the unit (such as a piano light), or powerful spotlights to connectors. Rough handling can lead to malfunctions.
shine upon the same area of the unit for extended periods of time. 554
Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit. • Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display.
556
355b
• When moved from one location to another where the temper- • When connecting / disconnecting all cables, grasp the connector
ature and/or humidity is very different, water droplets (conden- itself—never pull on the cable. This way you will avoid causing
sation) may form inside the unit. Damage or malfunction may shorts, or damage to the cable’s internal elements.
557
result if you attempt to use the unit in this condition. Therefore, • A small amount of heat will radiate from the unit during normal
before using the unit, you must allow it to stand for several operation.
hours, until the condensation has completely evaporated. 558a
356 • To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the unit’s volume
• Do not allow rubber, vinyl, or similar materials to remain on the at reasonable levels. You may prefer to use headphones, so you
unit for long periods of time. Such objects can discolor or do not need to be concerned about those around you (especially
otherwise harmfully affect the finish. when it is late at night).
358 559b
• Do not allow objects to remain on top of the keyboard. This can • When you need to transport the unit, pack it in shock-absorbent
be the cause of malfunction, such as keys ceasing to produce material. Transporting the unit without doing so can cause it to
sound. become scratched or damaged, and could lead to malfunction.

6
KR107_e.book 7 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

560
• Do not apply undue force to the music rest while it is in use. Handling CD-ROMs
561
• Use only the specified expression pedal (EV-7/5; sold separately). 801
• Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside (encoded
By connecting any other expression pedals, you risk causing
surface) of the disc. Damaged or dirty CD-ROM discs may not be
malfunction and/or damage to the unit.
562
read properly. Keep your discs clean using a commercially
• Use a cable from Roland to make the connection. If using some available CD cleaner.
other make of connection cable, please note the following precau-
tions.
• Some connection cables contain resistors. Do not use cables Before Using External
that incorporate resistors for connecting to this unit. The use
of such cables can cause the sound level to be extremely low, Memory
or impossible to hear. For information on cable specifications,
contact the manufacturer of the cable. Using External Memory
565
• Before opening or closing the keyboard lid, always make sure 705

that no pets or other small animals are located on top of the

• Never touch the terminals of the External memory. Also,
instrument (in particular, they should be kept away from the avoid getting the terminals dirty.
708
keyboard and its lid). Otherwise, due to the structural design of • External memories are constructed using precision
this instrument, small pets or other animals could end up getting
components; handle the cards carefully, paying particular
trapped inside it. If such a situation is encountered, you must
immediately switch off the power and disconnect the power cord
note to the following.
from the outlet. You should then consult with the retailer from • To prevent damage to the cards from static electricity,
whom the instrument was purchased, or contact the nearest be sure to discharge any static electricity from your
Roland Service Center. own body before handling the cards.
• Do not touch or allow metal to come into contact with
Handling Floppy Disks the contact portion of the cards.
(Using Optional Floppy Disk Drive) • Do not bend, drop, or subject cards to strong shock or
651
• Floppy disks contain a plastic disk with a thin coating of
vibration.
magnetic storage medium. Microscopic precision is required to • Do not keep cards in direct sunlight, in closed vehicles,
enable storage of large amounts of data on such a small surface or other such locations (storage temperature: 0 to 50˚
area. To preserve their integrity, please observe the following C).
when handling floppy disks:
• Do not allow cards to become wet.
• Never touch the magnetic medium inside the disk.
• Do not use or store floppy disks in dirty or dusty areas. • Do not disassemble or modify the cards.
704 (revise)
• Do not subject floppy disks to temperature extremes (e.g., • When connecting external memory, make sure to press it
direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle). Recommended
until it is fully inserted.
temperature range: 10 to 50˚C (50 to 122˚F).
• Do not expose floppy disks to strong magnetic fields, such as • Insert the external memory in the External Memory port
those generated by loudspeakers. evenly and without undue force. Forcing the external
652
• Floppy disks have a “write protect” tab which can protect the memory may damage the External Memory port.
disk from accidental erasure. It is recommended that the tab be • Do not insert any object other than the external memory
kept in the PROTECT position, and moved to the WRITE position
(e.g., wires, coins, other types of disks, etc.) in the External
only when you wish to write new data onto the disk.
fig.DiskProtect.e Memory port. This may damage the External Memory
port.
Rear side of the disk
• Do not subject the External Memory port cover or
connected External memory to excessive stress.
Write
(can write new data onto disk) • Close the external memory cover when using the External
memory for extended periods

Write Protect Tab Protect

(prevents writing to disk)
653
• The identification label should be firmly affixed to the disk.
Should the label come loose while the disk is in the drive, it may
be difficult to remove the disk. 203
654 * GS ( ) is a registered trademark of Roland Corpo-
• Store all disks in a safe place to avoid damaging them, and to
protect them from dust, dirt, and other hazards. By using a dirty ration.
or dust-ridden disk, you risk damaging the disk, as well as
causing the disk drive to malfunction. * XG lite ( ) is a registered trademark of Yamaha Corpo-
655 ration.
• Disks containing performance data for this unit should always be 207
locked (have their write protect tab slid to the “Protect” position) * Apple and Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple
before you insert them into the drive on some other unit (except Computer, Inc.
the PR-300, or a product in the HP-G, HPi, MT, KR, or Atelier 220
families), or into a computer’s drive. Otherwise (if the write * All product names mentioned in this document are trade-
protect tab remains in the “Write” position), when you perform marks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
any disk operations using the other device’s disk drive (such as
checking the contents of the disk, or loading data), you risk
rendering the disk unreadable by this unit’s disk drive.

7
KR107_e.book 8 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Introduction
Thank you, and congratulations on your choice of the Roland KR Intelligent Piano.
While the KR Intelligent Piano certainly allows you to achieve authentic piano performances, it also
features easy-to-use Automatic Accompaniment and numerous other useful functions. In order to
enjoy reliable performance of your new keyboard for many years to come, please take the time to read
through this manual in its entirety.

Main Features
❍ Lusciously Resounding, Richly Expressive Piano Sound
The KR107 reproduces the rich tones of a high-quality grand piano, from the sounds of the hammers
as they strike the strings to the sounds made as the keys are released. 128-voice polyphony ensures
full responsiveness, even with heavy use of the pedals.
What’s more, The “Piano Designer” feature allows you to create your own favorite piano tones.

❍ True Grand Piano Feel

The KR107 features Roland’s Progressive Hammer Action keyboard, which reproduces the feel of a
grand piano, with a firm, weighty touch in the lower registers and a lighter response in the upper
registers. This keyboard also faithfully reproduces the distinctive “click” that’s produced when a
grand piano’s keys are played (Escapement function).
In addition to the ability of adjusting the key weight, a “Hammer Response” function, which
reproduces the subtle action of the hammers, is also incorporated, so there are two key-touch controls
that come into play when determining the precise character of the keyboard. Additionally, the
instrument’s pedals are firm and responsive, lending your performances fuller and more detailed
expressiveness.

❍ Accomplish Tasks Easily with the Main Buttons

Almost all of the KR’s common functions, including playing back songs, displaying notations,
running the automatic accompaniment, selecting tones, and so on can be accomplished using the Main
buttons to the left of the screen.

❍ A Wealth of Practice Features to Foster Musical Growth

Use the “Visual Lesson” feature for enjoyable practice and steady improvement.
You can use this function to score the results of your performances and find out which notes have been
played differently than those indicated in the notation.
The KR also scrolls the notation automatically as you play, making your practices even more
convenient.

❍ Connector Allows Enlarged Display of Notation and Lyrics

The KR107 is equipped with a connector for use with televisions and other external displays.
Connecting a large screen to the KR107 allows you to display a greater number of measures at the
same time.

❍ Easy-To-Use “Music Assistant” Automatic Accompaniment

Feature
You can select from an amazing 500 settings to get automatic accompaniment that perfectly matches
the song you are playing.
Each song’s Music Assistant settings are shown in a manner that is easy to grasp, so playing along
with the changes in the accompaniment is a snap.
For easy enjoyment of Music Assistant, the KR107 also includes songs that you can perform while
reading the chord charts.

8
KR107_e.book 9 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Introduction

❍ Color Display for Easy Operation

The KR107 features a color screen touch panel with rich graphics to make viewing easier. Operations
can be carried out easily, just by touching the screen.

❍ Utilizes External Memory–the New Media

You can save song data created on the KR107 to External memory (sold separately). Extremely
portable, high-capacity external memory also connects easily to computers, allowing song data to be
transferred easily. Taking further advantage of the high-capacity memory, you can also play back
audio files with the KR107.

How To Use This Manual

The KR Owner’s Manual consists of three volumes, Quick Start, Owner’s Manual, and the USB
Install Guide.
Please start out by reading “Before You Start Playing” (p. 17) in the Owner’s Manual (this volume).
This explains how to connect the KR’s power cord and how to turn on the instrument’s power.
After turning on the KR’s power, please continue by reading Quick Start.
By trying out the various procedures while reading the Quick Start, you can easily learn how to play
the KR and make use of its major functions (especially procedures that involve use of the “main
buttons”).
The Owner’s Manual describes procedures, from basic operation to procedures for special
applications (for example, using the KR as an accompanist and creating songs), that will help you
master the KR’s many performance functions.
When connecting a computer to the USB port, be sure to read the USB Install Guide. This describes
the procedure for installing the driver needed to connect via USB.
* For more on system requirements, refer to the “USB Installation Guide.” However, note that the
KR107 is not compatible with Mac OS 9.

■ Conventions Used in This Manual

This manual uses the following conventions in the interest of simpler, more concise instructions.
• Button names are enclosed in square brackets “[ ]”, as in One Touch Program [Piano]
button.
• For easier readability, some screens and colors used here may differ in part from actual
screens and colors.
• On screen text is enclosed in angled brackets “< >”, as in <Exit>.
• The act of lightly contacting the Touch Screen with your finger is called “touching.”

• An asterisk (*) or a NOTE at the beginning of a paragraph indicates a note or

precaution. These should not be ignored.
• (p. **) refers to pages within the manual.

9
KR107_e.book 10 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Contents
USING THE UNIT SAFELY ................................................. 3 Chapter 1 Performance ........................... 22
IMPORTANT NOTES............................................................ 6
Playing the Keyboard Like a Piano
(One-Touch Piano) ............................................................... 22
Introduction.................................................8
Performing with a Variety of Tones (Tone Buttons) ....... 23
Main Features.......................................................................... 8 Playing Percussion Instruments or Sound Effects...... 24
How To Use This Manual ..................................................... 9 Using Keywords to Search for Tones
Conventions Used in This Manual ................................. 9 (Tone Search).................................................................... 25
Performing with Multiple Sounds Layered Together
Panel Descriptions ...................................14 (Layer) .................................................................................... 26
Playing Different Tones with the Left and Right Hands
Performance Pads............................................................ 14
(Split) ...................................................................................... 27
Record/Playback............................................................. 15
Shifting the Keyboard Pitch in Octave Steps
Rear Panel.............................................................................. 16 (Octave Shift).................................................................... 28
Bottom Panel ......................................................................... 16 Adding Reverberation to the Sound (Reverb) ................. 29
Bottom Panel (Front Left)............................................... 16 Adding Three-Dimensional Breadth to the Sounds You
Bottom Panel (Front Right) ............................................ 16 Play (Advanced 3D) ............................................................. 31
Adding Liveliness to the Sound (Dynamic Emphasis)... 33
Before You Start Playing .........................17 Adjusting the Sound to Achieve the Preferred Tone
Quality (Equalizer)............................................................... 34
Connect the Pedal Cable...................................................... 17
Applying Effects to the Sound (Effects) ............................ 36
Connect the Speaker Cable ................................................. 17
Adding Effects to Mic Vocals (Vocal Effect)..................... 37
Connect the Power Cord ..................................................... 17
Enjoying Karaoke Performances with Music Files..... 43
Setting Up the Music Rest ................................................... 17
Using the Metronome .......................................................... 44
Folding Down the Music Rest ....................................... 17
Using the Metronome ..................................................... 44
Using the Music Holders................................................ 17
Changing the Metronome Settings ............................... 45
Removing the Music Rest............................................... 18
Installing Batteries in the Remote Control........................ 18
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment... 47
Opening/Closing the Lid.................................................... 18
Turning the Power On and Off .......................................... 18 Music Styles and Automatic Accompaniment................. 47

About the Pedals .................................................................. 19 Performing Using Automatic Accompaniment

(One-Touch Arranger) ......................................................... 48
Adjusting the Sound’s Volume and Brilliance................. 19
About Chords................................................................... 49
Connecting Headphones ..................................................... 19
Playing Chords with Simple Fingering
Using the Headphone Hook .......................................... 20
(Chord Intelligence) ........................................................ 49
Connecting a Microphone................................................... 20
Viewing Chord Fingerings (Chord Finder) ................. 50
About the Touch Screen ...................................................... 20
Selecting Music Styles (Music Style Buttons) ................... 51
Adjusting the Contrast of the Screen............................ 20
Using Keywords to Search for Music Styles
Main Screens ......................................................................... 21 (Style Search).................................................................... 52
Piano Screen ..................................................................... 21 Selecting Music Styles on External Memories............. 53
Basic Screen ...................................................................... 21 Playing Only Music Style Rhythm Patterns ..................... 54
Using the Main Icons ...................................................... 21 Adjusting the Accompaniment Tempo............................. 54
The [Option] Button and The [Exit] Button................. 21 Starting and Stopping the Accompaniment ..................... 55
The Scroll Bar and The Page Icon ................................. 21 Having the Accompaniment Start Simultaneously
When You Play the Keyboard (Sync Start).................. 55
Stopping Automatic Accompaniment.......................... 56
Having a Count Sound Play at the End of the Intro
(Countdown).................................................................... 57

10
KR107_e.book 11 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Contents

Modifying an Accompaniment .......................................... 58 Placing a Marker within a Song .................................... 85

Changing the Accompaniment Pattern Playback from a Marker Location................................. 86
(Fill In Buttons) ................................................................ 58 Erasing a Marker ............................................................. 86
Changing Accompaniment Patterns in the Screen..... 59 Moving a Marker............................................................. 86
Changing the Instrumental Makeup of Music Styles Playing Back the Same Passage Over and Over ......... 87
(Style Orchestrator) ......................................................... 59
Transposing Keyboard Sounds and Songs Played Back
Adding Harmony to the Right-Hand Part (Transpose) ............................................................................ 88
(Melody Intelligence) ........................................................... 60
Playing Sounds in the Left Hand During a Performance Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the
(Lower Tone)......................................................................... 61
Performance ............................................. 90
Playing the Piano with Accompaniment Added
(Piano Style Arranger) ......................................................... 62 Recording a New Song (New Song) .................................. 91
Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each Part Recording With Accompaniment ...................................... 93
(Balance)................................................................................. 63 Recording Along with a Song............................................. 95
Changing the Volume Balance Between the Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons
Accompaniment and the Keyboard (Redoing Recordings) .......................................................... 96
(Balance Knob)................................................................. 63
Erasing Recorded Performances ........................................ 97
Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each Performance
Erasing the Performance on Specific Tracks ............... 97
Part (Part Balance) ........................................................... 63
Changing How Recording Stops........................................ 97
Recording Songs Starting with Pickups............................ 98
Chapter 3 Song Playback ........................65
Using External Memories.................................................... 99
Playing a Song ...................................................................... 65
Connecting and Ejecting an External Memory ........... 99
Using Keywords to Search for Songs
Formatting Media (Format) ......................................... 100
(Song Search).................................................................... 68
Saving Songs ....................................................................... 102
Registering the Songs You Like (Favorites)...................... 69
Deleting Saved Songs......................................................... 105
Removing Songs From Favorites .................................. 70
Copying Songs on External Memories to Favorites ...... 106
Using the Remote Control................................................... 71
Copying Songs Saved in Favorites to External
How to Use the Remote Control ................................... 71
Memories ........................................................................ 107
About the Remote Control ............................................. 72

Chapter 6 User Program Registration.. 108

Chapter 4 Practice Functions..................74
Saving Performance Settings (User Program)................ 108
Displaying the Notation ...................................................... 74
Calling Up Saved User Programs .................................... 109
Touching Notes to Confirm the Sounds
Changing the Way User Programs Are
(Touch the Notes) ............................................................ 75
Called Up........................................................................ 109
Scrolling the Notation Along with the Performances
Saving the User Program Sets .......................................... 109
(AutoSync DigiScore) ..................................................... 75
Loading Saved User Program Sets.............................. 110
Making Detailed Settings for
Deleting Saved User Program Sets .................................. 111
the Notation Display....................................................... 76
Copying Sets of User Programs on External Memories
Saving Notations as Image Data ................................... 79
to the User Memory ........................................................... 111
Adjusting the Tempo ........................................................... 81
Coping Sets of User Programs Stored in the User
Setting the Tempo by Pressing the Button in Time
Memory to External Memories.................................... 112
(Tap Tempo)..................................................................... 81
Using the Pedal to Switch User Programs...................... 112
Playing Back at a Fixed Tempo (Tempo Mute)........... 82
Selecting the Pedal Used for Switching Settings
Match the Tempo Before You Begin Playing
(Pedal Shift) .................................................................... 112
(Count In) .............................................................................. 83
Sequential Loading of User Program Sets Stored
Muting Some Parts Before Playing (Track Buttons)........ 84
(Load Next)..................................................................... 112
Setting Markers for Repeated Practice (Marker) ............. 85

11
KR107_e.book 12 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Contents

Simultaneously Switching User Program and Transmitting Creating a Style from a Song You Composed
PC Numbers ........................................................................ 113 Yourself (Style Converter)............................................ 132
Saving a User Style............................................................. 135
Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs.114 Deleting Saved User Styles .......................................... 136

Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts Copying Styles on External Memories to

(16-Track Sequencer).......................................................... 114 the User Memory................................................................ 137

The 16-Track Sequencer Screen ................................... 114 Copying Styles Saved in the User Memory
to External Memories.................................................... 137
Modifying the Settings of Each Part ........................... 115
Getting the Most Suitable Part Tones for
the Musical Genre (Tone Set)....................................... 116
Chapter 9 Various Settings ................... 138
Recording a Performance ............................................. 116 Changing the Settings for One-Touch Arranger............ 138
Changing the Recording Method (Rec Mode) ............... 117 Procedure........................................................................ 138
Recording While Erasing the Previous Recording Adjusting the Keyboard Touch (Key Touch) ............ 138
(Replace Recording) ...................................................... 118 Changing Music Styles Without Changing
Layering a Recording Over Previously Recorded the Tone or Tempo (One Touch Setting).................... 139
Sounds (Mix Recording)............................................... 118 Changing the Keyboard’s Split Point
Repeated Recording at the Same Location (Split Point)..................................................................... 139
(Loop Recording)........................................................... 118 Changing How Chords Are Played and Specified
Re-Recording Part of Your Performance (Arranger Config).......................................................... 139
(Punch-in Recording).................................................... 119 Placing a Marker in the Middle of a Measure ................ 141
Composing an Accompaniment By Entering Chords Changing the Settings for the Count ............................... 141
(Chord Sequencer).............................................................. 121
Other Settings...................................................................... 142
Inputting Chords without Playing the Keyboard .... 122
Procedure........................................................................ 142
Editing Songs ...................................................................... 122
Changing the Tuning (Tuning) ................................... 143
Basic Operation of the Editing Functions .................. 122
Assigning Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads
Undoing Edits (Undo) .................................................. 123 (Pedal Setting/User Functions)................................... 144
Copying Measures (Copy) ........................................... 123 Changing the Bend Range (Pedal Setting)................. 146
Correcting Timing Discrepancies (Quantize)............ 124 Changing Standard Pitch (Master Tune) ................... 146
Deleting Measures (Delete).......................................... 124 Changing the Language (Language) .......................... 147
Inserting Blank Measures (Insert) ............................... 125 Selecting Images To Be Shown on the KR and
Transposing Individual Parts (Transpose) ................ 125 External Displays
Making Measures Blank (Erase).................................. 126 (User Image Display) .................................................... 147

Exchanging Parts (Part Exchange).............................. 126 Changing the Screen Message When the Power Is
Turned On (Opening Message)................................... 148
Correcting Notes One by One (Note Edit)................. 127
Remembering the Settings Even When the Power is
Modifying the Tone Changes in a Song (PC Edit).... 127
Turned Off (Memory Backup)..................................... 148
Changing the Beat in the Middle of a Song
Restoring the Factory Settings (Factory Reset) ......... 149
(Beat Map) ........................................................................... 128
Changing the Functions of the Remote Control’s
Changing the Tempo of Recorded Songs ....................... 128
Buttons ............................................................................ 149
Changing the Tempo Within the Song............................ 128
Switching the Remote Sensor On and Off
Adjusting the Tempo While Listening to a Song...... 128 (iR function).................................................................... 150
Adjusting the Tempo at a Particular Measure .......... 129 Calibrating the Touch Screen (Touch Screen) ........... 150
Selecting the Part to Which the Effect is Added
Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles...........130 (EffectsPart) ......................................................................... 151

Creating Original Styles (User Styles) ............................. 130 Formatting the User Memory ........................................... 152

Creating New Styles by Combining Internal Music Automatically Starting the Quick Tour........................... 152
Styles (Style Composer)................................................ 130 Adjusting the Piano Designer Resonance ....................... 153

12
KR107_e.book 13 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Contents

Disabling Functions Other Than Piano Performance Appendices............................................. 167

(Panel Lock)......................................................................... 153
Error Messages.................................................................... 171
Detailed Song Playback Settings ...................................... 154
Tone List .............................................................................. 172
Changing the Tone Settings When Playing Back Songs
(Play Mode) .................................................................... 154 Drum Set List ...................................................................... 174

Viewing Song Information (Information)................. 154 SFX Set............................................................................. 177

Hiding the Lyrics (Lyrics) ............................................ 154 Effects List ........................................................................... 178

Changing the Parts Assigned to the Track Buttons Music Style List................................................................... 179
During SMF Playback (Track Assign) ........................ 155 Chord List ............................................................................ 180
Internal Song List ............................................................... 182
Chapter 10 Connecting Parameters Stored to Internal Memory........................... 184
External Devices.....................................156 Music Files That the KR Can Use..................................... 185

Connecting an External Display or Television............... 156 The KR allows you to use the following music files 185

Connecting an External Display.................................. 156 About the KR Sound Generator .................................. 185

Connecting a Television ............................................... 157 Main Specifications ............................................................ 187

Changing the Settings for Showing Images with

the External Display and the Television Index........................................................ 189
(External Display).......................................................... 158
Explanation of Each Items............................................ 158
Connecting Video Equipment (V-LINK) ........................ 159
Using the V-LINK function.......................................... 159
Connecting MIDI Devices ................................................. 160
Connectors...................................................................... 160
Making the Connections .............................................. 160
Performing in Ensemble with MIDI Instruments
(MIDI Ensemble) ................................................................ 161
MIDI Settings ...................................................................... 161
Selecting the Transmit Channel (Tx Channel) .......... 162
Disconnecting the Internal Sound Generator and
Keyboard (Local Control)............................................. 162
Sending Tone Change Messages (Program Change/
Bank Select MSB/Bank Select LSB) ............................ 163
Sending Recorded Performance Data to a MIDI Device
(Composer MIDI Out) ....................................................... 163
Connecting to Audio Equipment ..................................... 163
Connectors...................................................................... 163
Making the Connections .............................................. 164
Connecting a Computer .................................................... 165
Connect to the MIDI Connectors ................................ 165
Connect to the USB Connector .................................... 165
Making the Settings for the USB Driver..................... 166
Troubleshooting.................................................................. 167

13
KR107_e.book 14 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Panel Descriptions

3 5 7 9 11 12 14 18 19 20

2 4 6 8 10 13 15 16 17 21 22
Power

1
1. [Power] switch 13. [1]–[3] buttons
Pressed to switch the power on and off (p. 18). The operation of each is changed depending on the
buttons numbered 11-12.
2. [Volume] knob
Adjusts the overall volume (p. 19). 14. Music Style buttons
Selects a Music Style for automatic accompaniment (p.
3. [Sound Control] button
51).
Add liveliness to the sound to give it superb clarity and
Pressing the [User] button selects a User Style that
distinctness.
you’ve made yourself or a Music Style on external
4. [Brilliance] knob memory (p. 53).
Adjusts the brightness of the sound (p. 19). 15. Fill In buttons
5. [Part Balance] button Inserts a fill-in in an automatic accompaniment and
This adjusts the relative volume levels of each of the changes the accompaniment pattern (p. 58).
performance parts (p. 63). [To Variation] button
[To Original] button
6. [Balance] knob
Changes the volume balance for sounds played with the 16. [Intro/Ending] button
keyboard and for songs and accompaniments (p. 63). Play an intro or ending during automatic
accompaniment (p. 55).
7. [Transpose] button
Transposes the pitch of the keyboard or the song being 17. [Start/Stop] button
played (p. 88). Starts and stops automatic accompaniment (p. 55).

8. [Vocal Effect] Button 18. [Count/Marker] button

Applies a variety of effects to vocals from the You can change the count settings (p. 57, p. 83).
microphone (p. 36). These allow you to add and move markers in the
notation as well as repeat playback of song segments
9. [Ambience/Reverb] button simply and easily (p. 85).
Adds reverberation to the sound (p. 29).
Adds three-dimensional breadth to the sound (p. 31). 19. Beat Indicator
This lights up in correspondence with the beat of the
10. [User Program] button selected song or accompaniment.
Stores the selected functions and states of the buttons (p.
108). 20. [Metronome] button
Activates the built-in metronome (p. 44).
Performance Pads 21. Tempo [-] [+] buttons
11. [Style Orchestrator] button Adjusts the tempo.
This is used to change the arrangement type for Press the [-] and [+] buttons at the same time to return to
automatic accompaniment with the Performance Pads the original tempo.
(p. 58).
12. [User Function] button
This is used to assign a variety of functions to the
Performance Pads (p. 144).

14
KR107_e.book 15 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Panel Descriptions

23 24 27 28 31 32 38 40

2526 29 30 33 34 35 36 37 39

22. Main Buttons Record/Playback

→ See the Quick Start 31. [Menu] button
[Song/File] button You can select functions for playing back, recording or
Use this button to select internal songs or songs from editing a song (p. 97,p. 114, p. 130, p. 154).
external memories (p. 65).
[DigiScore] button 32. Track buttons
Displays notations (p. 74). Used to play back or record each track of a song (p. 84, p.
[Visual Lesson] button 96).
You can use the practice function. 33. [ (Reset)] button
[Piano Designer] button (p. 153) Resets the song playback-start location to the beginning
[Music Assistant] button (p. 153) of the song.
[Super Tones] button
34. [ (Play/Stop)] button
23. Touch Screen
Starts and stops playback or recording a song.
This lets you perform a variety of operations just by
touching the screen (p. 20). 35. [ (Rec)] button
When pressed, this button places the instrument in
24. Dial
recording standby (p. 91, p. 114).
Use this to change on-screen values.
36. [ (Bwd)] button
25. [Exit] button
Rewinds the song.
Returns you to the previous screen.
37. [ (Fwd)] button
26. [Option] button
Fast-forwards the song.
Displays a screen for advance function settings.
38. Infrared Receiver
27. Contrast knob
Point the remote control at this sensor when using the
Adjusts the contrast of the screen (p. 20).
remote control to operate the KR107 (p. 72).
28. [Tone] buttons
39. [Wonderland/Game] button
Select the Tones that will be played from the keyboard
Here you can learn about instruments while having fun.
(p. 23).
→ See the Quick Start
29. One Touch Program button
40. External Memory port
[Piano] button
Connects an external memory to play (p. 65) and save songs (p.
Makes the optimal settings for a piano performance (p.
99).
22).
[Arranger] button * Be sure to close the cover of the External Memory port after
Makes the optimal settings for playing with automatic connecting USB memory to the External Memory port.
accompaniment (p. 48).
30. [Melody Intelligence] button
Adds harmony to the sounds played with the keyboard
(p. 60).

15
KR107_e.book 16 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Panel Descriptions

Rear Panel
fig.panelRear

4 5 6 7
1 2 3

1. Speaker jack 4. Expression pedal jack

Connect the speaker cable of the stand (p. 17). You can connect an expression pedal to the KR (p. 156).
2. Ext Display connector 5. Pedal connector
Connect an external display. You can put notations on Connect the pedal cable of the stand to this connector (p.
the screen and display lyrics (p. 156). 17).
This cannot be used simultaneously with the Video Out
6. Input jacks
jack.
These jacks can be connected to another sound
3. Video Out jack generating device or an audio device, so that the sound
Connect a television here. This allows you to display the of that device will be output from the KR’s speakers (p.
notations and lyrics on the connected television set (p. 163).
157).
7. Output jacks
This cannot be used simultaneously with the Ext Display
These jacks can be connected to your audio system to
connector.
enjoy more powerful sound. They can also be connected

Bottom Panel
Bottom Panel (Front Left) Bottom Panel (Front Right)
fig.panelbottom fig.panelUSB

1 2 3 4 5
6
1. Phones jacks 6. Floppy disk drive connector
A set of headphones can be connected here (p. 19). Connects an optional floppy disk drive to play and save
songs.
2. Mic Volume knob
Adjusts the volume level for the microphone (p. 20). * Use floppy disk drive available from Roland.

3. Mic In jack
Used for connecting microphones (p. 20).
4. MIDI Out/In connectors
These can be connected to an external MIDI device to
exchange performance data (p. 160).
5. USB connector
You can connect a computer and exchange performance
data between the instrument and the computer (p. 165).

16
KR107_e.book 17 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Start Playing
Before You Start Playing

Before You
Connect the Pedal Cable Connect the Power Cord
Insert the pedal cable into the Pedal connector on the Insert the included power cord into the AC inlet on the
rear panel of the KR107. bottom panel of the KR107, and then plug it into an
fig.00-01
electrical outlet.

NOTE

Be sure to use the supplied power cord.

fig.00-02

Connect the Speaker Cable

As shown in the diagram, connect the speaker cable
leading from the speaker box of the stand to the speaker Setting Up the Music Rest
connector located on the rear bottom panel of the KR107.
1. Grasping the music rest with both hands, lift it toward
Push the speaker cable in until it clicks into position.
you until its in the upright position.

KR107 Rear 2. Use the support on the back of the music rest to keep
the stand in place.

The angle of the music rest can be set to any of three

Speaker connector positions.
Clip portion fig.mu_stand

Speaker cable
1
2
NOTE

Do not place containers holding liquids (such as flower vases),

insecticide, perfume, alcohol, or similar substances on top of this
piano.
The speakers of this piano are mounted beneath the upper surface,
and face upwards. Malfunctions or accidents may occur if liquids
contact any part of the speakers.
■ Folding Down the Music Rest
1. Raise the support located on the back of the music rest,
Speakers then gently fold down the music rest.

■ Using the Music Holders

You can use the holders to hold pages in place.
When not using the holders, leave them folded down.
fig.mu_stand4

17
 KR107_e.book 18 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分
Start Playing
Before You

Before You Start Playing

■ Removing the Music Rest Opening/Closing the Lid

You can remove the music rest from the piano.
This allows you to place a notebook computer on the piano. To open the lid, use both hands to lift it lightly, and
slide it away from yourself.
Position the music rest so it’s upright, then remove the
two screws, as shown. To close the lid, pull it gently toward yourself, and
lower it softly after it has been fully extended.
You can remove the screws using a coin.
fig.00-05
fig.mu_stand3

NOTE

When opening and closing the lid, be careful not to let your fingers
get caught. If small children will be using the KR107, adult
supervision should be provided.
NOTE NOTE
Be careful not to lose the screws that you removed from the music If you need to move the piano, make sure the lid is closed first to
rest, or put them where they might be swallowed by small children. prevent accidents.

Installing Batteries in the Turning the Power On and

Remote Control Off
Install the batteries provided in the remote control.
fig.Remote Control-1.j NOTE
Remote Control’s (Rear)
Turn on power to your various devices in the order specified. By
turning on devices in the wrong order, you risk causing malfunction
and/or damage to speakers and other devices.
941

To turn the power on, turn the [Volume] knob all the
Remote way down, and then press the [Power] switch.
Control’s
Cover The power will turn on, and the Power indicator at the
left front of the KR107 will light.
After a few seconds, you will be able to play the
keyboard to produce sound.
Use the [Volume] knob to adjust the volume.

1. Open the battery cover on the back of the remote NOTE

control. This unit is equipped with a protection circuit. A brief interval (a few
seconds) after power up is required before the unit will operate
2. Insert the supplied AA batteries, as shown in the figure
normally.
of remote control. 942
fig.00-06.e

3. Close the battery cover.

Power

NOTE

Be careful to observe the correct polarity (+, - direction) when

installing the batteries.

For more information on the remote control button functions, refer Power Indicator
to “Using the Remote Control” (p. 71).

18
KR107_e.book 19 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Start Playing
Before You
Before You Start Playing

To turn the power off, turn the [Volume] knob all the when placing the instrument on carpet, adjust this so
way to the left, and press the [Power] switch. that the pedals firmly contact the floor.
fig.00-09.j

The Power indicator at the left front of the KR107 will go

dark, and the power will be turned off.
945
• If you need to turn off the power completely, first turn off the
POWER switch, then unplug the power cord from the power
Adjuster
outlet. Refer to Power Supply (p. 6).

About the Pedals Adjusting the Sound’s

The pedals have the following functions, and are used Volume and Brilliance
mainly for piano performance.
fig.00-08.e Turn the [Volume] knob to adjust the overall volume.

Turn the [Brilliance] knob to adjust the brightness of

the sound.
fig.00-07.e

Soft Pedal Damper Pedal

Sostenuto Pedal

Damper pedal (right pedal)

While this pedal is pressed, notes will be sustained even after
you take your fingers off the keys.
The length of the sustain changes subtly according to the Connecting Headphones
extent to which the pedal is depressed.
The KR107 has two jacks for plugging in headphones. This
On an acoustic piano, holding down the damper pedal will
allows two people to listen through headphones
allow the remaining strings to resonate in sympathy with the
simultaneously, making it very useful for lessons and when
sounds that you played from the keyboard, adding a rich
performing piano pieces for four hands. Additionally, this
resonance.
allows you to play without having to worry about bothering
The KR107 simulates this damper resonance. others around you, even at night.
Plug the headphones into the Phones jack located at the
bottom left of the piano.
You can change the amount of resonance applied with the damper
Connecting headphones will automatically mute the
pedal. Please refer to “[Piano Designer] button” in the Quick Manual.
sound from the internal speakers.
Sostenuto pedal (center pedal) The headphone volume is adjusted by the [Volume]
knob of the KR107.
This pedal sustains only the sounds of the keys that were
fig.00-04.e
already played when you pressed the pedal.

Soft pedal (left pedal)

When you hold down this pedal and play the keyboard, the
sound will have a softer tone.
The softness of the sound changes subtly depending on the
extent to which the pedal is depressed.
Phones jack x 2
About the Adjuster
When you move the KR107 or if you feel that the pedals are
NOTE
unstable, adjust the adjuster located below the pedals as
Use Stereo headphones.
follows.
❍ Rotate the adjuster to lower it so that it is in firm contact
with the floor. If there is a gap between the pedals and
the floor, the pedals may be damaged. In particular

19
 KR107_e.book 20 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分
Start Playing
Before You

Before You Start Playing

Some Notes on Using Headphones Some Notes on Using a Microphone

• To prevent damage to the cord, handle the headphones • Be careful of high volume levels when using microphone
only by the headset or the plug. late at night or early in the morning.
• Connecting the headphones when the volume of • When connecting a microphone to the KR107, be sure to
connected equipment is turned up may result in damage lower the volume. If the volume control is too high when
to the headphones. Lower the volume on the KR107 the microphone is plugged in, noise may be produced by
before plugging in the headphones. the speakers.
• Listening at excessively high volume levels will not only • Howling could be produced depending on the location
damage the headphones, but may also cause hearing of microphones relative to speakers. This can be
loss. Use the headphones at a moderate volume level. remedied by:
1. Changing the orientation of the microphone(s).
■ Using the Headphone Hook 2. Relocating microphone(s) at a greater distance from
Whenever you are not using the headphones, you can hang them on speakers.
the headphone hook at the lower left of the KR107. 3. Lowering volume levels.
983
Attaching the Headphone Hook
Press and twist the headphone hook included with the KR107 into
the hole in the bottom of the KR107 (refer to the figure below). About the Touch Screen
Turn the headphone hook thumbscrew to secure the headphone
hook.
The KR makes use of a touch screen.
This lets you carry out a wide variety of actions just by
touching the screen lightly.

NOTE

The touch screen is operated by touching it lightly with your finger.

Pressing hard, or using a hard object can damage the touch screen.
Be careful not to press too hard, and be sure to use only your fingers
to operate the touch screen.
Thumbscrew
NOTE

The positioning of the touch screen may become displaced due to

Connecting a Microphone changes in the surrounding environment and over time. If this
happens, follow the steps in “Calibrating the Touch Screen (Touch
You can connect a microphone into the Mic In jack, and enjoy
Screen)” (p. 150) to correct the pointer position.
karaoke with the KR107.
fig.00-10

Mic In jack NOTE

Mic Volume knob
Do not place items on the touch screen.

■ Adjusting the Contrast of the

Screen
To adjust the contrast of the screen, turn the Contrast
knob located at the right side of the screen.

1. Connect a microphone (sold separately) to the Mic In

jack on the lower-left area of the instrument.

2. Rotate the [Mic Volume] knob on left side of the Mic In

jack to adjust the volume level for the microphone.

20
KR107_e.book 21 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Start Playing
Before You
Before You Start Playing

Main Screens When you select an internal song or music

files that includes the lyrics data, this icon
appears in the Piano screen or Basic screen.
■ Piano Screen Touch this to display the lyrics.
Immediately after the power is turned on, the Piano screen
NOTE
like the one below is displayed. For details, refer to p. 22.
The explanations in this manual include illustrations that depict
what should typically be shown by the display. Note, however, that
your unit may incorporate a newer, enhanced version of the system
(e.g., includes newer sounds), so what you actually see in the display
may not always match what appears in the manual.
985

■ The [Option] Button and The

[Exit] Button

■ Basic Screen
The following screen is called Basic screen.

Song name or
Tempo Music Style name Beat Measure

The [Option] Button

The Tone names are
selected appear.
This displays a screen for advance function settings.
The screen that opens differs depending on the screen that
These information are was displayed when the button was pressed.
displayed, when you use the
automatic accompaniment. The [Exit] Button
Touch to cancel the settings currently being made and close
You can usually display this screen by pressing [Exit] button the screen displayed. Normally, pressing the [Exit] button
several times. one or more times returns you to the Basic screen.
Follow either of the procedures described below to display it.
• Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button. ■ The Scroll Bar and The Page
The Basic screen appears and the settings are made for Icon
automatic accompaniment. The Song and Tone selection screens feature a scroll bar at
• Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button, then press the right of the screen list, with page icons at the top and
one of the Tone buttons, then press the [Exit] button. bottom of the scroll bar.

■ Using the Main Icons Page icon

You can many other screens besides the Basic screen to do Scroll bar

things. The on-screen graphics that appear three dimensional

work like buttons. These are called “Icons.”
Page icon
The main icons you can use on these screens are as follows.

Some screens consist on two or more pages.

You can display the next page or the previous
page of the screen by touching these icons. Touch the scroll bar and drag up and down to scroll through
the list.

Touch the page icons < >< > to change pages.

21
 KR107_e.book 22 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 1 Performance
Playing the Keyboard Like a Piano
(One-Touch Piano)
You can create the optimal settings for a piano performance with the press of a single
Chapter 1

button.
fig.panel1-1

1. Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.

Since this instrument faithfully
A “Piano screen” like the one shown below will appear.
reproduces real acoustic piano
fig.d-piano.eps_60
action and response, keys
played in the top one-and-one-
half-octave range continue to
resonate, regardless of the
damper pedal action, and the
tone in this range is audibly
different. The Key Transpose
setting (p. 88) can also be used
to change the range that is
unaffected by the damper
pedal.

When you press the One Touch Program [Piano] button, the KR will switch to the You can change the piano
performance settings by
following settings, regardless of the current panel settings.
touching the [Piano Designer]
• If the keyboard has been split into upper and lower sections (p. 27), the button. For more details, refer
keyboard returns to a single section. to “[Piano Designer] Button”
in the Quick Start.
• The pedals return to their usual functions (p. 19).
• The Grand Piano sound is automatically selected.
• The effect is automatically set to “Damper Resonance” (p. 36). When you select an internal
song or music file that includes

the lyrics data, < >

appears in the Piano screen or
Basic screen. Touch this to
display the lyrics.

< > appears in the Piano

screen or Basic screen when
headphones are connected.
You can add three-
dimensional breadth to the
sound from the headphones
(p. 31).

22
KR107_e.book 23 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 1 Performance

Performing with a Variety of Tones

(Tone Buttons)
The KR comes with a many built-in instrument sounds and effects. This lets you For more about the names of

Chapter 1
enjoy perform in a wide range of musical styles. Tones, take a look at the “Tone

The built-in sounds are called “Tones.” The sounds are organized into six tone List” (p. 172).

groups, which are assigned to the Tone buttons.

fig.panel1-2

1. Press any one of the Tone buttons to select a tone group.

You’ll see that button’s indicator light up.

The screen displays the tone names included in the tone group you’ve selected.
fig.d-tonesel.eps_60

This screen is called the “Tone selection screen.”

Tones indicated by is called an “EX voice.” These voices are especially

recommended.

Tones indicated by a red mark produce the “Key Off Sound.”

What “Key Off Sound” does is recreate the tonal changes produced when the fingers
are released from the keys.
Tones indicated by “GS” is GS tones.
Touch and drag up and down in the scroll bar to scroll through the screen and
display other tones.

Touch the page icons < >< > to change pages.

You can touch <Audition> for an audio demonstration of a particular tone.

You can touch <Effects> to add effect sounds to a variety of tones (p. 36).
You can do searches for tones according to search parameters or by name by
touching <Search> (p. 25).

23
 KR107_e.book 24 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 1 Performance

2. Touch a tone name to select the tone.

You’ll hear the tone you’ve selected when you play the keyboard.
You can use the dial to scroll through the screen as you switch the Tones to be
played.
Chapter 1

3. Press the [Exit] button.

This returns you to the Basic screen or the previous screen.

■ Playing Percussion Instruments or Sound Effects

You can use the keyboard to play percussion sounds or effects like sirens and animal
sounds.
fig.panel1-2

1. Press the [Super Tones] button and watch the indicator light up.

2. Touch < >< > several times to display the “Drums” screen or the
“SFX (SOUND EFFECT)” screen.
fig.d-drum.eps_60

Drum screen SFX screen

Each note of the keyboard will play a different sound.

You can also have play sounds by touching the screen. The combination of sounds
assigned to the keyboard
You can select other drum tones by pressing the < > or < > buttons. varies according to the drum
set. Take a look at the “Drum
3. Press the [Exit] button several times. Set List” (p. 174) and “SFX Set”
(p. 177).
This returns you to the Basic screen or the previous screen.

24
KR107_e.book 25 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 1 Performance

■ Using Keywords to Search for Tones (Tone Search)

You can search for tones that match the conditions you set for instrument or musical
style. You can also search the tones using the first character of the tone name.

1. Press any Tone button.

Chapter 1
The tone selection screen appears.

2. Touch <Search>.

The following “Tone search screen” appears.

fig.d-tonesrch1.eps_60

Condition Search screen Name Search screen

Touch here to switch these screens.

Searching by Conditions

3. Touch <Category> or <Genre>, then use the dial to select the search In condition search, tones
satisfying all of the selected
conditions.
search criteria are sought.

4. Touch <Search>.

The search results appear in the display.

Touch the tone name to select the tone.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the tone selection screen.

Searching by Tone Name

3 Touch <By Name>.

Touch <By Key> to go to the condition search screen.

4. Decide which character is to be used for the search.

The selected character appears in the middle of the screen.
Enter the character you’re searching for. For example, touching <ABC> in succession
cycles you through the available choices in that character group (“A”→”B”→”C”...).
Touching <A-0> selects the type of character. Each time you touch <A-0>, the
character switches between alphabets and numerals.

5. Touch <Search>.
The search results appear in the display.
Touch the tone name to select the Tone.
Press the [Exit] button several times to return to the Basic screen or the previous
screen.

25
 KR107_e.book 26 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 1 Performance

Performing with Multiple Sounds

Layered Together (Layer)
Two tones sounding together when you press a single key is referred to as a “layer
Chapter 1

performance.”
For instance, it’s possible to play the Tones for both Piano and Strings simultaneously.
fig.layer.e

Grand Piano 1
Strings 1
Strings 2 When you select an internal
song or music file that includes

1. Touch <Layer 1>. the lyrics data, < >

fig.d-layer.eps_60 appears in the Basic screen.
Touch this to display the lyrics.

< > appears in the Piano

screen or Basic screen when
headphones are connected.
You can add three-
dimensional breadth to the
sound from the headphones
(p. 31).

The tone that was sounding before you switched to layer performance, plus the tone
indicated in the lower part of the display, are now played together.
When you touch Octave
Here, the tone appearing in the upper part of the display is called the “upper tone,”
<-><+> on the tone selection
and the tone appearing in the lower part of the display is called the “layer tone.”
screen, the pitch of the
In the same manner, you can touch <Layer 2> to layer further sounds.
keyboard’s sound is changed

Changing the Tones in octave units. To learn more,

see “Shifting the Keyboard
2. Touch the name of the tone to be changed. Pitch in Octave Steps (Octave
Shift)” (p. 28).
Touch here to highlight the tone name.

3. Press a Tone button to select the new tone (p. 23).

4. When you have selected the tone, press the [Exit] button.
You can change the balance of
The display returns to the Basic screen. the right-hand and Layer Tone
volume. For instructions, see
Cancelling the Layer
“Adjusting the Volume

5. Touch <Layer 1>.

Balance for Each Performance
Part (Part Balance)” (p. 63).
Touch <Layer 2> to have <Layer 2> play as well.
The <Layer 1> and <Layer 2> icons are dimmed, and the Layer performance is
cancelled.
Now when you play the keys, only the tone indicated on the screen is sounded.

26
KR107_e.book 27 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 1 Performance

Playing Different Tones with the Left

and Right Hands (Split)
Dividing the keyboard into right-hand and left-hand areas, then playing different

Chapter 1
sounds in each section is called “split performance.” The boundary key is called the
“split point.”
The split point key is included in the left-hand keyboard area. Each time power to
the keyboard is turned on, the split point is reset to “F#3.” You can change the split point;
fig.split.e refer to “Changing the
Split Point Keyboard’s Split Point (Split
Point)” (p. 139).

Acoustic Bass Grand Piano 1

When you select an internal
1. At the Basic screen, touch <Split>. song or music file that includes
fig.d-split.eps_60 the lyrics data, < >
appears in the Basic screen.
Touch this to display the lyrics.

< > appears in the Piano

screen or Basic screen when
headphones are connected.
You can add three-
dimensional breadth to the
sound from the headphones

The tone sounding prior to the split performance is played in the right-hand section (p. 31).

of the keyboard, and the tone indicated at the left of the screen is played in the left-
hand section of the keyboard.
Here, the tone appearing at the right part of the display is called the “upper tone,”
and the tone appearing at the left part of the display is called the “lower tone.” When you touch Octave
<-> <+> in the tone selection
You can turn the tones on and off by touching <Lower 1> or <Lower 2>.
screen, the pitch of the
Changing the Tones keyboard’s sound is changed
in octave units. To learn more,
2. Touch the name of the tone to be changed. see “Shifting the Keyboard
Pitch in Octave Steps (Octave
3. Press a Tone button to select the tone (p. 23). Shift)” (p. 28).

4. When you have selected the tone, press the [Exit] button.

The display returns to the Basic screen. You can change the volume
balance between the upper and
Cancelling the Split
lower parts of the keyboard;

5. Touch <Split>. refer to “Adjusting the Volume

Balance for Each Performance
The <Split> icons are dimmed, and the Split performance is cancelled. Part (Part Balance)” (p. 63).
When you play the keys, only the tone indicated on the screen is sounded.

27
 KR107_e.book 28 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 1 Performance

Turning On Layer and Split Performance Simultaneously

Turning on either Layer Performance or Split Performance allows you to divide the When the keyboard has been
keyboard into a upper and a lower part and play with twoTones layered in the lower divided into upper and lower
part, and three Tones layered in the upper part. sections, the damper pedal is
fig.d-layersplit.eps_60
applied to only the upper
Chapter 1

section. If you want to add

lingering reverberations to the
notes of the lower section, see
“Assigning Functions to
Pedals and Performance Pads
(Pedal Setting/User
Functions)” (p. 144).

■ Shifting the Keyboard Pitch in Octave Steps

(Octave Shift)
When using layer performance (p. 26) or split performance (p. 27), you can change
the pitch of the keyboard’s sound in octave units. This function is called “Octave
Shift.”
For example, when playing a Layer performance, if you change the pitch of one of
the tones and then layer it, it changes the impression created with the tone.

1. On the Basic screen, touch <Layer1> or <Split>.

The KR switches to layer performance or split performance.

2. To apply Octave Shift, touch the name of the tone you’ve selected.

3. Press the Tone button to display the Tone selection screen.

fig.d-octshift.eps_60

4. Touch Octave <-> or <+> in the lower part of the screen to adjust the
pitch of the sound.
Each time you touch <+>, the pitch is raised one octave.
Each time you touch <->, the pitch is lowered one octave.
The sound can be changed from two octaves lower than the original sound (-2) to
two octaves above the original (+2).
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Basic screen or the previous screen.

28
KR107_e.book 29 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 1 Performance

Adding Reverberation to the Sound (Reverb)

Apply a reverb effect to the notes you play with the KR.
Reverb makes it sound as if you are playing in a concert hall.
fig.panel1-3

Chapter 1
1. Press the [Ambience/Reverb] button and watch the its indicator light up.
A “Reverb screen” like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-reverb.eps_60

2. Touch an icon to select the performance space.

;

Display Explanation
Hall1 Hall with bright reverberation
Hall2 Hall with warm reverberation
Room1 Room reverberation
Cathedral High-ceilinged cathedral
Ground Wide open space with no reverberations
Room2 Small room
Lounge Larger room
Studio A recording studio
Gymnasium In a gymnasium
Hall3 Large concert hall reverberation
Dome A domed ballpark
Cave Adds the extended reverberations found inside a cave
GS Room1
Reproduces an indoor-type reverb.
GS Room2
Provides a clear, expansive reverberation.
GS Room3
GS Hall1 Reproduces the reverberation found in a hall. Gives
GS Hall2 reverberation with a greater sense of depth than GS Room.

29
 KR107_e.book 30 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 1 Performance

Display Explanation
Reproduces a plate echo (reverberation created using the
GS Plate
vibrations of a metal plate).
A delayed sound that is added to the original, similar to the
GS Delay
reflected sounds of mountain echoes.
Chapter 1

GS Pan Delay The reflected sounds are panned (shifted) laterally. No effect is applied when the
slider is moved all the way to
3. Touch the slider beneath the icons to adjust the effect selected. the left. In this case, the
button’s indicator won’t light
Touch and slide the knob on the screen to the right for a deeper reverb, and to the
up when you press the
left for less.
[Ambience/Reverb] button.
You can also move the slider with the dial.
When you press the [Exit] button, the reverb effect is activated, and you return to the
previous screen.

Cancelling the Effect

4. Press the [Ambience/Reverb] button, and watch the indicator light go

out.
The reverb effect is eliminated.

30
KR107_e.book 31 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 1 Performance

Adding Three-Dimensional Breadth to

the Sounds You Play (Advanced 3D)
You can add three-dimensional breadth to the sounds you play with automatic

Chapter 1
accompaniment (p. 47), or to internal songs or music files. With this effect, called
“Advanced 3D,” you seem to be surrounded by the sound of the performance.
fig.panel1-4

1. Press the [Ambience/Reverb] button and watch the indicator light up.

2. Touch <Advanced 3D>.

The following “Advanced 3D screen” appears.

fig.d-adv3d.eps_60

ON OFF < > appears in the screen

when headphones are

3. Touch <ON>. connected.

Three-dimensional breadth is added to the sound.

4. Touch the icon to switch the effect on or off for each individual part.
When you press the [Exit] button, the Advanced 3D effect is activated, and you
return to the previous screen.

Cancelling the Effect

5. Touch <OFF>. The Advanced 3D effect is not

applied, even when you touch
The Advanced 3D effect is eliminated, and the effect is no longer applied to any of <ON>, if all parts are turned
the parts. off.

31
 KR107_e.book 32 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 1 Performance

❍ Making Detailed Settings for Advanced 3D

1. Press the [Ambience/Reverb] button and watch the indicator light up.

2. Touch <Advanced 3D> to display the Advanced 3D screen.

Chapter 1

3. Press the [Option] button.

fig.d-adv3dopt.eps_60

Touch to switch the screens.

4. Touch for the parameter being set to select the value.

Parameter Display Explanation

The effect is applied to all tones played with the
All Parts keyboard (the lower tone, upper tone, and layer
tone).

Part The effect is applied only to the layer part.

When not using a layer performance (p. 26), the
Layer Parts Advanced 3D effect is not applied to the keyboard
performance, even if <Keyboard> on the Advance
3D screen is set to On.
This selects settings that are adjusted for use with
headphones when headphones are connected.
Auto
When no headphones are connected, settings
adjusted for speakers are selected.
Mode
Settings adjusted for listening to sounds through
Speaker
speakers are selected.
Settings adjusted for listening to sounds through
Headphone
headphones are selected.
Changes the apparent depth of the sound. The
Depth 1–4
effect is applied more as the value is increased.
Width 1–128 Changes the breadth of the sound.

You can also change the value with the dial.

With “Part,” you can touch the icon and then select the value.

5. When you press the [Exit] button, you return to the Advanced 3D screen.

32
KR107_e.book 33 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 1 Performance

Adding Liveliness to the Sound

(Dynamic Emphasis)
You can add liveliness to the sound to give it superb clarity and distinctness.

Chapter 1
fig.panel2-8

1 Press the [Sound Control] button, to display the “Sound Control screen.”

The Dynamic Emphasis function is switched on, enlivening the sound.

fig.d-adv3dopt.eps_60

2 Touch the Type icon to select the type.

Indicator Description
Sharp Creates a sound with boosted bass and treble.
Produces a sound with chords in the low registers that are
Clear
clear and distinct.
Power Creates a sound with boosted bass.

Cancelling the Dynamics Emphasis

3 Press the [Sound Control] button once more, and the indicator light goes
out.

33
 KR107_e.book 34 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 1 Performance

Adjusting the Sound to Achieve the

Preferred Tone Quality (Equalizer)
The KR features a built-in, five-band digital equalizer.
Chapter 1

An equalizer boosts or cuts specific sound pitches (frequency ranges) to adjust the
sound balance for the overall performance. For example, you can boost the highs to
get a crisper sound, or boost the low end for a more powerful sound.
You can also adjust the sound to compensate for the acoustical characteristics of the
performance space.
If raising the slider for each frequency ends up distorting the sound, you can correct
the distortion with the Master Level slider.

1. Press the [Sound Control] button, to display the “Sound Control screen.”

2. Touch <Equalizer>.
The “Equalizer screen” appears.
fig.d-eq.eps_60

3. Touch the Type icon to make your selection.

Display Explanation
Piano The optimal settings for piano performance are selected.
Power Boosts both the low- and high-frequency ranges.
Mild Lows and highs are restrained for a pleasant-sounding tone.
Clear This setting slightly boosts the midrange for a simple pop feeling.
Bright This setting boosts the high frequencies for a brilliant, sparkling sound.
Flat All slider values are set to “0.”
User Store your own preferred settings (p. 35).

34
KR107_e.book 35 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 1 Performance

4. Touch the slider to make adjustment.

Settings
Displayed Explanation
Value

Chapter 1
Low-frequency range. This is the range of
Low -60–0–+60 frequencies for instruments like drums, bass,
organ, guitar and strings.
Mid-low-frequency range. This is the range of
– -60–0–+60 frequencies for lower brass and woodwind
instruments.
Midrange. This is the range of frequencies where
Mid -60–0–+60
most instrument sounds are concentrated.
Mid-high-frequency range. The ear is most
– -60–0–+60
sensitive to this frequency range.
High-frequency range. These frequencies add
High -60–0–+60
brilliance to the sound.
You can temper the distortion in the sound by
Master Level -60–0–+60 lowering the level. Raising the level too much may
cause the sound to become distorted.

You can also move the slider with the dial.

When you press the [Exit] button, the equalization is placed in effect, and you return
to the previous screen.

Cancelling the Effect

5. Touch <Flat>.

❍ Storing the Settings

You can store adjusted equalizer settings to <User>.
Even after editing the settings, you can touch <User> to call up your preferred
settings.

1. Press the [Sound Control] button and watch the indicator light up.

2. Touch <Equalizer>.

The “Equalizer screen” appears.

3. Adjust the equalizer.

4. Touch <Write>.

The settings are stored.

Even after editing the settings, you can touch <User> to select the stored settings.

35
 KR107_e.book 36 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 1 Performance

Applying Effects to the Sound (Effects)

You can apply a wide range of different effects to the notes you play on the For more on the effect types,
keyboard. refer to the “Effects List” (p.
178).
Chapter 1

1. First, press the Tone button to select a Tone (p. 23).

The “Tone selection screen” appears.

2. Then, touch <Effects>.

The “Effects screen” appears.
fig.d-effects.eps_60

Applying Effects to the Sound

3. Touch <ON>.
The effect selected with <Type> will be applied.

Selecting the Type of Effect NOTE

4. Touch <Type> to select the type of effect.

You may find effects not being
applied to certain parts when
different effects are applied to
Setting the Effect
the upper tone, layer tone, and
The parameters that can be set change according to the type selected in Step 4. lower tone. In such instances,
you can select which effect is

5. Touch for the parameter being set to select the value. to have priority.

You can also move the slider with the dial.

Press the [Exit] button to return to the Tone selection screen.

Cancelling the Effect

6. On the Effects screen, touch <OFF>.

36
KR107_e.book 37 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 1 Performance

Adding Effects to Mic Vocals

(Vocal Effect)
For details on connecting a
With a microphone connected, you can add effects to the microphone vocals.
microphone, refer to

Chapter 1
Adding effects to the vocals is referred to as “Vocal Effect.” “Connecting a Microphone”
(p. 20).
❍ How to select Vocal Effect
fig.panel1-5

1. Press the [Vocal Effects] button.

The “Vocal Effects screen” appears.

fig.d-vocalsfx.eps_60

You can adjust the microphone

volume with the Mic Volume
2. Touch any one of the icons. knob on the (left) underside of
the KR107.
Icon Explanation Page
Echo Adjusts the microphone echo. p. 38
Transformer Alters the microphone vocals. p. 38
Harmonist Adds harmonies to the original voice. p. 39
Allows you to start songs and Automatic
Vocal Count In p. 40
Accompaniment using your own tempo.
Allows you to produce sounds conforming to the
Vocal Keyboard p. 41
vocal scale.
You can play a specific part as harmony while
Music Files p. 42
playing back a song.

3. When you press the [Exit] button, the effect is applied and you return to
the previous screen.

37
 KR107_e.book 38 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 1 Performance

Cancelling the Vocal Effect

4. Press the [Vocal Effects] button and watch the indicator light go out.

The Vocal Effect function is cancelled.

Chapter 1

❍ Adjusting the Echo (Echo)

1. Touch <Echo> in Step 2 of “How to select Vocal Effect” (p. 37).

fig.d-vo-echo.eps_60

2. Touch the bar graph to adjust the amount of echo applied to the vocal.

3. Touch the Echo Type <1> or <2> to change the echo type.

Displayed Explanation
1 Adds basic reverberations.
2 Adds reverberations for a karaoke-type echo.

Press the [Exit] button to return to the Vocal Effects screen.

❍ Altering Vocals (Transformer)

You can modify the way your voice sounds through the microphone. This is called
the “Voice Transformer” function.

1. Touch <Transformer> in Step 2 of “How to select Vocal Effect” (p. 37).

fig.d-vo-trans.eps_60

38
KR107_e.book 39 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 1 Performance

2. Touch any one of the icons.

Here’s what the different icons do.

Display Explanation

Chapter 1
Kids Transforms the input into the sound of a child’s voice.
Bear Transforms the input sound into the voice of a large animal.
Robot Transforms the input into the sound of a robot’s voice.
Duck Transforms the input into a duck’s quacking sound.
Alien Transforms the input into an alien voice.
Computer Transforms the input into a voice like that from a computer.
Female Transforms male voices into female voices.
Male Transforms female voices into male voices.

3. Sing through the microphone.

Your voice is transformed according to the item you selected.

Cancelling the Effect

4. Once again, touch the icon you selected in Step 2.

The Voice Transformer effect is eliminated.

Press the [Exit] button to return to the Vocal Effects screen.

❍ Adding Harmonies (Harmonist)

You can sing with a harmony accompaniment, even when you’re playing solo. This
is called the “Harmonist” function.

1. Touch <Harmonist> in Step 2 of “How to select Vocal Effect” (p. 37).

Touch to switch the screen.

fig.d-vo-harmo.eps_60

39
 KR107_e.book 40 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 1 Performance

2. Touch any one of the icons.

Here’s what the different icons do.

Display Explanation
Chapter 1

Unison Sounds like two people singing the same melody.

Oct-Up Adds another voice one octave higher than the original.
Oct-Down Adds another voice one octave lower than the original.
5th Up Adds harmony a fifth above the original.
3rd Up Adds harmony a third above the original.
4th Down Adds harmony a major fourth below the original.
The melody played on the keyboard is played as the harmony.
My Voice
The harmony is added to your voice regardless of the pitch.
Duo 1 The added harmony matches the chords specified on the
keyboard. Adding harmony to a single voice gives the effect of
Duo 2 two people singing together.
The melody played on the keyboard is played as the harmony.
Variety The harmony added is matched to the pitch; for example, higher
pitches are used for female voices, lower pitches for male voices.
The added harmony matches the chords specified on the
Trio keyboard. This adds a two-voice harmony that makes it seem that
a trio is singing.
The added harmony matches the chords specified on the
keyboard.
Chords
You can change the way harmonies are added with the Melody
Intelligence type (p. 60).

Cancelling the Effect

3. Touch the Harmonist type you selected in Step 2 again.

The Harmonist function is cancelled.

Press the [Exit] button to go back to the Vocal Effects screen.

❍ Enabling the Start of Songs and Automatic Accompaniment with the

Sound of Your Voice (Vocal Count In)
You can start songs and the Automatic Accompaniment by counting into the
microphone.

1. Touch <Vocal Count In> in Step 2 of “How to select Vocal Effect” (p. 37).
fig.d-vo-coin.eps_60

40
KR107_e.book 41 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 1 Performance

2. Touch <Arranger> or <Song>.

Display Explanation
Arranger Automatic Accompaniment starts at the tempo used for the count.

Chapter 1
Song The song starts at the tempo used for the count.

3. Count to four (“One, two, three, four”) into the microphone.

Count out the number of beats per measure in the time signature of the selected song
or Music Style.
For example, if you select a time signature of 4/4, then count to four; count to three
when 3/4 time is selected.
The tempo is automatically set according to the interval between the counts as you
speak into the microphone, and the song or Arranger begins.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Vocal Effects screen.

❍ Playing Instrument Sounds at Vocal Pitches (Vocal Keyboard)

You can have melodies sung into the microphone played with the KR’s internal
Tones.

1. Touch <Vocal Keyboard> in Step 2 of “How to select Vocal Effect” (p. 37).
fig.d-vo-key.eps_60

2. If the <OFF> icon is selected, touch the <ON> icon. When you play the keys while
using Vocal Keyboard, the
3. Touch any of the icons to select a Tone. tone selected for Vocal
Keyboard is played.
You can also select the Tone by pressing the Tone button.
When you sing into the microphone, the sung pitches are played using the selected
Tone.

Cancelling the Effect

4. Touch <OFF>.
The Vocal Keyboard function is cancelled.
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the Vocal Effects screen.

41
 KR107_e.book 42 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 1 Performance

❍ Adding Harmonies to a Specified Part (Music Files)

When you sing while playing back a specified part from song data, harmony is
added based on pitches of the specified part.

1. Select the song to which you want to add harmony.

Chapter 1

To select a song stored in external memory, connect the external memory to the
external memory port.

2. Touch <Music Files> in Step 2 of “How to select Vocal Effect” (p. 37).
fig.d-vo-music.eps_60

3. Touch the icon for the part to which you want to add harmony.
When you play back the song and sing into the microphone, harmonies are added
using the pitches of the specified part.

4. Touch <Variety>.
When <Variety> is ON, the melody played on the keyboard is played as the
harmony. The harmony added is matched to the pitch.

Cancelling the Effect

5. Touch the icon you selected in Step 3 again.

The Music Files function is cancelled.
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the Vocal Effects screen.

42
KR107_e.book 43 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 1 Performance

■ Enjoying Karaoke Performances with Music Files

1. Connect a microphone.
Commercial music files
designed for “karaoke” sing-
along are also available.
2. Adjust the volume level and the amount of echo applied. Consult your KR dealer when

Chapter 1
purchasing music files. Refer
On the KR, use the Vocal Effect function to adjust the echo (p. 38).
to “Music Files That the KR
You can also enjoy this effect with the Voice Transformer function (p. 38) and Can Use” (p. 185).
Harmonist function (p. 39).

3. Select a song.

To select a song stored in external memory, connect the external memory to the
external memory port. For instructions on how to select songs, refer to “Playing a
Song” (p. 65).
On the KR, lyrics can also be

4. Adjust the tempo as required with the Tempo [-] [+] buttons. shown on an external display.
Refer to “Connecting an

5. If necessary, change the key of the song (Transpose: p. 88).

External Display” (p. 156) and
“Changing the Settings for

When you press the [ (Play/Stop)] button, the accompaniment starts playing. Showing Images with the
External Display and the
Sing along with the accompaniment.
Television (External Display)”
When you play back a Music File with lyrics, the lyrics appear on screen. (p. 158).

6. Press the [ (Play/Stop)] button to stop the accompaniment.

You can stop lyrics from being
displayed. Refer to “Hiding
the Lyrics (Lyrics)” (p. 154).

43
 KR107_e.book 44 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 1 Performance

Using the Metronome

The KR features a built-in metronome. During playback of the song and
accompaniment, the metronome plays at that tempo and beat.
Chapter 1

fig.panel1-6

■ Using the Metronome

1. Press the [Metronome] button and watch the indicator light up.
You will hear the metronome.
The following “Metronome screen” appears.
fig.d-metro.eps_60

You can press the [Exit] button to have the metronome continue to play while you
return to the previous screen.

Stopping the Metronome

2. Press the [Metronome] button once more, and the indicator light goes
out.

44
KR107_e.book 45 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 1 Performance

■ Changing the Metronome Settings

❍ Adjusting the Tempo
You can adjust the tempo of the metronome. The tempo and beat of the metronome
changes automatically if you use an Automatic Accompaniment or play back a song.

Chapter 1
1. Press the Tempo [-] or [+] buttons to adjust a tempo.

You can adjust the metronome tempo over a range of = 10–500.

Pressing the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons simultaneously returns the selected song
accompaniment to the basic tempo.

❍ Changing the Beat of the Metronome

1. On the Metronome screen, touch <Beat>.

2. Select the beat with the dial.

When is selected,
only the upbeat will sound.

❍ Changing the Volume

The volume of the metronome can be adjusted to ten different levels.

1. On the Metronome screen, touch <Volume>.

2. Select the volume with the dial.

Choosing sets the volume to the lowest level, and choosing sets
it to the highest level.

Choose to silence the metronome sound.

❍ Changing the Type of Sound

You can change the sound the metronome makes.
The setting is at “Normal metronome sound” when the KR is powered up.

1. On the Metronome screen, touch <Sound>.

2. Select the sound with the dial.

Displayed Explanation Displayed Explanation

Normal metronome Electronic metronome

sound sound

“1, 2, 3” in Japanese “1, 2, 3” in English

45
 KR107_e.book 46 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 1 Performance

Displayed Explanation Displayed Explanation

Dog and cat sounds Wood block

Chapter 1

Triangle and castanet Hand clap

❍ Changing How the Metronome Beat (Pattern) Sounds

You can set the Metronome to play at even smaller intervals.

1. On the Metronome screen, touch <Pattern>.

2. Select the pattern with the dial.

Displayed Explanation Displayed Explanation

Usual sound Dotted half-note intervals

Dotted quarter-note
Half-note intervals
intervals

Dotted eighth-note
Quarter-note intervals
intervals

Eighth-note intervals Sixteenth-note intervals

Single back beat added Triplet rhythm added

Shuffle rhythm added

❍ Turning Off the Beat Light (Beat Indicator)

The beat light flashes in time with the metronome, accompaniment Styles, and song
tempos, but you can set it so that it stays off at all times.

1. Touch <Beat LED> in the Metronome screen.

2. Select ON/OFF (Beat Indicator off) with the dial.

46
KR107_e.book 47 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

Music Styles and Automatic Accompaniment

What is Automatic Accompaniment?

For instructions on playing the
Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button for Automatic Accompaniment’s
Automatic Accompaniment,
optimum settings. Automatic Accompaniment is a function that provides you with
refer to “Selecting Music Styles
accompaniment in a variety of musical genres, just by specifying chords in the left
(Music Style Buttons)” (p. 51).
hand. Automatic Accompaniment lets you play with an orchestra, even when
performing alone!

Chapter 2
What Are Music Styles?
Accompaniment patterns in various musical genres are called “Music Styles.”
There are many different kinds of music around the world, and each has its own
unique features. What gives jazz or classical music their unmistakable sounds are a
unique combination of elements like instrumentation, melody, and phrasing, which
interact to create the musical character.

Elements of Music Styles

A Music Style consists of a set of six sections called “divisions.”

Division Explanation
Intro Played at the start of a song.
Original The basic accompaniment pattern.
Variation This is a variation on the Original accompaniment pattern.
This is a one-measure phrase inserted at a point where the
Fill In To Original
mood changes and the accompaniment returns to the original.
This is a one-measure phrase inserted at a point where the
Fill In To
mood changes and the accompaniment moves ahead to the
Variation
variation.
Ending The conclusion of a song.

In addition, the accompaniment Styles are composed of up to a maximum of eight

performance parts: “Rhythm,” “Bass,” “Accompaniment 1,” “Accompaniment 2,”
“Accompaniment 3,” “Accompaniment 4,” “Accompaniment 5,” and
“Accompaniment 6.”

47
 KR107_e.book 48 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

Performing Using Automatic Accompaniment

(One-Touch Arranger)
Here’s how to create the settings for Automatic Accompaniment.
fig.panel2-1
Chapter 2

1. Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.

The Basic screen like the one shown below appears. < > appears in the Piano
fig.d-arrbasic.eps_60
screen or Basic screen when
headphones are connected.
You can add three-
dimensional breadth to the
sound from the headphones
(p. 31).

Normally, when you change a

Music Style, the tempo and
tone change to selections that
go well with the selected
Music Style. If you do not want
Observe the settings:
to change the tempo and tone,
• The keyboard is split into left- and right-hand parts, with accompaniment refer to “Changing Music
chords specified for the left-hand side of the keyboard. Styles Without Changing the
• A tone appropriate for the selected Music Style is chosen. Tone or Tempo (One Touch
Setting)” (p. 139).
• The tempo and beat for the selected Music Style is set.

2. Play a chord on the Lower-part of keyboard.

For instructions on selecting
The accompaniment begins, starting from the intro. Music Styles, refer to
Play chords with the left hand, and the melody with the right. “Selecting Music Styles (Music
When you change chords in the left hand, the accompaniment also changes. Style Buttons)” (p. 51).
fig.arr-split.e

Split Point ( F 3 )
For instructions on starting
and stopping the
accompaniment, refer to
“Starting and Stopping the
The range specifyed a chord
Accompaniment” (p. 55).

3. Press the [Intro/Ending] button.

You can change the range in
After the ending plays, the accompaniment stops.
which chords are played.
Please refer to “Changing the
Keyboard’s Split Point (Split
Point)” (p. 139).

48
KR107_e.book 49 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

■ About Chords
A chord is produced when several notes are played simultaneously. Chords are
indicated by the pitch of the fundamental note of the chord (the root) and the chord
type, which is determined by the other notes of the chord.
For example, the C m chord is expressed in terms of the root note “C” and the chord
type “m” (minor). C m is made up of the three notes “C,” “E ” and “G.”
“C m” is indicated as the chord name on the Basic screen.
fig.chord.e

Chapter 2
Cm
Chord Type E
Root Note
C G
Root Note

All chord roots are indicated as a letter, sometimes with or added, and
correspond to the notes shown below.
fig.chord-root.e

Normally, settings used for the

Chord Intelligence function are
■ Playing Chords with Simple Fingering selected, but there may be
(Chord Intelligence) settings that are not used. You
can also change the rules
“Chord Intelligence” is a feature that chooses the accompaniment chords the
governing how chords are
moment you play a key.
played. For more information,
To play a “C” chord, for example, you normally have to play the three keys C, E, and see “Changing How Chords
G. But with Chord Intelligence, you only have to press the C key to start a “C” chord Are Played and Specified
accompaniment. (Arranger Config)” (p. 139).
fig.chord-intel.e

• Intelligence 1

Major Minor
Ex: C Ex: C m
Play the root and
Play the chord root. the third key above it.
For more information about
chord fingering, refer to the
Seventh Minor Seventh “Chord List” (p. 180).
Ex: C 7 Ex: C m7
Play the root and Play the root,
the second key below it. the third key above it, and
the second key below it.

Major Seventh Diminished

Ex: C maj 7 Ex: C dim
Play the root and Play the root and
the first key below it. the sixth key above it.

49
 KR107_e.book 50 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

■ Viewing Chord Fingerings (Chord Finder)

Whenever you are not sure how a certain chord is fingered, you can display the notes
of the chord on the screen.

1. On the Basic screen, touch < >.

fig.d-arrbasic.eps_60
Chapter 2

2. Touch the root of the chord you want to learn about.

The chord fingering appears on screen.
fig.d-crdfind.eps_60

For example, if you wanted to see the fingering for a C# chord, you would touch
<C>, then touch <#>.
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the Basic screen.

50
KR107_e.book 51 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

Selecting Music Styles (Music Style Buttons)

You can select a variety of different Music Styles by pressing the Music Style buttons.
Four different preset styles are assigned to the Music Style.
fig.panel2-2

Chapter 2
1. Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
For more on the Music Style
names, refer to the “Music
2. Press one of the Music Style buttons to select the Music Style group. Style List” (p. 179).
Watch the indicator button light up.
Five of the Music Styles included in that group are displayed on the screen.
fig.d-stylesel.eps_60

This screen is called the “Style Selection screen.”

Touch and drag up and down in the scroll bar to scroll through the screen and
display other styles.

Touch the page icons < >< > to change pages.

You can touch <Search> to find Styles that match the selected criteria (p. 52).

3. Touch a Music Style name to select the Music Style.

You can use the dial to automatically switch pages and select Styles.

4. Touch Preset <A>, <B>, <C>, or <D> in the lower part of the screen.
When the Music Style is selected, Preset A is selected.
When any of the Presets from <A> through <D> are selected, the Music Style tempo,
Upper Tone, Style Orchestrator settings (p. 59) and other settings change.

5. Press the [Exit] button.

The display returns to the Basic screen.
When you play a chord in the left-hand part of the keyboard, the selected Music Style
is automatic.

51
 KR107_e.book 52 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

■ Using Keywords to Search for Music Styles

(Style Search)
You can search for Music Styles that match the tempo of the song, musical genre, or
other criteria you set.
Only the KR’s internal Music
You can also search Music Styles using the first character of the Style names.
Styles are searchable.

1. Press one of the Music Style buttons.

2. Touch <Search>.
Chapter 2

The following “Style Search screen” appears.

fig.d-stylsrch1.eps_60

Condition Search screen Name Search screen

Touch here to switch these screens.

In a condition search, the KR
❍ Searching by Conditions looks for Music Styles
satisfying all of the selected
3. Touch the parameter you want to set, then use the dial to select the search search criteria.

conditions.

4. Touch <Search>.
The search results appear in the display.
Touch a Music Style name to select a Music Style.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Style Search screen.

❍ Searching by Music Style Name

3. Touch <By Name>.

Touch <By Key> to return to the Condition Search screen.

4. Decide which character you’ll use for the search.

The selected character appears in the middle of the screen.
Enter the character you are searching for. For example, touching <ABC> in
succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group
(“A”→”B”→”C”...).
Touch <A-0> to toggle between alphabets and numerals.

5. Touch <Search>.
The search results appear on the display.
Touch a Music Style name to select a Music Style.
Press the [Exit] button several times to return to the Basic screen or the previous
screen.

52
KR107_e.book 53 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

■ Selecting Music Styles on External Memories

You can play other User Styles saved to external memories (sold separately) or User
memory (p. 135).
fig.panel2-3

Chapter 2
1. Press the Music Style [User] button.
fig.d-styldisk.eps_60

2. Touch <User> in the lower left of the screen.

When you touch <User> on the lower part of the screen, the screen for selecting user
memory or external memory Styles appears.
Touching <Preset> in the lower left of this screen returns you to the screen for
selecting the “Trad/World” accompaniment Styles.

3. Touch < >< > to select the storage media to which the
accompaniment Style is saved.
The names of the accompaniment styles stored on the selected storage media are
displayed.

4. Select a Music Style, and touch the Music Style name.

5. Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button. You can save multiple user

You can now perform in the selected Music Style. Styles to user memory. Take a
look at “Saving a User Style”
Music Styles selected from external memories are stored until the power is turned
(p. 135).
off. Even after ejecting the external memory, by pressing the Music Style [User]
button, you can perform using the most recently selected Music Style.

53
 KR107_e.book 54 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

Playing Only Music Style Rhythm Patterns

You can also play only the rhythm patterns of Music Styles.
fig.panel2-4
Chapter 2

1. Select a Music Style (p. 51). NOTE

Some Music Styles do not

2. Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button. include rhythm patterns.
When you select these Style
The performance is set so that only the rhythm patterns are played.
patterns, no rhythm patterns
3. Press the [Intro/Ending] button. are played, even when you
play on the left side of the
The Rhythm part of accompaniment begins, starting from the Intro.
keyboard.
Just as with regular Automatic Accompaniment, you can add intros and endings by
pressing the [Intro/Ending] button, and make changes to the rhythm patterns with
the Fill In button (p. 58).

Adjusting the Accompaniment Tempo

fig.panel2-5

When the Basic screen is displayed, you can use the Tempo [-] [+] buttons or the dial
to change the tempo.
The tempo is indicated on the upper left of the screen.
fig.d-arrbasic.eps_60

Pressing the Tempo [-] [+] buttons simultaneously returns the selected Music Style
or song to the basic tempo.
You can change the tempo of Automatic Accompaniment even while the
accompaniment is playing.

54
KR107_e.book 55 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

Starting and Stopping the Accompaniment

Pressing the One Touch Program [Arranger] button activates Sync Start for the
accompaniment (which starts the accompaniment simultaneously when you play on
the lower section of the keyboard), and automatically sets an appropriate intro for
the accompaniment. You can also change the way the accompaniment starts and
stops.
fig.panel2-6

Chapter 2
■ Having the Accompaniment Start Simultaneously
When You Play the Keyboard (Sync Start)
1. Press the [Intro/Ending] button and [Start/Stop] button simultaneously, Sync Start is set immediately
causing the indicators of both buttons to flash. after the One Touch Program
[Arranger] button is pressed.
The Sync Start settings go into effect.

2. Play a chord on the lower-part of keyboard.

As you play the keys, the intro and accompaniment begins simultaneously.

❍ Changing the Intro

When set for Sync Start (the indicators of both the [Intro/Ending] button and [Start/
Stop] button are flashing), you can use the following procedure to change the intro,
or prevent the intro from playing.

Starting without an Intro

Press the [Intro/Ending] button and watch the indicator go out.

Now when you play a chord with the keyboard, the accompaniment starts without
the intro.

To Start with a Short Intro Added

Touch <Arranger> in the Basic screen to open the arranger screen.

Touch the Intro <2>.
fig.d-intro2.eps_60

Now when you specify a chord with the keyboard, a short intro is played, and the
accompaniment starts.

55
 KR107_e.book 56 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

❍ Starting at the Press of a Button

1. Press the [Intro/Ending] button and [Start/Stop] button simultaneously,

and the indicators lights go out.
The Sync Start function is cancelled.

2. Play a chord on the lower part of keyboard.

Choose the chord to be played when the accompaniment begins playing.
Chapter 2

3. Press the [Intro/Ending] button or the [Start/Stop] button.

When you press the [Intro/Ending] button, the intro plays, and the accompaniment
starts. When you press the [Start/Stop] button, the accompaniment starts without
the intro.
When you touch Intro <2> on the Basic screen, a short intro plays.

You can change the sound of

Chord Tones and Bass Tones the chord tone and bass tone.
Take a look at “Changing How
When you play the keys in the left-hand side of the keyboard while the [Start/Stop]
Chords Are Played and
button’s indicator is not lit, chords play. This note is called the “Chord Tone,” and
Specified (Arranger Config)”
the root of the chord being played at the same time is called the “Bass Tone.” (p. 139).

■ Stopping Automatic Accompaniment

❍ Stopping with an Added Ending

1. Press the [Intro/Ending] button.

An ending plays and the Automatic Accompaniment stops.

❍ Stopping at the Same Time the Button is Pressed

1. Press the [Start/Stop] button.

The Automatic Accompaniment stops as soon as you press the button.

56
KR107_e.book 57 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

■ Having a Count Sound Play at the End of the

Intro (Countdown)
If an intro plays before your performance, you can have a count-in sound played to
the end of the intro, helping you hear when to start playing.
fig.countdown.e

Ex: 4/4 When the Intro has finished playing,

Intro the accompaniment plays.

Chapter 2
1 2 3 4
Count Sound

1. Press the [Count/Marker] button and watch the indicator light up.

The following “Countdown settings screen” appears.

fig.d-cntdwn.eps_60

When set to “Count In/

2. Touch <Count Mode> to set this to “Count Down” or “Count Down,” a count sound is

In/Down.” added before playback of the

song begins.
When you press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button, the performance starts,
and the countdown sound plays at the end of the intro.

❍ Cancelling the Countdown For more about settings on the

Countdown screen, refer to

3. Press the [Count/Marker] button and the indicator light goes out. “Changing the Settings for the
Count” (p. 141).

57
 KR107_e.book 58 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

Modifying an Accompaniment
When you use Automatic Accompaniment, you can easily add Fill Ins to the You can add variation to the

accompaniment patterns, change arrangements, and make other changes. Automatic Accompaniment by
assigning different functions to
the Performance Pads and
■ Changing the Accompaniment Pattern pedals. For more information,
(Fill In Buttons) see “Assigning Functions to
Pedals and Performance Pads
There are two accompaniment patterns: the Original, and a Variation. In addition, a
(Pedal Setting/User
Chapter 2

fill-in (or short phrase) is added at the points where the accompaniment patterns
Functions)” (p. 144).
change, which adds more interest to the song. It can be effective to use the simpler
original pattern for the first half of the song, and the variation pattern for the second
half.

What’s a “Fill In”?

A short improvisational phrase inserted at the bar line is called a “Fill In.”
The KR automatically plays the appropriate phrase for the selected Music Style.

fig.panel2-7

Press the Fill In [To Variation] button and watch the indicator light up.
The instrument is set so that the variation performance pattern is played.

Press the Fill In [To Original] button and watch the indicator light up.
The instrument is set so that the original performance pattern is played.
Pressing these buttons during a performance inserts a one-bar fill-in at the
appropriate place and time.

Adding a Fill-in without Changing the Accompaniment Pattern

You can play only the fill-in, without changing the accompaniment pattern.
Press the lit [To Original] or [To Variation] Fill In button during the performance.

58
KR107_e.book 59 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

■ Changing Accompaniment Patterns in the Screen

You can change accompaniment patterns in intros, fill-ins, endings, and so on by
touching the screen. This lets you enjoy even more advanced performances.

1. Press the One Touch [Arranger] button.

The Arranger basic screen is displayed.

2. Touch <Arranger>.

Chapter 2
The following screen appears.
fig.d-cntdwn.eps_60

For more information about

leading bass, refer to p. 145.

Touch the screen to change the accompaniment pattern.

■ Changing the Instrumental Makeup of Music Styles

(Style Orchestrator)
You can change the arrangement of an accompaniment. This function is called “Style
Orchestrator.” Each Music Style has three different accompaniment arrangements.
fig.panel2-8

1. Press the [Style Orchestrator] button and watch the indicator light up.
When you press the [User
The instrument is set to allow you to change the arrangement with the Performance Pads. Function] buttons, the [Style
Orchestrator] button’s
2. Press Performance Pad [1]–[3] to change the arrangement for the indicator goes out, and the
accompaniment. function of the Performance
Pads changes. For details refer
Watch the indicator of the button you pressed light up.
to p. 81 and p. 144.

Button Explanation
1 (Basic) This is the simplest arrangement. When simple Music Styles are
selected, there may be no
2 (Advanced) This is a more involved arrangement.
change in the arrangement
3 (Full) This is the most elavorate arrangement. even when you use the Style
Orchestrator function.

59
 KR107_e.book 60 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

Adding Harmony to the Right-Hand

Part (Melody Intelligence)
You can add harmony to the notes you play on the keyboard.
While an Automatic Accompaniment is playing, the matching harmony is
automatically added to the notes you are playing with the right hand. This function
is called “Melody Intelligence.”
fig.panel2-10
Chapter 2

1. Press the [Melody Intelligence] button and watch the indicator light up.
When you play something on the right-hand section of the keyboard, harmony is
added.
The following “Melody Intelligence screen” appears.
fig.d-melointel.eps_60

2. Select and touch a harmony type.

Then when you play a melody on the keyboard, a harmony style is automatically
added. With some harmonies, Tones
When you press the [Exit] button, you’re returned to the previous screen, while the may change automatically.
Melody Intelligence function remains selected. Also, when you play several
keys at the same time, in some
3. Press the [Melody Intelligence] button once more and the indicator light cases harmony may be added
to one note.
goes out.
The Melody Intelligence function is cancelled.

60
KR107_e.book 61 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

Playing Sounds in the Left Hand During a

Performance (Lower Tone)
Normally, when using Automatic Accompaniment in a performance, sounds are not
produced by playing the left-hand part of the keyboard. When you touch the
<Lower 1> or <Lower 2> icon, you can have Tones from the left side of the keyboard
play simultaneously with the Automatic Accompaniment.

1. Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.

Chapter 2
This sets the Automatic Accompaniment.

2. On the Basic screen, touch <Lower 1>.

Now when you play a chord in the left-hand keyboard area, the notes you play will
sound, and the accompaniment chord changes.
In the same manner, you can play the lower tone by touching <Lower 2>.
By touching both <Lower 1> and <Lower 2>, you can get a Layer performance for
the left-hand.
fig.d-lower.eps_60

Stopping the Sound in the Left-hand

3. Touch <Lower 1>.

The <Lower 1> icon returns to the original color.
To have <Lower 2> play as well, also touch <Lower 2>.
The lower Tones stop playing.

61
 KR107_e.book 62 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

Playing the Piano with Accompaniment Added

(Piano Style Arranger)
Usually with Automatic Accompaniment, you play chords on the left-hand side of
the keyboard and the melody on the right-hand side. Chords can also be recognized
over the entire keyboard, allowing you to perform using Automatic Accompaniment
without splitting the keyboard. This function is called “Piano Style Arranger.”
This makes it possible to add an accompaniment automatically as you play a song
Chapter 2

by playing chords in the ordinary way, without giving any thought to the location
of a keyboard split.

1. Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.

2. Touch <Split> to turn the Split function off.

fig.d-pianist.eps_60

3. Select a Music Style (p. 51).

4. Play the keyboard.

The accompaniment starts when you play a chord anywhere on the keyboard.

62
KR107_e.book 63 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each

Part (Balance)
You can adjust the volume balance between the accompaniment and the keyboard,
and the volume balance for each of the parts in a Music Style.

■ Changing the Volume Balance Between the NOTE

Accompaniment and the Keyboard (Balance Knob) When this knob is turned

Chapter 2
You can change the volume balance between a song and accompaniment and the completely to the
notes you play on the keyboard. Accompaniment side, no
sounds from the keyboard are
1. Adjust the volume balance with the Balance knob. audible, even when the keys

fig.volbal.e
are pressed. You can usually
leave the knob at the center
position.

■ Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each

Performance Part (Part Balance)
You can adjust the volume of each performance part in a Music Style, and the
balance between parts when playing multiple Tones on the keyboard.
fig.panel2-11

1. Press the [Part Balance] button and watch the indicator light up.
The following “Part Balance screen” appears.

Touch to switch the screens.

fig.d-partbal2.eps_60

Switch the screens

63
 KR107_e.book 64 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

The volume balance between the performance parts in the Music Style is indicated.

Display Performance part

Rhythm Music Style Rhythm Part
Bass Music Style Bass Part
Accomp1
Accomp2
Accomp3
Accompaniment 1–6
Accomp4
Chapter 2

Accomp5
Accomp6
Chord Tone Chord Tone (p. 56)
Bass Tone Bass Tone (p. 56)
Audio Audio

When you touch <Keyboard>, a screen like the following appears.

fig.d-partbal1.eps_60

Switch the screens

This shows the volume balance between the keyboard’s Tones when either layer
performance (p. 26) or split performance (p. 27) are used, or the volume balance
when using the keyboard to play percussion instruments or sound effects (p. 24).

Displayed Tone Part

Drum/SFX Percussion instruments or sound effects played with the keys
Upper Upper Tone
Lower 1 Lower Tone 1
Lower 2 Lower Tone 2
Layer 1 Layer Tone 1
Layer 2 Layer Tone 2

When you touch <Accomp>, you return to the screen for setting the accompaniment
Style volume balance.

64
KR107_e.book 65 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 3 Song Playback

Playing a Song
Now, let’s try practicing while playing back internal songs, commercial music files,
and songs saved to external memories.
You can use rewind or fast-forward to go to any desired measure, and play back
from that point.
You can also play audio files.
fig.panel3-1

Chapter 3
Record/Playback buttons

Selecting the Song

When playing back songs on optional external memory, first connect the external
memory to the external memory port.

1. Press the [Song] button.

The following “Song Selection screen” appears.
fig.d-songsel.eps_60

Touch and drag up and down in the scroll bar to scroll through the screen and
display other songs. About Random Performances
When “Favorites” is selected as
Touch the page icons < >< > to change pages. the genre, songs registered in
“Favorites” are played back in
: The fingering is included in the notation. random order.
When “External Memory” is
: The chords are indicated in the notation.
selected as the genre, the songs
: You can display song lyrics. in the folder appearing on the
screen are played back in
: For audio files. random order.

When you touch < >, songs selected from all of the internal songs are played in
random order.

When you touch < >, all of the songs in the genre you have selected are played
in order, starting from the selected song. When the last song is finished, playback
resumes from the first song in the genre.

65
 KR107_e.book 66 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 3 Song Playback

< >: The selected song is played back. This changes to < > while the song
If there is recorded song data,
is played back; playback stops when you touch < >. the “Delete song” screen
appears.
By touching <File>, you can then view information about the song (p. 154) and save
songs to external memory (p. 102).

2. Touch < >< > to select the song genre.

If it’s okay to delete the song,
3. Touch the name of the song to be played back. touch <OK>. If you do not

You use and the dial to select songs. want to delete the song, touch
<Cancel>, and either save the

Playing back song to a external memory (p.

Chapter 3

102) or register the song to the

4. Press the [ (Play/Stop)] button. Favorites (p. 69).

The button indicator lights up, and playback of the song begins.

Stopping the Song

5. Press the [ (Play/Stop)] button once again.

The button indicator light goes out, and the song stops.
When the song is finished, playback stops automatically.
Press the [ (Reset)] button to return to the beginning of the song.
NOTE

When you select a song, the

Record/Playback Buttons measure number in the Basic
fig.composer.e
screen is highlighted. The
performance data is being
loaded while the indication is
highlighted; please wait a few
moments for this to be
completed.

Track buttons (Rhythm, Whole, Bass/Accomp, Lower, Upper):

Each performance part of the song being played back is assigned to a track button. Use these
buttons to select the performance parts that are muted or played. For more detailed
information, refer to p. 84.

[ (Reset)] button: Returns to the beginning of the song.

[ (Play/Stop)] button:
Plays back the song, or if the song is currently being played, it stops the song.
NOTE
[ (Rec)] button: Records the performance. For more detailed information, refer to p. 90.
When using markers to specify
[ (Bwd)] button: Moves back the playback position of the song one measure each time
a section to be repeated (p. 87),
the button is pressed. Moves back the playback position of the song one second each when an
you can rewind and fast
audio file is being played back. When held down, the song “rewinds” continuously.
forward only within the range
[ (Fwd)] button: Advances the playback position of the song one measure each time the
between Marker A and
button is pressed. Advances the playback position of the song one second each when an audio
Marker B.
file is being played back. When held down, the song is forwarded continuously.

Holding down the [ (Play/Stop)] button and pressing the [ (Fwd)] button moves
you to the end of the song.

66
KR107_e.book 67 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 3 Song Playback

When Selecting Songs in Folders

1. Touch the folder name.

2. Touch < (Play)> at the bottom left of the screen.

After a moment, a list of songs in the folder is displayed.
NOTE
You can also select the folder using the dial or the [ (Bwd)] or [ (Fwd)]
button on the remote; the folder can then be opened by pressing the If a folder contains 500 or more
files and/or folders, some of
[ (PLAY)] button.
the files and folders may not
3. Touch a song from the list that appears to select the song you want to be displayed.

play back.

Chapter 3
* Depending on the number of songs contained in a folder, this may take some time.

About Audio Files

Audio files in the following format can be played back:
• “.WAV” extension
• 16bit linear
• Sampling rate of “44.1 kHz”
• Stereo

You cannot use the following functions in playing back audio files.
• Marker (p. 85)
• Displaying notations (p. 74)
• Registering “Favorites” (p. 69)
• Transposing (p. 88)
• Changing tempos (p. 81)
• Track Mute (p. 84)
• Recording (p. 91)
• Search (p. 68)

* Saving or performing other procedures during playback of audio files may

cause the song to stop while it is playing.

67
 KR107_e.book 68 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 3 Song Playback

■ Using Keywords to Search for Songs (Song Search)

You can search for songs that match the conditions you set regarding the song tempo
or genre.
Only the KR’s internal songs
You can also search the songs using the first character of the song name.
are searchable.

1. Press the [Song] button.

2. Touch < >.

The following “Song Search screen” appears.
fig.d-songsrch1.eps_60

Condition Search screen Name Search screen

Chapter 3

Touch here to switch these screens.

❍ Searching by Conditions

3. Touch the parameter you want to set, then use the dial to select the search
conditions.
With <Data>, songs are searched according to data included in the internal songs.
You can use four different criteria in searches: “Chords,” “Lyrics,” “Finger” (fingering
numbers), and “Any.” By selecting a song containing any of this data, then displaying
it in the KR’s notation, you can display information about the selected data.

4. Touch <Search>.
The search results appear in the display.
Touch the song name to select the song.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Song Selection screen.

❍ Searching by Song Name

3. Touch <By Name>.

Touch <By Key> to return to the Condition Search screen.

4. Decide which character you will use for the search.

The selected character appears in the middle of the screen.
Enter the character you are searching for. For example, touching <ABC> in
succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group
(“A”→”B”→”C”...).
Touch <A-0> to toggle between alphabets and numerals.

5. Touch <Search>.
The search results appear in the display.
Touch the song name to select the song.
Press the [Exit] button several times to return to the previous screen.

68
KR107_e.book 69 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 3 Song Playback

Registering the Songs You Like (Favorites)

You can register songs you are currently practicing or enjoy playing to “Favorites,”
allowing you to select these songs easily.

Selecting the Song You can also register songs on

1. Press the [Song] button.

external memory to the
Favorites. For details, refer to
The Song Selection screen appears (p. 65). “Copying Songs on External
fig.d-songsel.eps_60 Memories to Favorites” (p.
106).

Chapter 3
2. Touch the song name to select the song to be registered.

Registering to Favorites

3. Touch <Favorites>.

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.m-fvrtadd.eps_60

NOTE

You cannot register audio files

to the Favorites.

4. Touch <OK>.
The selected song is registered to Favorites.
Now you can select the registered song by selecting Favorites for the genre in the
Song Selection screen.

69
 KR107_e.book 70 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 3 Song Playback

■ Removing Songs From Favorites

This deletes registered songs for Favorites.

1. Touch < >< > in the Song Selection screen to select the
“Favorites” from the genre category.
fig.d-song-fvrt.eps_60
Chapter 3

2. Touch the name of the song to be deleted.

3. Touch <Delete>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.m-fvrtdel.eps_60

4. Touch <OK>.

The song is deleted.

70
KR107_e.book 71 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 3 Song Playback

Using the Remote Control

You can use the included remote control to easily start and stop performances and Refer to “Installing Batteries in

switch songs. the Remote Control” (p. 18).

■ How to Use the Remote Control

When using the remote control, aim the remote control at the infrared receiver,
keeping in mind the range of operation (below).

Chapter 3
Infrared Receiver

Range of operation
Distance:
4 m (approximately 13 feet)
Angle:
40 degrees to the left and right
of the receiver.
Remote Control
Information from the remote is
not received when Remote
Sensor setting is switched off.
Refer to “Switching the
Remote Sensor On and Off (iR
Precautions Concerning Use of the Remote Control
function)” (p. 150).
• The remote control is able to transmit only one operation at a time.
• The remote control may not operate even within the range of operation if there
is an obstacle between it and the main unit.
• Using the remote control near other equipment that uses remote control systems
may result in operational errors.
• The life of the battery depends on the amount and conditions of use. If the
operational range of the remote control decreases, change the batteries.
• If you will not be using the remote control for a long period of time, remove the
batteries.
• The remote’s response may suffer if the remote’s sensor is situated under
spotlights or exposed to other such strong lighting.

71
 KR107_e.book 72 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 3 Song Playback

■ About the Remote Control

Infrared Emitter
Restoring the Original
“TONE,” “HARMONY,”
Adding Effects to Mic 6 and “TRANSFORM”
1 Vocals Settings

Selecting the Tone for

7
Turning the Advanced the Left-Hand and
2 Right-Hand Tracks
3D Function On and
Off
Switching the Screen of
8
Chapter 3

the External Display

3 Selecting the Song
Genre Starting and Stopping
Songs,
9 Selecting Previous and
Following Songs

4 Muting the Sound 10 Changing the Volume

Using the Function Changing the Tempo of

11
5 Assigned to the the Song and Automatic
Buttons Accompaniment

Transposing Sounds
12
from the Keyboard and
Songs Being Played
Back

You can also switch the functions for the [ ] (Play/Stop) button, the [FUNC 1]
[FUNC 2] button, the TEMPO [-] [+] button, and the TRANSPOSE [-] [+] button.
Please refer to “Changing the Functions of the Remote Control’s Buttons” (p. 149).

72
KR107_e.book 73 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 3 Song Playback

Button Explanation
This changes the vocals from the mic. The setting switches each time you press the
TRANSFORM
button, cycling through male, female, Kids, and normal voice settings.
1 This adds harmonies to the mic vocals.
HARMONY The harmony setting switches each time you press the button, cycling through
Music Files (p. 42), Oct-Up (p. 39), Oct-Down (p. 39), and normal voice settings.
This adds greater breadth to the sound. Pressing this button toggles the Advanced
2 3D
3D effect on and off.
INTERNAL This switches the genres of the internal songs.
FAVORITES Selects songs in the “Favorites.”
3
When you press the button with external memory or a disk connected, the
EXTERNAL
connected storage media is selected.
4 MUTE This mutes all of the sounds.

Chapter 3
You can use the function assigned to this button. You can also change the function
5 FUNC1, FUNC2
assigned to the button (p. 149).
The settings for the [TONE] button, [HARMONY] button, and [TRANSFORM]
6 CANCEL button are restored to their original values.
The left and right tracks switch to a piano tone.
Pressing the button successively cycles you through these tone selections: Left
7 TONE
track, Right track, then User track.
Each press of the button takes you to the next selection among the available choices,
which are, in order: panel, notations, notations+keyboard, lyrics.
8 DISPLAY You can press the [DISPLAY] button while the Tempo screen or Volume screen is
displayed to clear the Tempo screen or Volume screen.
* Some songs may not feature screens with lyrics.
Pressing the [ ] button at the beginning of the song selects the previous song.
Pressing the [ ] button at a point other than the beginning of the song returns
you to the beginning of the song.

9 This starts and stops playback of the song.

Playback alternately starts and stops each time you press the [ ] button.
You can also assign functions to the button (p. 149).

When you press the [ ] button, the next song is selected.

VOL - +
10 You can adjust the volume.
(Volume)
This adjusts the tempo.
11 TEMPO - +
You can also assign functions to the button (p. 149).
This transposing sounds from the keyboard and songs being played back.
12 TRANSPOSE - +
You can also assign functions to the button (p. 149).

73
 KR107_e.book 74 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 4 Practice Functions

With the KR107, you can enjoy practice using a variety of functions.

Using “Visual Lesson,” you

Displaying the Notation can select practice songs suited

to your skill level.
Additionally, you can have
The KR can display notations not only for the internal songs, but for music files and
the results your
performances recorded with the KR. This is very convenient for performing while
performance indicated in
reading the music and for checking songs that have been recorded. When you play
points and check the
back a music file with lyrics, the lyrics appear on screen.
content in the notation.
Selecting the song Refer to the Quick Start.
When playing back songs on external memories, first connect the external memory
to the external memory port.

1. Press the [Song] button to select a song.

In some internal songs, the
For details refer to “Playing a Song” (p. 65). fingering is displayed.
The fingering numbers shown
2. Press the [DigiScore] button. in the screen indicate one
Chapter 4

possible fingering.
The “Notation screen” appears.
fig.d-notation.eps_60

Chord names can be displayed

in some of the internal songs
and recorded performances
using the KR’s Chord
Sequencer (p. 121).

You can make more advanced

settings for the notation by
pressing the [Option] button.
3. Press the [ (Play/Stop)] button.
Playback of the song begins, and the notation advances along with the progression NOTE
of the performance.
No notes are shown in the
Notes Regarding the Notation Display notation if the selected part

• Since the displayed notation data is read from external memory or the internal contains no data. To change

memory, some time may be required for the notation to be displayed. the part being displayed, refer
to “Making Detailed Settings
• The displayed notations are based on music files. Priority is placed on the
for the Notation Display” (p.
readability of the displayed music, not on the accurate rendition of difficult,
76).
high-level performances. Thus, there may be discrepancies seen when compared
with commercially available printed music. The display is not intended for
viewing advanced songs requiring precisely detailed notations, or complex
songs.
NOTE
• On the notation display screen, lyrics and notes may extend beyond the range
displayed on the screen and may not be visible. You can not display the

• Playback may start over from the beginning if you display the notation or notation for audio files.

change the displayed part during playback of the song.

74
KR107_e.book 75 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 4 Practice Functions

■ Touching Notes to Confirm the Sounds

(Touch the Notes)

In the Notation screen, you can have notes played by touching the notes on the
screen.
When you display the keyboard in the screen (p. 77), the keys on the keyboard for
the notes you touch are then shown in the display. This allows you confirm notes by
sight, sound, and touch.
In addition, when you trace part of the notation with your finger, the traced segment
is played back. This allows you to easily play back phrases you like.
fig.d-notation-key.eps_60

Chapter 4
■ Scrolling the Notation Along with the
Performances (AutoSync DigiScore)
You can have the notation displayed in the screen scroll automatically as you play,
even when the song is not being played back. No more frantically trying to turn to
the next page in the notation while you are performing.
This also lets you play difficult passages more slowly and otherwise practice at your
own pace.
* Auto Sync DigiScore is linked to the performance of the part shown in the screen. The
notation does not scroll if you are playing a part that is not currently displayed.

When the Bouncing Ball is Blue

Start playing at the point where the ball is bouncing.
You can change the AutoSync
The bouncing ball follows along and the notation scrolls as you play.
DigiScore settings. Refer to p.
When the Bouncing Ball is Red. 77.

If nothing is played for a short while, the bouncing ball turns red. At this time, if you
play a phrase near the position of the bouncing ball, the ball automatically moves to
the point in the notation where you are playing.

75
 KR107_e.book 76 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 4 Practice Functions

When you play four or more notes while the bouncing ball is red, the ball moves to
the point where you are playing.
When you play fewer than four notes, the bouncing ball does not jump to the new Under certain conditions, the
position, and the notation does not scroll. bouncing ball may not move as
expected.
The bouncing ball will move within the range of the notation displayed on the
external display or television. If you start playing at a point that is not currently
shown in the external display or television, the bouncing ball does not jump to the
new position, and the notation does not scroll.

■ Making Detailed Settings for the Notation

Display
You can change the part appearing on the notation display and change the manner NOTE
in which the notation is displayed.
Chapter 4

You can change the parts to be

displayed when you touch
1. Press the [DigiScore] button to display the Notation screen. each of the icons.

2. Press the [Option] button.

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-notationopt.eps_60

In some internal songs, the

fingering is displayed.
Switch the screens The fingering numbers shown
in the screen indicate one
You can select the parts to be displayed in the notation by touching the four icons at possible fingering.
the lower left of the screen.

Icon Description

The upper part and lower part are displayed.

The upper part is displayed.

The lower part is displayed. Chord names can be displayed

in some of the internal songs
and recorded performances
The User part is displayed. using the KR’s Chord
Sequencer (p. 122).

You can also touch <Export> to save the notation as an image file (p. 79).

76
KR107_e.book 77 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 4 Practice Functions

3. Touch for the parameter being set to select the value.

Press the [Exit] button to return to the Notation screen.

Item Setting
Zoom ON Displays an enlarged notation.
Sets whether or not the
enlarged notation is OFF Displays the notation at the normal size.
displayed.
Keyboard ON Displayed.
Sets whether the
keyboard is displayed OFF Not displayed.
beneath the notation.
The notation screen does not scroll
OFF
automatically.
The notation screen scrolls
automatically. When the bouncing ball
is blue, playback begins from the point
AutoSync DigiScore
in the notation where the ball is set.
Sets the function

Chapter 4
When the bouncing ball is red, and you
whereby the notation
JUMP start playing a phrase at a point in the
screen scrolls
notation close to where the ball is
automatically as you
located, the ball moves to the point
play, even if the song is
where you are playing. This position is
not played back.
determined after you play at least four
notes of the phrase.
The notation screen scrolls
NEXT
automatically from the current position
NOTE
in the song as you play.
Lyrics ON The lyrics are displayed.
This setting determines
whether or not lyrics in
songs that contain lyrics OFF Not displayed.
data appear in the
notation.
Finger Numbers ON The fingering is displayed.
This setting determines
whether or not the
fingering in songs that OFF Not displayed.
contain fingering data
appears in the notation.
Chords ON The chord names are displayed.
This setting determines
whether or not chord
names in songs that OFF Not displayed.
contain chord data
appears in the notation.
OFF Not displayed.
Pitches C, D, E The pitch names (C, D, E) are displayed.
Sets whether or not the
note names appear in the Do, Re, Mi The pitch names (fixed Do) are
music when the notation (Fixed) displayed.
is expanded. Do, Re, Mi The syllable names (movable Do) are
(Movable) displayed.

77
 KR107_e.book 78 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 4 Practice Functions

Item Setting
BASIC Controls each of the pedal movements.
You can start and stop playback of song
data with the left pedal. Pressing the
pedal in rapid succession moves you
back in the song the number of
measures equal to the number of times
REPLAY
you press the pedal, after which
playback resumes. This allows you to
use the pedal to rewind quickly, a useful
feature when, for example, you want to
repeatedly listen to a difficult phrase.
Pedal
Sets the pedal function. Scrolls the notation in the KR-107’s
display.
Pressing the center pedal scrolls to the
PAGE1
next page.
Pressing the left pedal scrolls to the
previous page.
Scrolls the notation in the external
display.
Chapter 4

Pressing the center pedal scrolls to the

PAGE2
next page.
Pressing the left pedal scrolls to the
previous page.

Resolution Notes down to sixteenth notes are

16th note
Sets the minimum note indicated.
length indicated in the Notes down to thirty-second notes are
notation. 32nd note
indicated.
Clef L Auto Display is switched automatically.
Determines whether a
G (treble) clef is displayed in the
treble or bass clef is G Clef
notation.
shown in the notation for
the left-hand part. F Clef F (bass) clef is displayed in the notation.
Clef R Auto Display is switched automatically.
Determines whether
G (treble) clef is displayed in the
treble or bass clef is G Clef
notation.
shown in the notation for
the right-hand part. F Clef F (bass) clef is displayed in the notation.
Key Auto Key is switched automatically.
Notation is displayed in
the b x 5–0– Notation is displayed in the specified
specified key. #x6 key.

Item Setting
User Part
User Track,
Selects the part to display when “User” is selected as the part
Parts 1–16
to be displayed.
Lower Part
Lower Track,
Selects the part to display when “Lower” is selected as the
Parts 1–16
part to be displayed.
Upper Part
Upper Track,
Selects the part to display when “Upper” is selected as the
Part 1–16
part to be displayed.

78
KR107_e.book 79 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 4 Practice Functions

Item Setting
Bouncing Ball ON Displayed.
This setting determines whether or not the
animated ball is shown bouncing in time with the OFF Not displayed.
song as it is played back.

Color Notation The note is

ON
This settings determines whether or not the note in displayed in color.
the current position is colored. OFF Not displayed.

■ Saving Notations as Image Data

You can take notations that are displayed on the KR and save them to external
NOTE
memories. You can also use saved image data to your computer.
Other than for your own

1. Insert the external memory onto which you want to save the image data personal enjoyment, use of the

Chapter 4
notations that are output
in the KR’s external memory port. without the permission of the

2. Record the performance (p. 91).

copyright holder is prohibited
by law.
Alternatively, press the [Song] button to select a song.

3. Press the [DigiScore] button.

The Notation screen appears.

4. Press the [Option] button.

5. Touch <Export>.

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-notationbmp.eps_60

79
 KR107_e.book 80 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 4 Practice Functions

6. Touch the respective parameter and set the range of image data and other
settings with the dial.

Item Setting Description

Selects the measure at which output
Start measure 1, 2–
begins.
Selects the measure at which output
End Measure – song end
ends.
Portrait, Sets the orientation of the notation
Direction
Landscape being output.
External Memory, Selects the media for the save
Media
Disk destination.

7. Touch <Execute>. NOTE

The notation is saved to the external memory as image data in BMP (bitmap) format. Do not remove the external
* You cannot save copyrighted song data. memory while “save” is in

* Other than for your own personal enjoyment, use of the notations that are output without the progress.
Chapter 4

permission of the copyright holder is prohibited by law.

Saving Your Visual Lesson Performance Results

When you practice with Visual Lesson, the notation showing the model performance
appears in the screen above the notation for your own performance. You can save
these notation in BMP (bitmap) format.

1. While in the “performance results confirmation screen” in Visual

Lesson, press the [Option] button.

2. Touch the parameter whose setting you want to change.

3. Set the value with the dial.

4. Touch <Execute>.

80
KR107_e.book 81 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 4 Practice Functions

Adjusting the Tempo

This changes the song and Music Style tempos.
If songs seem difficult to play at their original speed, you may find it helpful to first
practice with the tempo slowed down. Then, after becoming more familiar with the
song, you can practice it at a gradually faster tempo.
Changing the tempo has no effect on the pitch of the notes. And you can change the
tempo even when the song is in progress.
fig.panel3-2

Adjusting the Tempo with the Tempo [-] [+] Buttons

Chapter 4
Pressing the [+] button once increases the tempo by one unit. Holding down the
button makes the tempo increase continuously.
Pressing the [-] button once decreases the tempo by one unit. Holding down the NOTE

button makes the tempo decrease continuously. You can not adjust the audio

Pressing the [-] [+] buttons simultaneously returns the selected Music Style or song files’ tempo.

to the basic tempo.

■ Setting the Tempo by Pressing the Button in Time

(Tap Tempo)
You can also set the tempo by pressing the Performance Pad. This feature is called
“Tap Tempo.” By using the Tap Tempo function, you can quickly set the tempo you
are thinking of, without specifying the tempo in numerical terms.
fig.panel3-3

Assigning Functions to the Performance Pads

1. Press the [User Function] button and watch the indicator light up.

81
 KR107_e.book 82 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 4 Practice Functions

fig.d-usrfunc.eps_60

You can also assign the Tap

Tempo function to the pedal,
and use the pedal to specify
the tempo. For details, refer to
“Assigning Functions to
Pedals and Performance Pads
(Pedal Setting/User
2. Touch for the Performance Pad to which the function is Functions)” (p. 144).

assigned, then select “Tap Tempo.”

3. Press the [Exit] button; the tempo is indicated in the upper left of the
Chapter 4

screen.
You can start the song by
Specifying the Tempo giving the count through the
microphone. For more detailed
4. Press the Pad to which “Tap Tempo” is assigned at least twice. information, refer to “Enabling
the Start of Songs and
The tempo is set to the song you used when tapping the button.
Automatic Accompaniment
with the Sound of Your Voice
■ Playing Back at a Fixed Tempo (Tempo Mute) (Vocal Count In)” (p. 40).
If a song has tempo changes, it helps to practice the song first at a steady tempo.
Overriding tempo changes is called “Tempo Muting.”

1. Hold down the [ (Play/Stop)] button and press one of the Tempo [-]
[+] buttons.
When tempo muting is in effect, the tempo display appears in reverse video.
fig.d-tempmute.eps_60

When you play back the song, it will play at a constant tempo.

Cancel the Tempo Mute Setting

1. Hold down the [ (Play/Stop)] button and press one of the Tempo [-]
[+] buttons.
Tempo muting is canceled.
Tempo Mute will also be cancelled when you select a different song.

82
KR107_e.book 83 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 4 Practice Functions

Match the Tempo Before You Begin

Playing (Count In)
When you’re playing along with a song, you can listen to the tempo before you start
playing by adding a count-in.
This audible count before the song playback is called a “Count In.”
fig.panel3-3

1. Press the [Count/Marker] button and watch the indicator light up.

The following “Count settings screen” appears.

Chapter 4
fig.d-cntin.eps_60

You can have a count sound be

played before the song starts
playing back by holding down
the [ (Reset)] button while
you press the [ Play/
stop] button.The status of the
Count settings won’t be
affected by your use of this
procedure.

2. Touch <Count Mode> to set this to “Count In” or “Count In/

Down.”
With this setting, two measures count down before the song playback starts.

Cancelling the Count In For more about other settings

on the Count settings screen,
1. Press the [Count/Marker] button so its indicator is turned off. refer to “Changing the Settings
for the Count” (p. 141).
By pressing [Exit] instead of the [Count/Mark] button, you can close the Count
settings screen without cancelling the count.

83
 KR107_e.book 84 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 4 Practice Functions

Muting Some Parts Before Playing

(Track Buttons) For more on music files, refer
to “Music Files That the KR
Can Use” (p. 185).
With commercially available music files for piano lessons, the part for each hand can
be played back independently. This makes it easy to practice hands separately. For
example, you can follow along with your right hand while you listen to that same
NOTE
right-hand part be played, or you can practice the left-hand part while the right-hand
You cannot mute individual
part plays.
parts separately in audio files.
A music file for piano lessons may be assigned to the five Track buttons as shown below.
fig.trackbuttons.e

Drums/SFX Accom- Left-hand Right-hand

paniment
If a single Track button
Part Part
includes more than one
instrument and you want to
Chapter 4

mute just one of those

By using these Track buttons, you can eliminate the sound of specific parts. This is instruments, take a look at
“Modifying the Settings of
referred to as “muting.”
Each Part” (p. 115).
By recording your own performances to the Track Buttons in this fashion, you can
mute parts the same way. For details, refer to “Recording While Selecting the Track
Buttons (Redoing Recordings)” (p. 96).
When a single Part is not
1. Select the song that you wish to play back (p. 65). played, it is called “Minus
One.” Using Minus One, you
Selecting the Part that You’ll be Playing can mute out a particular
instrument and play the part
2. Press any one of the Track buttons to make the button’s indicator light go yourself.

dark.
The sound for the selected part no longer plays.
When playing back SMF files
For example, when practicing the right hand, press the [4/Upper] button.
for Roland Piano Digital series
When you play back the song, the right-hand performance will not sound. Practice instruments, and the [3/
your right-hand performance along with the left-hand playback. Lower] button and [4/Upper]
button do not correctly control
Playing Back a Song the lower/ upper
performances, please change
3. Press the [ (Play/Stop)] button. the “Track Assign” settings.
Please refer to “Changing the
The song will begin playing back. Parts Assigned to the Track
The part you selected in step 2 will not sound. Buttons During SMF Playback
Once again press the button you selected in step 2. The button’s indicator will light (Track Assign)” (p. 155).

up, and the part will be heard once again.

Even while the song is playing, you can press the track buttons to mute or un-mute
the sound.

Stopping the Song You can adjust the balance

between the keyboard and
4. Press the [ (Play/Stop)] button. song volume levels. Check out
“Adjusting the Volume
The song will stop. Balance for Each Performance
Part (Part Balance)” (p. 63).

84
KR107_e.book 85 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 4 Practice Functions

Setting Markers for Repeated Practice

(Marker)
By setting markers at points in a song that you want to practice repeatedly, you can
then easily go to and repeat play back of the selected measures.

■ Placing a Marker within a Song NOTE

You can place two separate markers (Marker A and Marker B) in one song. These You cannot place markers in
markers are placed at the beginning of a measure to make the beginning and end of audio files.

a section of music. Placing markers is a handy way to start playback at the same
place as many times as you like. You can add markers or move to a marker even
while playback is in progress.

Access the Marker Screen

First, select the song in which you’ll set the markers (p. 65).

1. Press the [Count/Marker] button.

Chapter 4
2. Touch <Marker>.
The Marker screen appears.
fig.d-marker.eps_60

Placing Markers

3. Go to the measure where you want to set a marker using the [ (Bwd)]
and [ (Fwd)] buttons.

4. Touch <- - -> for Marker A.

Marker A is placed at the beginning of the measure you selected.

“- - -” on the screen will change to the number of the measure where you placed the
marker. Markers can also be assigned
in units of beats rather than
5. In the same way, touch the Marker B <- - -> to set Marker B. measures. Refer to “Placing a
Marker in the Middle of a
It is not possible to assign marker B to the same location or a measure before marker A.
Measure” (p. 141).

85
 KR107_e.book 86 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 4 Practice Functions

■ Playback from a Marker Location

1. At the marker screen, touch the measure number of the marker you want
to go to.
fig.d-mark1-5.eps_60

Playback will start from wherever Marker A or Marker B are set.

When you play the song, playback starts from the position of the marker.
With the song playing back, playback will continue if you touch Marker A or Marker
B on the Marker screen.

■ Erasing a Marker
1. Touch <Clear> for the marker you want to erase.
Chapter 4

fig.d-markclear.eps_60

The marker disappears and the on-screen display changes to <- - ->.

■ Moving a Marker
You can move a marker that has been placed in a song. You can also move the section
of music defined by Markers A and B forward or back, without changing the number
of measures of marked.

1. On the Marker screen, touch or for the marker to be moved.

fig.d-mark1-5.eps_60

When you touch , the marker is moved to a previous part of the song.

When you touch , the marker is moved to a later part of the song.

Moving Markers A and B without Changing the Interval Between Them

fig.d-mark1-5.eps_60

86
KR107_e.book 87 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 4 Practice Functions

1. On the Marker screen, touch or in the middle of the screen.

For example, if you have Marker A set at the beginning of the fifth measure, and

Marker B set at the beginning of the ninth measure, when you touch in the
middle of the screen, Marker A is moved to the beginning of the first measure, and
Marker B is moved to the beginning of the fifth measure.

Touch to shift Marker A to the beginning of the ninth measure and Marker B
to the beginning of the thirteenth measure.
fig.markerA-B.e

Measure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Marker A Marker B

Measure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Chapter 4
Marker A Marker B

■ Playing Back the Same Passage Over and Over

You can play back a particular passage over and over. This is convenient when you
want to focus on a passage.

1. First, set Marker A and Marker B to define the measures you want to
repeat.
For instance, suppose you want to play back the passage from the fifth through
eighth measures over and over. You should place Marker A at the beginning of the
fifth bar and Marker B at the beginning of the ninth bar.

2. Touch <Repeat> in the Marker screen.

fig.d-markrpt.eps_60

OFF ON

When <Repeat> is On
• If neither Marker A nor
Marker B is set, the song
is played back from the
beginning to the end.
• If you only place marker
A, playback repeats
The setting is made for repeated playback of the passage from marker A to marker B. from marker A to the
When you play the song, the marked section of music plays back repeatedly. end of the song.
• If you only place marker
Cancelling Repeat Playback B, playback repeats from
the beginning of the
3. Touch <Repeat> in the Marker screen, and the icon returns to the song to marker B.

original color.
Repeat playback is cancelled.

87
 KR107_e.book 88 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 4 Practice Functions

Transposing Keyboard Sounds and

Songs Played Back (Transpose)
By using the “Transpose function,” you can transpose your performance without
changing the notes you play. For example, even if the song is in a difficult key with
many sharps ( ) or flats ( ), you can transpose it to a key that is easier for you to NOTE
read and play.
You cannot transpose audio
You can also use this function to play back a song in a different key. files.

When accompanying a vocalist, you can easily transpose the pitch to a range that is
comfortable for the singer, while still playing the notes as written (i.e., with the same
fingering positions).
fig.panel3-4
Chapter 4

First make sure you have selected the song to be transposed (p. 65).

1. Press the [Transpose] button.

A “Transpose screen” like the one below appears.

fig.d-transpose.eps_60

2. Touch the Transpose icon.

Icon Target Settings Value

Keyboard sound -6–0–5

Song to be played back -24–0–24

Keyboard sounds, songs being played back -6–0–5

88
KR107_e.book 89 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 4 Practice Functions

3. Touch the screen keyboard or , to select the transposition

value.

Each time you press or , it transposes the key by a semitone.

When you touch , a value of “0” is set.

You can also use the dial to change the transposition value.
When you transpose a song or the keyboard, the [Transpose] button’s indicator
lights up. As you play the keyboard or play back the song, the notes are transposed.
When you press the [Exit] button, the transposition remains in effect, and you’re
returned to the previous screen.

Cancelling Transposition

4. Press the [Transpose] button and the indicator light goes out.
The transposition value reverts

Chapter 4
Transposition is cancelled. to “0” when you turn off the
power or select another song.
The next time you press the [Transpose] button, illuminating the indicator, the music
is transposed by the value set here.

Example: Playing a song in E major while playing the keys

for C major
In this example, C is the root note in the key of C major. E, the root of E major, is the

third in C major. It is up four keys, including the black keys, so touch , then
enter “4” for the setting.
fig.trans.e

If you play C E G It will sound E G# B

89
 KR107_e.book 90 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance

You can easily record performances using the five track buttons.
A recorded performance can be played back to listen to your own playing, or to add NOTE
additional parts.
Recorded performances are
discarded when another song
You can use the KR to make the following kinds of recordings. is selected, or when the power
is turned off. Be sure to save
• Recording just your own keyboard performance → “Recording a New Song
important performances on an
(New Song)” (p. 91)
external memory. Take a look
• Recording performances using Automatic Accompaniment
at “Saving Songs” (p. 102).
→ “Recording With Accompaniment” (p. 93)
• Recording along with the internal songs and songs on external memories
→ “Recording Along with a Song” (p. 95) NOTE
• Re-recording → “Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons (Redoing
You cannot record while
Recordings)” (p. 96)
playing along with audio files.

❍ If the Following Screen Appears

If you’ve recorded a song or changed a song’s settings (see p. 115), the following
message appears on the screen when you try to choose another song.
Chapter 5

If it’s okay to delete the song, touch <OK>.

If you do not want to delete the song, touch <Cancel>, and either save the song to an
external memory (p. 102) or register the song to the Favorites (p. 69).

90
KR107_e.book 91 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance

Recording a New Song (New Song)

This records keyboard performances without the use of the internal songs or
Automatic Accompaniment.
fig.panel4-1

Settings for Recording Performances

1. Press One Touch Program [Piano] button.

This sets the KR for performance without the use of Automatic Accompaniment.

2. Decide on the tone of the performance (p. 23).

Use the Tone buttons and the touch screen to select the tone.
When you have finished choosing the settings, press the [Exit] button to display the
Basic screen.

Chapter 5
Recording Settings

3. Press the [ (Rec)] button.

You press the [ (Rec)] button and the following messages will appear, when a
song has already been recorded.
If you select <New Song>
fig.m-rec.eps_60
when a song has already been
recorded, the “OK to delete
song?” prompt appears in the
screen. For more detailed
information, refer to “If the
Following Screen Appears” (p.
90).

Touch <New Song>.

This switches the KR to the settings required for recording a new song.
The KR is put in recording standby.
To cancel recording, press the [ (Rec)] button once more.

4. Decide on the tempo and beat.

If necessary, press the [Metronome] button to play the metronome.
When you have finished making the settings, press the [Exit] button to display the
Basic screen.

91
 KR107_e.book 92 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance

Start Recording NOTE

5. Press the [ (Play/Stop)] button. Any performance that has

been recorded is deleted when
A two-bar count-in plays, then recording starts. the power to the KR is turned
Even without pressing the [ (Play/Stop)] button, recording starts when you off. If you do not want a
play the keyboard. There is no count-in played when you start by playing rather than performance deleted, then
save it to an external memory
pushing the [ (Play/Stop)] button.
or to Favorites. Refer to
When recording starts, the [ (Play/Stop)] and [ (Rec)] buttons’ indicators “Saving Songs” (p. 102).
light up.

Stop Recording

6. Press the [ (Play/Stop)] button.

Recording stops.
The performance is recorded to the [1/Whole] button.

Listening to the Recorded Performance

7. Press the [ (Reset)] button, then press the [ (Play/Stop)] button.

NOTE

When Auto Start is set to ON,

The recorded performance is played back. and no action is taken for a

When you press the [ (Play/Stop)] button, playback stops. certain period of time after you
Chapter 5

have recorded a performance,

a confirmation screen asking
Track buttons assignments for recorded performances you if you want to delete the
song appears in the display.
When you record only a keyboard performance, the performance will be assigned to
If you touch <Yes>, the song is
the track buttons as follows.
deleted and the demo song
• Normal performance (playing a single Tone from the entire keyboard) begins.
The performance is recorded to the [1/Whole] button. If you want to return to the

• Layer performance previous screen and continue

with the recorded
The performance is recorded to the [1/Whole] button.
performance, touch <No>.
• Split performance
The lower part of the keyboard is recorded to the [3/Lower] button, and the
upper part of the keyboard is recorded to the [4/Upper] button.
• Layer performance and Split performance
The lower part of the keyboard is recorded to the [3/Lower] button, and the
upper part of the keyboard is recorded to the [4/Upper] button.
• Drum set or sound effect performance
Recorded on the [R/Rhythm] button.

92
KR107_e.book 93 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance

Recording With Accompaniment

Try recording a performance along with the Automatic Accompaniment.

Settings for Recording Performances

1. Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.

This chooses the setting for Automatic Accompaniment.

2. Decide on the Music Style.

When you have finished choosing the settings, press the [Exit] button to display the
Basic screen.

Recording Settings

3. Press the [ (Rec)] button.

You press the [ (Rec)] button and the following messages will appear, when a
song has already been recorded.
fig.m-rec.eps_60
If you select <New Song>
when a song has already been
recorded, the “OK to delete
song?” prompt appears in the
screen. For more detailed

Chapter 5
information, refer to “If the
Following Screen Appears” (p.
90).

Touch <New Song>.

This switches the KR to the settings required for recording a new song.

The KR is put in recording standby.

To cancel recording, press the [ (Rec)] button once more.

4. Decide on the tempo.

Start Recording

5. Play a chord on the lower part of the keyboard. You can change how recording
is stopped when recording a
An Automatic Accompaniment intro starts, and recording starts at the same time.
performance with Automatic
Stop Recording Accompaniment. To learn
how, see “Changing How
6. Press the [Intro/Ending] button. Recording Stops” (p. 97).

An ending plays, then the Automatic Accompaniment, and recording stop at the
same time.

Listening to the Recorded Performance

7. Press the [ (Reset)] button, then press the [ (Play/Stop)] button.

The recorded performance plays back.

When you press the [ (Play/Stop)] button, playback stops.

93
 KR107_e.book 94 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance

Track buttons assignments for recorded performances

Performances that have been recorded using Automatic Accompaniment are Music Styles are composed of
assigned to the track buttons as shown below. eight parts. For details, refer to
“Music Styles and Automatic
Accompaniment” (p. 47).
Track button Performance Recorded

The rhythm part of an Automatic Accompaniment is

recorded here. In addition, drum sets and effect sounds
[R/Rhythm]
that are selected with the keys in a performance are
recorded to this track.

When using Piano Style accompaniment (p. 62), the

[1/Whole]
performance played on the keyboard is recorded here.

[2/ Bass The Automatic Accompaniment bass part and

Accomp] accompaniment part are recorded here.

When the KR is set so that sounds from performances on

the left-hand side of the keyboard are played while the
[3/Lower] Automatic Accompaniment sounds (p. 61), your own
performance on the left-hand side of the keyboard is
recorded here.

Your own performance on the right-hand side of the

[4/Upper]
keyboard is recorded here.
Chapter 5

94
KR107_e.book 95 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance

Recording Along with a Song

Try recording along with internal songs and songs on external memories.
Here, record your right-hand performance along with the song accompaniment.

Settings for Recording Performances

1. Select a song.
For more on how to select songs, refer to p. 65.

2. Decide on the tone and tempo of the performance.

3. Press the [DigiScore] button to display the notation.

For instructions on displaying the notation, refer to p. 74. The song tempo is stored
within the song you selected.
Recording Settings

4. Press the [ (Rec)] button.

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.m-rec.eps_60

Chapter 5
5. Touch <Add On>.

With this setting, you can record while listening to the selected song.

Selecting the Track to Record

6. Press the track button for the track that you want to record (i.e., the track
that you want to play yourself).
The indicator of the button you pressed will blink, and the KR enters recording- NOTE

standby mode. Only drum sets or SFX set are

Since in this example we will record the upper part performance, press the [4/ recorded to the [R/Rhythm]
Upper] button to make the button’s indicator light blink. button.

To cancel recording, press the [ (Rec)] button once more.

Start Recording

7. Press the [ (Play/Stop)] button.

A two-bar count-in plays, then recording starts.

Even without pressing the [ (Play/Stop)] button, recording starts when you
play the keyboard. There is no count-in played when you start by playing the
keyboard instead of pushing the [ (Play/Stop)] button.
When recording starts, the [ (Play/Stop)] and [ (Rec)] buttons’ indicators light.

Stop Recording

8. Press the [ (Play/Stop)] button.

95
 KR107_e.book 96 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance

Recording stops.

Listening to the Recorded Performance

9. Press the [ (Reset)] button, then press the [ (Play/Stop)] button.

The recorded performance is played back.

When you press the [ (Play/Stop)] button, playback stops.

Recording While Selecting the Track

Buttons (Redoing Recordings)
When you want to re-record, specify the Track button for the performance you want
to re-record, and then record again.
When you want to record over
When you select a previously recorded Track button and re-record, everything from
again after deleting all of the
the point at which you begin recording up to the point where you stop recording will
previous recording, refer to
be replaced by the newly re-recorded performance. “Erasing Recorded

1. Use the [ (Bwd)] and [ (Fwd)] buttons to go to the measure

Performances” (p. 97).

where you want to begin recording.

Chapter 5

2. Press the [ (Rec)] button.

The song tempo is stored
A screen like the one shown below appears. within the song you selected. If
fig.m-rec.eps_60 you want to change the tempo
of the recorded song, refer to
“Changing the Tempo of
Recorded Songs” (p. 128) and
“Changing the Tempo Within
the Song” (p. 128).

3. Touch <Add on>.

4. Press the Track button for the track you want to re-record.

The indicator for the selected Track button starts blinking.

The [ (Play/Stop)] button’s indicator flashes, and the KR is put in recording
standby.
To cancel recording, press the [ (Rec)] button once more.

5. Press the [ (Play/Stop)] button to begin recording.

Rerecording the Accompaniment Part of Automatic Accompaniment

When rerecording an Automatic Accompaniment performance, set Sync Start (p.
55), then specify a chord or press the [Start/Stop] button.

6. Press the [ (Play/Stop)] button to stop recording.

If you also want to rerecord the ending of the Automatic Accompaniment, press the
[Intro/Ending] button.

96
KR107_e.book 97 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance

Erasing Recorded Performances

You can use the following method to delete a recorded performance.

1. Hold down the [Song] button and press the [ (Rec)] button.

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.m-songdel.eps_60

2. Touch <OK>.
This deletes the recorded song.
When you touch <Cancel>, the song selection screen or basic screen appears and the
recorded song is not erased.

■ Erasing the Performance on Specific Tracks

You can select and erase performances on specific tracks.

Chapter 5
1. Hold down the Track button for the track containing the performance
you want to erase, then press the [ (Rec)] button.
The Track button’s light goes dark, and the recorded music is erased.

Changing How Recording Stops

When recording an Automatic Accompaniment performance, you can change the
accompaniment and the way recording mode stops.

1. Press the [Menu] button and watch the indicator light up.
The Menu screen appears.

2. Touch <Rec Mode>.

A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-recmode.eps_60

97
 KR107_e.book 98 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance

3. Touch <Rec Stop> to switch between “Arranger Stop” and

“Composer Stop.”

Display Explanation

Recording stops at the same time the Automatic

Arranger Stop
Accompaniment stops.

Recording does not stop, even when the Automatic

Composer Stop Accompaniment stops. When you press the [ (Play/
Stop)] button, recording stops.

Recording Songs Starting with Pickups

You can record songs that start with pickup beats (songs that start on a beat other
than the measure’s first beat).
fig.PU.e

Count Sound

~
Measure -2 PU 1
Chapter 5

Recording begins here

Carry out Steps 1–4 on p. 91 to prepare for recording.

If the [ (Rec)] button’s indicator is not lit, press the [ (Rec)] button so the
indicator is lit.
The KR is put in recording standby.

1. Press the [ (Bwd)] button one time.

The measure number in the upper right of the Basic screen changes to “PU,” and the
KR is set to record a song starting with a pickup.
fig.d-pu.eps_60

Start recording. After a one-measure count, recording begins.

98
KR107_e.book 99 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance

Using External Memories

If you install separately available external memory or a floppy disk drive, you’ll be If connecting an optional
able to save songs you’ve recorded and listen to commercially available music data. floppy disk drive, substitute
“floppy disk” wherever the
■ Connecting and Ejecting an External Memory term “external memory”
appears here.
1. Press the External Memory port cover and open the cover.
Press the cover in; the cover will open.

NOTE

Use external memory available

from Roland. Proper
functioning cannot be

2. Connect the external memory to the External Memory port. guaranteed if other external
memory products are used.

Chapter 5
3. Press the cover in again to close the cover.

* Always keep the Ext Memory port cover closed except when connecting and
disconnecting external memory.

Locking the External Memory Port Cover

When connecting external memory (sold separately), you can lock the memory port
cover to prevent theft of the connected external memory.

1. Connect the external memory to the external memory port.

2. Press the External Memory port cover to close the cover.

NOTE

3. Secure the lock using the anti-theft lock screws included with the Take care not to lose the anti-

instrument. theft lock screws. Also be sure

s
to use only the included
screws to secure the anti-theft
lock.

99
 KR107_e.book 100 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance

■ Formatting Media (Format) NOTE

The process of preparing external memory or disks so that they can be used with the When an external memory is
KR107 is called “initialization” (formatting). initialized, all of the data
In certain cases, particularly with floppy disks, the media is formatted for a specific saved on the external

type of device. If the media format does not match the KR107’s, you will not be able memory is erased. If you’re
formatting a used external
to use that media with the KR107.
memory for reuse, be sure to
check first to make sure the
external memory doesn’t
contain any data you don’t
want to lose.
fig.panel4-3

1. Connect the external memory to the external memory port.

NOTE

When initializing floppy disks,

2. check to make sure that the

Chapter 5

Press the [Song/File] button.

disk’s write protect tab is slid
to the “write” position.
3. Touch <File>.
A “File screen” like the one below appears.
fig.d-songfile.eps_60

NOTE

Do not disconnect the

external memory while data
is being read from or written
to the memory.

NOTE

Do not eject the floppy disk

while data is being read from
or written to the disk. This
may scratch the disk’s
4. Touch <Format Media>. magnetic surface, rendering
the memory unusable. (The
The following screen appears.
disk drive’s indicator lights
brightly while data is being
read from or written to the
disk. At all other times, the
indicator is lit more dimly, or
is not lit at all.)

100
KR107_e.book 101 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance

fig.d-format.eps_60

NOTE

Do not remove the storage

media until the initialization is
completed.

Press the [Exit] button to go back to the previous screen.

5. Touch <Media> to select the storage media to be initialized.

6. Touch <Execute>.
A confirmation screen appears. If you want to quit the initialization, touch <Cancel>.
NOTE

7. Touch <OK>. If “Error” appears on screen,

take a look at “Error
Initialization of the external memory begins. Messages” (p. 171).

Chapter 5
When initialization is completed, you’re returned to the previous screen.

101
 KR107_e.book 102 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance

Saving Songs
Substitute the words “floppy
A recorded performance is discarded when you switch off the power or choose disk” for “external memory” if
another song. Storing recorded performances and other data to external memories using a separately purchased
or the Favorites is called “saving.” Be sure to save important songs to external floppy disk drive.
memories or Favorites.

What are “Favorites?”

You can register songs you are currently practicing or particularly like to When using a new strage
“Favorites,” allowing you to select these songs easily (p. 69). media, first initialize (format)
When you register a song on an external memory to Favorites, you can then play the external memory on the
back the song without connecting the external memory to the external memory KR. Take a look at “Formatting

connector. Media (Format)” (p. 100).

If a recorded performance is saved to Favorites, the performance won’t be erased NOTE

when the power is turned off.
Some commercially available
music files cannot be saved
Preparations for Saving Data because they are copy
protected.
When saving to external memories, connect the external memory to the external
memory port.

1. Press the [Song/File] button.

When saving to floppy disks,
Chapter 5

2. Touch <File>. first check to make sure that

the floppy disk’s protect tab is

3. Touch <Save>.
set to the “Write” position
(p. 7).
The following “Save Song screen” appears.
fig.d-songsave.eps_60

If not handled with care, a

floppy disk and an external
memory can be damaged, or
the data on it become
corrupted, making playback
impossible. We recommend
saving your songs on two
different media.

When you want to clear all of

the content saved to the
“Favorites” and restore the
settings to the original factory
condition on the KR, refer to
“Formatting the User
Memory” (p. 152).

102
KR107_e.book 103 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance

Determining the Name of the Song to be Saved

4. Touch <Rename>.

The following “Rename screen” appears.

fig.d-songname.eps_60

When you touch , the cursor moves.

When you touch the icon for the letter or character to be input, the character appears
at the cursor location. For example touching <ABC> in succession cycles you
through the available choices in that character group (“A”→”B”→”C”...).
Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters through “English (upper case),”

Chapter 5
“English (lower case),” “numerals,” “symbols,” then back to “English (upper case).”
When you touch <Del>, the character at the cursor position is deleted.
When you touch <Ins>, a space is inserted at the cursor position.

5. When you have finished with the name, press the [Exit] button.

Determining the Save Destination

6. Touch <Media> to select the save-destination storage media.

7. Touch <File> to select the save-destination song number.

If a song name is displayed with a number a song is already saved to that number.
If you select a number with a previously saved song and then proceed to save a new
song, the previously saved song will be erased. If you do not want to lose a saved
song, select a number with no song name indicated in the save-destination column.

Selecting the Save Setting (when saving to external memories)

8. Press the [Option] button.

9. Touch “Tone Compatibility” to select the tone compatibility

format.

103
 KR107_e.book 104 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance

Some Tones are unique to the KR. Data that is recorded using these tones may not
play back correctly on other Roland Digital Pianos or Music Players. When you want
to save data so that it can be played back on another devices, save the data with
“MT” set as the Tone compatibility format.

Display Explanation

The song is saved as data capable of reproducing

KR performances with richness of expression using this unit’s
special Tones.

Data is saved in a form that can also be played on the Roland

Digital Pianos or Music Players other than this unit.
MT You can listen to songs saved in this format on the Roland HP-
G/R series and KR series keyboards as well as on Roland MT
series devices.

<Note>
When data saved with “MT” as the Tone compatibility format is played back on this
instrument, some of the nuances that were part of the performance at the time the
data was recorded may be altered.
Even with data saved with “MT” as the Tone compatibility format, an exact
reproduction of the original performance may be unobtainable when using GS
devices other than Roland Pianos and Music Players.
Chapter 5

Selecting the File Format (when saving to external memories)

NOTE

10.Touch <File Format> to select the file format.

Depending on the playback
instrument, some notes may
drop out or sound different.
Display Explanation

Saves the song in this unit’s format. You can listen to songs
saved in this format on the Roland HP-G/R series and KR
i-format
series keyboards as well as on Roland MT series devices. This
format is called “i-format”. NOTE

Saves the song as an SMF (Standard MIDI Files). Songs saved Never turn off the power
in this SMF format can be listened to on many instruments while the saving operation is
SMF that can play SMF music files (p. 185). in progress. Doing so will
A song recorded using commercial music files can’t be saved damage the KR’s internal
in “Save As SMF” format for reasons of copyright protection.
memory, making it unusable.

11.Press the [Exit] button.

It’s a good idea to get into the
Save
habit of moving the write-

12.Touch <Execute> to start saving. protect tab on the floppy disk

to the “Protect” position when
The time required for saving ranges from several seconds to half a minute or more. you’ve finished saving your

Don’t take the external memory out of the external memory port until the saving data. Keeping the tab at
“Protect” prevents operations
process is finished.
that could erase your songs by
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Song File screen.
mistake.

104
KR107_e.book 105 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance

Deleting Saved Songs

This deletes songs that have been saved on external memories, or to Favorites.
To delete a song on an external memory, first connect the external memory to the
external memory port.

1. Press the [Song/File] button.

2. Touch <File>.
The “Song File screen” appears.

3. Touch <Delete>.
A “Delete Song screen” appears.
fig.d-songdel.eps_60

Chapter 5
4. Touch <Media> to select the storage media.

5. Touch <File> to select the song to be deleted.

6. Touch <Execute>. NOTE

Never turn off the power

The selected song is deleted.
while the operation is in
Do not eject the external memory from the external memory port until the operation
progress. Doing so will
is finished. damage the KR’s internal
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Song File screen. memory, making it unusable.

105
 KR107_e.book 106 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance

Copying Songs on External Memories

to Favorites
You can take songs saved on external memories and copy them to Favorites.
You can also copy songs in Favorites to external memories.

1. Connect the external memory with the song to be copied to the external
memory port.

2. Press the [Song/File] button.

3. Touch <File>.

4. Touch <Copy>.
The following “Copy Song screen” appears.
fig.d-songcopy.eps_60
Chapter 5

Specifying the Copy Source

5. Touch the <Media> to select the copy source storage media.

6. Touch the <File> to select the song you want to copy.

When “Copy All” is selected, all of the songs on the external memory are copied to
Favorites.

Specifying the Copy Destination

7. Touch <Favorites> to select the copy destination for the

song.
If a song name is displayed with a number, a song is already saved to that number.
If you select a number with previously saved song data and proceed to copy to that
location, the previously saved song will be erased. If you don’t want to erase a
previously saved song, choose a number with no song name appears in the
destination column.

106
KR107_e.book 107 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance

8. Touch <Execute>. NOTE

Do not eject the external memory from the external memory port until the copy is Never turn off the power
while the operation is in
finished.
progress. Doing so will
The song from the external memory is copied to Favorites. damage the KR’s internal
memory, making it unusable.
■ Copying Songs Saved in Favorites to External
Memories
Songs that’ve been saved to Favorites can be copied onto external memories.
In this case, in the “Copy Song screen” in Step 4 above, touch the arrow icon in the
center to point the arrow upwards. This sets the KR to copy the song in Favorites to
the external memory.
fig.d-songcopy2.eps_60

Chapter 5
NOTE
The rest of the procedure is identical to that used for copying songs from external
Some song data cannot copy
memories to Favorites.
because they are copy
protected.

107
 KR107_e.book 108 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 6 User Program Registration

Saving Performance Settings Determining the name of the User Programs

(User Program) 4. Touch <Rename>.

A “Rename screen” like the following appears.
Any collection of settings, including those describing the fig.d-upgname.eps_50

current status of your data selections or settings Automatic

Accompaniment, can be saved to the [User Program] button.
You can then call up the stored settings by pressing the [User
Program] button. Saving your preferred combinations of
Music Styles and Tones, as well as other frequently used
settings, makes it more convenient.
You can register up to 36 User Programs to the KR.
fig.panel_UPG

When you touch , the cursor moves.

When you touch the icon for the character to be input,
the character appears of the cursor potion.
For example, touching the <ABC> icon in succession
→ For more on what can be registered to a User Program, refer to cycles you through the available choices in that character
“Parameters Stored in the User Program” (p. 184). group (A→B→C→A...).
Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters
1. Set the Music Style, Tone, and other data until the
through “English (upper case),” “English (lower case),”
settings are the way you want them.
“numerals,” “symbols,” then back to “English (upper
2. Press the [User Program] button. case).”

A “User Program screen” like the one shown below When you touch <Del>, the character at the cursor
appears. position is deleted.
Chapter 6

fig.d-upg.eps_50
When you touch <Ins>, a space is inserted at the cursor
position.
5. When you have finished with the name, press the [Exit]
button.

You’re returned to the Write User Program screen.

Determining the Write Destination

6. Touch to select the write-destination

number.
3. Touch <Write>.
7. Touch <Execute>.
A “Write User Program screen” like the following
The current performance settings are saved to the [User
appears.
fig.d-upgwrite.eps_50
Program] button.
* Never turn off the power while the display indicates
<Writing...>. Doing so will damage the KR’s internal
memory, making it unusable.

→ You can restore the content registered to the [User Program]

button to the original factory settings. Refer to “Restoring the
Factory Settings (Factory Reset)” (p. 149).

108
KR107_e.book 109 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 6 User Program Registration

Calling Up Saved User Saving the User Program Sets

Programs You can take the 36 User Programs saved to the [User
You can easily call up settings saved to the [User Program] Program] button and save them as a set to an external
button. memory, or to user memory.
When saving to an external memory, first connect an external
1. Press the [User Program] button.
memory to the external memory port.
The “User Program screen” appears.
Touch the scroll bar and drag up or down to scroll → For more on working with the external memory, refer to
through the screen and display other name of User “Using External Memories” (p. 99).
Programs.
1. Press the [User Program] button.
Touch the page icons < >< > to change pages. 2. Touch <File>.
2. Touch the name of the User Program you want to call 3. Touch <Save>.
up. A “Save User Program screen” like the following
When you touch the name of the User Program, the appears.
buttons or other performance settings instantly change fig.d-upgsave.eps_50

to the previously saved settings.

■ Changing the Way User

Programs Are Called Up
When calling up registered User Programs, you can control
whether or not the Automatic Accompaniment settings are
also switched depending on how long you touch the touch
panel.

1. Press the [User Program] button.

Chapter 6
Giving a Name to a Set of User Programs
2. Press the [Option] button.
A settings screen like the following appears. 4. Touch <Rename>.
fig.d-upgopt.eps_50
The Rename screen appears.

When you touch , the cursor moves.

When you touch the icon for the character to be input,
the character appears at the cursor position. For example
touching the <ABC> icon in succession cycles you
through the available choices in that character group
(A→B→C→A...).
Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters
through “English (upper case),” “English (lower case),”
3. Touch <Instant> or <Delayed> to select the setting. “numerals,” “symbols,” then back to “English (upper
case).”
Display Explanation
When you touch <Del>, the character at the cursor
Immediately after a User Program name is
Instant touched, the Automatic Accompaniment position is deleted.
settings also switch. When you touch <Ins>, a space is inserted at the cursor
The Automatic Accompaniment settings position.
Delayed switch after you touch and road the User
Program name for a few moments.
5. When you have finished with the name, press the [Exit]
button.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the User Program
screen.
Refer to p. 184 about the parameters stored in the User
Programs.

109
 KR107_e.book 110 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 6 User Program Registration

Determining the Save Destination fig.d-upgload.eps_50

6. Touch <Media> to select the save-

destination strage media.

7. Touch <File> to select the save-

destination User Program number.

If a User Program set name is displayed, a User Program

set saved to that saved to that number is already.
If you select a number with previously saved User
Specifying the Set of User Programs to be
Program set data, then save a new set of data to that
Loaded
same number, the older User Program set will be
deleted. If you don’t want to lose any previously saved 4. Touch < >< > to select the storage media to be
User Programs, select a number in the save-destination
read from.
column that does not yet have a name.
Touch the scroll bar and drag up or down to scroll
Saving through the screen and display other name of User
8. Touch <Execute> to begin the save. Programs.

Press the [Exit] button to return to the User Program File 5. Touch the name of User Program to load.
screen.
6. Touch <Execute>.
* Never turn off the power or eject the external memory from
the external memory port while the operation is in
The selected User Programs are loaded to the [User
progress. Doing so will damage the KR’s internal memory, Program] button.
making it unusable. * Never turn off the power or eject the external memory from
→ When clearing the set of saved User Programs, refer to the external memory port while the operation is in
progress. Doing so will damage the KR’s internal memory,
“Deleting Saved User Program Sets” (p. 111).
Chapter 6

making it unusable.

■ Loading Saved User Program

Sets
User Programs that have been saved on external memories or
in user memory can be called up, on an individual set basis,
to the [User Program] button.
* Note that calling up these User Programs results in the
deletion of all User Programs currently recorded to the
[User Program] button.
When loading a set of User Programs from an external
memory, first connect the external memory to the external
memory port.

→ For more on working with the external memory, refer to

“Using External Memories” (p. 99).

1. Press the [User Program] button.

2. Touch <File>.
3. Touch <Load>.
A “Load User Program screen” like the following
appears.

110
KR107_e.book 111 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 6 User Program Registration

Deleting Saved User Copying Sets of User Programs on

Program Sets External Memories to the User
Memory
You can delete individual User Program sets saved to
external memories or in user memory. You can copy sets of User Programs saved on external
memories and to user memory.
When deleting a set of User Programs on an external
You can also copy sets of User Programs saved in user
memory, first connect the external memory to the external
memory and to external memories.
memory port.

→ For more on working with the external memory, refer to 1. Connect the external memory with the settings to be
“Using External Memories” (p. 99). copied to the external memory port.

1. Press the [User Program] button. 2. Touch the [User Program] button.

2. Touch <File>. 3. Touch <File>.

3. Touch <Delete>. 4. Touch <Copy>.

A “Copy User Programs screen” like the following
A “Delete User Program screen” like the following
appears.
appears.
fig.d-upgcopy.eps_50
fig.d-upgdel.eps_50

Chapter 6
Specifying the Copy Source
4. Touch <Media> to select the strage
5. Touch <Media> to select the strage
media.
media.

5. Touch to select the set of User Programs

6. Touch <File> to select the set of User
to be deleted.
Programs you want to copy.
6. Touch <Execute>.
When “All” is selected, all of the sets of User Programs
The selected User Programs are deleted. on the external memory are copied to user memory.
* Never turn off the power or eject the external memory from
Specifying the Copy Destination
the external memory port while the operation is in
progress. Doing so will damage the KR’s internal memory,
making it unusable.
7. Touch <User> to select the copy
destination for the set of User Programs.
If a User Program name is displayed, already a User
Program saved to that number is already.
If you select a number with User Programs data, and
then copy data to that number, the previously saved
User Programs are deleted. If you do not want to delete
the saved User Programs, select a number in the save-
destination column for which no name is displayed.

111
 KR107_e.book 112 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 6 User Program Registration

8. Touch <Execute>. If you want to use the Load Next function to switch
The set of User Programs on the external memory is among User Programs saved to external memory, make
saved to user memory. sure to set Load Next in all of the User Program sets to
“On.” Also, be sure to set the Pedal Shift value so it is for
* Never turn off the power or eject the external memory from
the same pedal.
the external memory port while the operation is in
progress. Doing so will damage the KR’s internal memory,
making it unusable. ■ Selecting the Pedal Used for
Switching Settings (Pedal Shift)
■ Coping Sets of User Programs
Stored in the User Memory to 3. Touch <Pedal Shift> to select the setting.
External Memories
Display Explanation
You can take User Program sets saved in user memory and
copy them to external memories. You can use a function assigned to the
OFF
pedal.
In this case, in the Copy User Programs screen in Step 4
The left pedal is dedicated to switching
above, touch the large arrow icon in the center to get the
Left Pedal User Programs.The function assigned to
arrow to point up. This sets the KR to copy the User Program the left pedal cannot be used.
set in the user memory to the external memory.
The center pedal is dedicated to
The rest of the procedure is identical to that used for copying switching User Programs.The function
Center Pedal
sets of User Program set from external memories to user assigned to the center pedal cannot be
used.
memory.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the User Program
screen.

Using the Pedal to Switch ■ Sequential Loading of User

User Programs Program Sets Stored
You can assign the function of the sequential switching of the (Load Next)
Chapter 6

“User Programs” to the pedal. That way, each time you When using the pedal to switch your User Programs,
depress the pedal, the KR107 switches to the next User you can also call up sequential sets of User Programs as
Program. saved to external memory. This feature is called the
“Load Next” function.
Great for use in concerts and similar situations, this allows
you to prepare and save your User Programs in the sequence
they are to be used, and then call up User Programs in the 3. Touch <Load Next> to select the setting.
appropriate order while you perform, simply by depressing
the pedal. Display Explanation
Switches Load Next off. The next press of
1. Press the [User Program] button. the pedal after the 36th User Program is
OFF
2. Touch <Pedal> in the lower part of the screen. called up returns you to the first User
Program of the same User Program set.
A “PEDAL screen” like the following appears.
fig.d-upgopt.eps_50
Switches Load Next on. The next press of
the pedal after the 36th User Program has
ON
been called up takes you to the first User
Program in the next User Program set.

Press the [Exit] button to return to the User Program

screen.

The Pedal Shift and Load Next settings are stored in each
User Program set.

112
KR107_e.book 113 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 6 User Program Registration

Simultaneously Switching 5. Press the [Exit] button.

User Program and The User Program screen returns to the display.

Transmitting PC Numbers Touch <Write> to save the setting to the User Program.
For more detailed information, refer to “Saving
You can have PC (Program Change) numbers be transmitted Performance Settings (User Program)” (p. 108).
to an external MIDI device when you switch the User
Program on the KR.
You can register PC number settings to each of the User
Programs, just as you can with button settings and other
settings preferences.

Calling Up the Performance Settings to Be Set

1. Press the [User Program] button, then touch the name
of the performance setting you want to set.

Setting the Transmission of the PC

2. Press the [Option] button.

3. Touch < >< > to switch the page to display

the following screen.
fig-upgPCset.eps_50

4. Touch for the parameter and make the Chapter 6

settings.

Display Description

Bank
Sets the Bank Select MSB.
Select MSB

Bank
Sets the Bank Select LSB.
Select LSB

Program Sets the Program Change messages

Change (Program Numbers).

This prevents the PC number from being

Tx PC
transmitted (Off), or sets the transmission
Channel
channel (Channel 1–16).

113
 KR107_e.book 114 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs

Multitrack Recording with 16 Commercially Available Music Files
Commercially available song file recorded in Roland’s SMF
Parts (16-Track Sequencer) format is also composed of sixteen parts.
Multitrack recording always you to listen to previously By loading the song file from the external memory and using
recorded material while continuing to add performances of the 16-Track Sequencer, you can then also edit the song file.
other parts. → Although with commercially available Roland SMF music
The KR is capable of multitrack recording of up to sixteen data, Part 11 is included in the [2/Bass Accomp] track button,
parts. Since each part’s performance is recorded using one other tracks match to the corresponding Track buttons.
tone, you can layer performances, using up to sixteen tones
* With some commercially available music files, you cannot edit
for the data in one song. The function used to layer these
the data.
sixteen parts, one at a time, is called the “16-Track
Sequencer.”
fig.16track.e
■ The 16-Track Sequencer Screen
16-Track Sequencer When recording with 16-track Sequencer, display the 16-
You can record performances for up to 16 parts, track Sequencer screen.
overlaying them part by part, to create a single song.
Part 1 1. Press the [Menu] button.
Flute Part Part 2
The Menu screen appears.
Bass Part Part 3
Piano Part (left hand) Part 4 2. Touch <16trk Sequencer>.
Piano Part (right hand)
• A “16-track Sequencer screen” like the one shown below
•
• Part 16 appears.
fig.d-16tr.eps_50

16-Track Sequencer and Track Buttons

In addition to the “16-Track Sequencer” function, the “Track
Buttons” (p. 84) are another of the unit’s playing/recording
functions.
These five “Track buttons” are used for organizing the 16-
Track Sequencer’s sixteen parts. This allows you to use the
16-Track Sequencer to add more sounds to performances
recorded with the Track buttons, and make even more
detailed edits of the songs.
Chapter 7

You can easily play back the original song data with the 16- Icon Explanation
Track Sequencer, mute parts by pressing the Track buttons,
Touch to select the part to be recorded, or the
and more. <1>–<16> part whose settings are to be changed. The
The Track buttons correspond to 16-track sequencer parts as button for the selected part changes color.
shown below.
This Part to be played back
Track button Part
[R/Rhythm] D (10), S (11)
The Part not to be played back (Muted Part)
[1/Whole] 1
[2/Bass Accomp] 2, 5–9, 12–16 Parts that do not have performance data
recorded to them.
[3/Lower] 3
Solo Only the selected Part is played back.
[4/Upper] 4
This allows you to prevent the sound for the
Since the 16-Track Sequencer records one tone to one part, Mute
selected part from playing.
you cannot use Layer performance (p. 26), Split performance
The performance data for the selected part is
(p. 27), or other such functions to record two or more tones Clear
deleted.
simultaneously. Also, you can’t record the performance with
This displays the Part Settings screen, in which
Automatic Accompaniment. Options you can make detailed settings for each part.
When you want to record with Automatic Accompaniment, For details refer to p. 115.
then you should use the Track buttons for recording. (Refer
to “Recording With Accompaniment” (p. 93)

114
KR107_e.book 115 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs

Icon Explanation
4. Touch for the corresponding item to change
The Tone Set screen appears. For details refer
Tone Set the setting.
to p. 116.
You can adjust the values by touching the desired
■ Modifying the Settings of Each Part parameter and turning the dial or by touching and
You can change the Tones and volume, as well as mute the dragging the slider.
playback, for each individual part in songs recorded with the
16-track Sequencer and the internal songs. Display Explanation

→ Because commercially available Roland SMF music files are Volume Changes the volume level.
also made up of 16 Parts, you can change the settings for the Changes the amount of reverb effect
Reverb
individual Parts and play them back in the same way. applied to the sound.

First, select the song for which the settings are to be made Chorus Changes the amount of chorus applied.
(p. 65). Shifts the direction from which the sound is
heard between left and right.
1. Display the 16-track Sequencer screen (p. 114).
Panpot
2. Touch the screen to choose the Part for which you want Touch to shift the sound to the right,

to make settings. or touch to shift it to the left.

Change the settings for the selected Part.

Display Function What’s Panpot?

Solo Only the selected Part is played back. Panpot is the control that determines the placement of
the sound in the stereo sound field between left and
Toggles playback of the selected Part to on
Mute right speakers. By altering the Panpot setting, you can
or off.
change the perceived location of the sound between the
The performance data for the selected part is
Clear left and right speakers.
deleted.

* When you touch <Clear>, a message asking you to confirm the

When you press the [ (Play/Stop)] button, you
deletion appears. To erase the recorded sound, touch <OK>. If
hear what the song sounds like as you change the
you don’t want to erase the recorded sound, touch <Cancel>.
settings. When you press the [ (Play/Stop)]
Once a performance has been erased, it can’t be restored.
button, playback of the song stops.
* You cannot touch <Clear> during playback of the song.

Chapter 7
3. Touch <Part> to make more detailed settings for the 5. Touch to make settings for other parts.
selected part. The Part name appears at the upper part of the screen.
A screen like the one shown below appears. Change the settings for other parts as needed.
fig.d-16trpart.eps_50
6. Hold down the [ (Rec)] button and press the [
(Reset)] button.

This operation set the changes in the settings.

The song can then be saved to an external memory or to
user memory.
If you do not want to delete a song after changing the
settings for the individual parts, save the song to an
external memory or to user memory (p. 102).

* You cannot save the settings that determine whether sounds

You can change the Tone for the selected Part by
for each individual part are played or not (solo and mute).
pressing a Tone button while this screen is displayed.
When selecting Part 10 or 11, you can touch <Drum Set>
to select the drum set or effect sound.
The Part name and tone name are displayed at the top of
the screen.

115
 KR107_e.book 116 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs

If the Following Message Appears ■ Recording a Performance

If you try to display another screen after you’ve changed the
❍ Step 1 Prepare for Recording
song’s settings for each Part, a message like the one below
may appear. Selecting the Song to Record
fig.m-songmod.eps
1. Hold down the [Song] button and press the [ (Rec)]
button.

The following screen is displayed if there is any

previously recorded performance or any song with
changed settings.
fig.m-songmod.eps

Touch <OK> to change the song’s settings.

Touch <Cancel> to discard the changes you’re made.

■ Getting the Most Suitable Part

Tones for the Musical Genre
(Tone Set) Touch <OK> to delete the song.
“Tone Set” is a function that automatically assigns the most
If you want to overwrite while recording, select a song.
suitable tones for the selected musical style.
When you’re creating a song, you can assign Tone sets, then Determining the Song’s Beat and Tempo
change the Tones to suit the ideas you have for your song. 2. Press the [Metronome] button to select the beat (p. 44).
1. Display the 16-track Sequencer screen (p. 114). → You can’t change a song’s beat once it’s been recorded. If you
want to compose a song whose beat changes partway through
2. Touch <Tone Set> in the lower part of the screen.
the song, take a look at “Changing the Beat in the Middle of a
A screen like the one shown below appears. Song (Beat Map)” (p. 128).
fig.d-16trtone.eps_50
3. Press the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons to set the basic
tempo of the song.

If you do not need the metronome sound, press the

Chapter 7

[Metronome] button once more.

→ When using song data that has already been recorded, the
recording is made using the source song’s basic tempo. To
change the basic tempo of a song, please refer to “Changing the
Tempo of Recorded Songs” (p. 128).

3. Touch the screen to select a musical genre.

4. Press the [Exit] button.
The 16-track Sequencer screen appears.
Tones for each part are assigned automatically.

* In some genres, some parts may have no tone assigned.

116
KR107_e.book 117 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs

❍ Step 2 Start Recording Changing the Recording

If necessary, choose a recording method.
For more on how to record, refer to the following paragraph.
Method (Rec Mode)
If you record for the first time, there’s no need to select the You can use any of the four methods below to record with
recording method. the KR.
Selecting the Part to Record Although you will normally be using “Replace Recording,”
where previously recorded material is erased when new
1. Display the 16-track Sequencer screen (p. 114).
sounds are recorded, you’ll find that you can record songs
2. Touch the number for the Part you want to record. easily by using this method in combination with other
recording methods.
The button for the touched part being set turns orange.
Replace Recording (p. 118)
Selecting the Sound to Play
This is the normal method for recording. New material is
3. Use the Tone buttons to choose a Tone to play.
recorded as previously recorded material is erased.
After selecting a Tone, press the [Exit] button to call up
the “16-Track Sequencer screen.” Mix Recording (p. 118)
You can only record drum sounds or effect sounds on New notes are recorded on top of notes previously recorded.
Part D (10) or Part S (11). You can select drum sets or This convenient feature makes it easy for you to record
effect sounds by selecting Part D (10) or Part S (11) and melodies over prerecorded accompaniment.
touching <Drum Set>.
Loop Recording (p. 118)
Recording the Performance Specified measures are recorded repeatedly, while new notes
4. Press the [ (Reset)] button. are combined with existing music. A convenient feature for
Recording will start at the beginning of the song. creating rhythm parts. Loop Recording allows you to record
If you want to record from a point other than the over and over within a selected segment, adding a different
beginning, use the [ (Bwd)] and [ (Fwd)] percussion sound with each pass.
buttons to select another measure to begin. Punch-in Recording (p. 119)
5. Press the [ (Rec)] button and watch the indicator is You can re-record only a specified passage as you listen to a
light up. recorded performance.

The KR is put in recording standby. → Immediately after the power is turned on, Replace Recording is
selected.

Chapter 7
6. Press the [ (Play/Stop)] button.

A two-bar count-in sounds, then recording starts. Changing the Recording Method

* You cannot use the performance pads when recording with the 1. Press the [Menu] button.
16-track sequencer. The Menu screen appears.
7. Press the [ (Play/Stop)] button. fig.d-menu1.eps_50

Recording stops.
When one part is recorded, continue by selecting and
recording another part. Continue layering parts to finish
recording the song.

→ You only need to follow the procedure described in “Step 1

Prepare for Recording” when you’re recording the first Part.
For the second Part and after, you can skip step 1 and proceed
from “Step 2 Start Recording.”

* Any performance that has been recorded is deleted when the

power to the KR is turned off. It is a good idea to save song
data to an external memory or user memory. For more
information, refer to “Saving Songs” (p. 102).

117
 KR107_e.book 118 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs

2. Touch <Rec Mode>. ■ Layering a Recording Over

A “Rec Mode screen” like the following appears. Previously Recorded Sounds
fig.d-recmode.eps_50
(Mix Recording)
You can record a performance layered over a previously
recorded performance. This method is called “Mix
Recording.”

1. In the “Rec Mode screen,” select <Mix>.

Press the [Exit] button to return to the Menu screen.
The KR is set to the mix recording mode.
Record the performance using the procedures described
in “Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons
3. Touch <Rec Mode> to select the recording (Redoing Recordings)” (p. 96), “Multitrack Recording
with 16 Parts (16-Track Sequencer)” (p. 114), or other
mode.
methods.
Display Recording Method * After you have finished with mix recording, return to the
Replace Replace Recording usual replace recording mode.

Mix Mix Recording

■ Repeated Recording at the
Loop Loop Recording
Same Location (Loop Recording)
Auto Punch- Punch-in recording of the interval
You can record a specified passage over and over, layering
In/Out between set markers.
sounds with each pass. This method is called “Loop
Punch-in recording starting from the Recording.” This is handy when recording a Rhythm Part.
point at which the pedal, the
Manual Performance Pad or the [ (Rec)] For example, use this method to make a Loop Recording of a
Punch-In/Out button is pressed. four-measure segment. First record the bass drum, the snare
For more about Punch In Recording, drum next, then the hi-hat and so on, layering a different
refer to p. 119.
instrument onto the same four measures. After you have
You can add tempo changes to a finished recording the four-measure rhythm pattern, you can
Tempo
recorded composition. See p. 128. then use the procedure in “Copying Measures (Copy)” (p.
123) to create as many copies of the four measures as you
Chapter 7

4. Press the [Exit] button. need to complete your Rhythm part.

Returns to the Menu screen. 1. Place A and B markers at the beginning and end of the
passage you want to record.
■ Recording While Erasing the Take a look at “Setting Markers for Repeated Practice
Previous Recording (Marker)” (p. 85).
(Replace Recording) If you haven’t recorded anything yet, then use “Blank
The recording process where previous material is erased as Recording” to create the necessary number of measures
new material is recorded is called “replace recording.” This before placing the markers.
setting is in effect when you turn on the power.

1. In the “Rec Mode screen” (p. 117), select <Replace>.

Press the [Exit] button to return to the Menu screen.
The KR is set to the replace recording mode.
Record the performance using the procedures described
in Chapter 4 (p. 90), “Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts
(16-Track Sequencer)” (p. 114).

118
KR107_e.book 119 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs

What is Blank Recording? Loop Recording Shortcut

Blank Recording is recording a number of silent You can also use the method described below to set Loop
measures with no content. Recording.

1. Set the basic tempo and beat of the song. 1. Place A and B markers at the beginning and end of
2. Hold down the [ (Rec)] button and press the the passage you want to record.

[ (Play/Stop)] button. Take a look at “Setting Markers for Repeated

Practice (Marker)” (p. 85).
The indicators for the [ (Rec)] and [ (Play/
If you haven’t recorded anything yet, then perform
Stop)] buttons both light up, then after two
“Blank Recording” for the necessary number of
measures of the count sound, recording begins.
measures before placing the markers.
3. Without performing anything, record only the
2. Touch the <Repeat> icon in the Marker screen
required number of measures, then press the
(p. 86).
[ (Play/Stop)] button.
This sets the loop recording mode.
The indicators for the [ (Rec)] and [ (Play/
Start a recording.
Stop)] buttons both go out, and recording stops.
* After you have finished with loop recording, touch the
<Repeat> icon in the “Marker screen” once more to
return to the usual replace recording mode.
2. In the Rec Mode screen (p. 117), select <Loop>.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the menu screen.
The recording method changes to loop recording. ■ Re-Recording Part of Your
Performance (Punch-in Recording)
3. Press the [ (Rec)] button.
You can re-record part of a passage as you listen to a
4. Press the Track button for the track to be recorded. recorded performance. This recording method is called
The KR is put in recording standby. “Punch-in Recording.” This convenient function lets you
record over a specified points in a part as you listen to a
5. Press the [ (Play/Stop)] button to begin
prerecorded performance in another section.
recording. User Punch-In Recording by the following two methods:

Chapter 7
Recording starts from Marker A. Recording the Region Defined by Markers A and B
When the song reaches Marker B, it then returns to (Auto Punch-In/Out)
Marker A, where recording continues. Before you start recording, place markers A and B to
Each time the recording is looped, the newest sounds are define the passage you want to re-record. Make the
layered over previously recorded sounds. setting for punch-in recording, and re-record just the
passage between markers A and B.
6. When you press the [ (Play/Stop)] button,
Recording From the Point at Which the Pedal or
recording stops.
Buttons Are Pressed (Manual Punch-In/Out)
* After you have finished with loop recording, return to the You can play back a performance and depress the pedal
usual replace recording mode (p. 117). at the desired place to start re-recording. Depressing the
pedal a second time cancels recording and returns you to
playback.
Instead of pressing the pedal, you can press a
performance pad or the[ (Rec)] button to start and
cancel recording.

119
 KR107_e.book 120 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs

❍ Recording a Passage Specified by Markers 2. Begin recording.

1. Before you start re-recording, place markers A and B to Begin recording using the procedures described in
define the passage. “Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons (Redoing
Recordings)” (p. 96) or “Multitrack Recording with 16
Following the procedures described in “Setting Markers
Parts (16-Track Sequencer)” (p. 114).
for Repeated Practice (Marker)” (p. 85), use Markers A
and B to specify the passage. The previously recorded performance will be played
back.
2. In the Rec Mode screen (p. 117), select <Auto Punch In/
Press the pedal to which Punch In/Out is assigned (p.
Out>.
144), a performance pad, or the [ (Rec)] button to
fig.d-rec-punch.eps_50
begin recording, then start your performance.
Recording stops when you press the pedal, the
Performance Pad, or the [ (Rec)] button again, and
the previously recorded performance is played back.

3. When you press the [ (Play/Stop)] button, the

performance stops.

* When you’re finished with Punch-In Recording, return to the

ordinary Replace Recording mode. Take a look at “Changing
This changes the recording mode to “Punch-In the Recording Method” (p. 117).
Recording.”
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Menu screen.
3. Begin recording.
Begin recording using the procedures described in
“Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons (Redoing
Recordings)” (p. 96) or “Multitrack Recording with 16
Parts (16-Track Sequencer)” (p. 114).
Up until the specified passage, the previously recorded
performance plays back.
When you reach the specified passage, sounds are erased
Chapter 7

as recording starts; begin playing now.

When you reach the end of the specified passage,
recording stops, and the KR returns to playback of the
previously recorded performance.

4. When you press the [ (Play/Stop)] button, the

song stops.

❍ Starting Recording from the Measure

Specified by Buttons and Pedals
If using the Performance Pads or pedals, you must first
change the function of the pedals and Pads. Follow the
procedures in “Assigning Functions to Pedals and
Performance Pads (Pedal Setting/User Functions)” (p. 144),
and assign <Auto Punch In/Out> to the buttons or pedal.

1. In the Rec Mode screen (p. 117), select <Manual Punch

In/Out>.

This changes the recording mode to “Punch-In

Recording.”
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Menu screen.

120
KR107_e.book 121 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs

Composing an You are returned to the Chord Sequencer screen.

Accompaniment By Entering 5. Enter the chord progression and the accompaniment

pattern.
Chords (Chord Sequencer)
Refer to “Inputting Chords with the Chord Sequencer.”
You can enter a chord progression and choose the places
6. When you have finished inputting all the data, touch
where the accompaniment pattern will change to create an
<Execute>.
accompaniment for a song. This feature is called “Chord
When storage of the data is complete, return to the Menu
Sequencer.”
screen.
Thanks to the chord sequencer, you can create an
Now, press the [ (Play/Stop)] button, and try
accompaniment ahead of time and play along with your
playing the melody along with the accompaniment you
right hand.
created.
1. Press the [Menu] button and watch the indicator light
* Songs you’ve created are discarded as soon as you turn off the
up.
power. If you do not want to delete the song, save it to an
The Menu screen appears. external memory or to user memory. Refer to “Saving Songs”
2. Touch <Chord Sequencer>. (p. 102).

The screen like the one shown below is called “Chord Inputting Chords with the Chord Sequencer
Sequencer screen.”
Change the accompaniment arrangements Move the cursor
fig.d-chordseq.eps_50

This is the “cursor.” The cursor This is the end of the song. When
shows where the chord change continuing to add input, insert
or other information is input. measures by touching <Ins>.

Select the accompaniment pattern (Division)

1. Use the dial to move the cursor to the input position.

Use the [ (Bwd)] and [ (Fwd)] buttons to move
the cursor one measure at a time.

Chapter 7
This indicates the position where the
accompaniment pattern (Division) or
2. Enter the chord progression and the changes in the
the Style Orchestrator changes. accompaniment pattern and arrangement.

Just as when performing with Automatic

Display Explanation
Accompaniment, press the keys to specify a chord, and
One measure is inserted before the measure
Ins press a button to select the accompaniment pattern (p.
where the cursor is positioned.
58). You can change the Style Orchestrator with the
The measure in which the cursor is Performance Pads (p. 59).
Del
positioned is deleted.
3. Touch <Ins> once to insert one measure before the
Allows input of chords without playing the
Chords keyboard. Refer to “Inputting Chords measure where the cursor is currently positioned.
without Playing the Keyboard” (p. 122).
If you touch <Del>, the measure where the cursor is
All Clear Deletes all of the data that’s been input. currently positioned is deleted, while the measures that
Clear Deletes the data at the cursor position. follow are moved forward.

Records the input chord progression. Touch To remove what you have input, move the cursor to the
Execute this icon when you have finished inputting position with input you want to delete, then touch
all of the chords. <Clear>. This deletes the entered setting.
3. Press a Music Style button or the touch screen to select → You can only insert an intro at the beginning of a song. When
a Music Style (p. 51). you add an intro, the number of bars corresponding to the
length of the intro is inserted automatically.
4. Press the [Exit] button.

121
 KR107_e.book 122 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs

Functions That Can Be Assigned to the Pedals Editing Songs

and the Performance Pads
There are many ways you can edit performances recorded
→ For instructions on assigning functions, refer to “Assigning
using the KR Track button or 16-track sequencer.
Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads (Pedal Setting/
User Functions)” (p. 144).
■ Basic Operation of the Editing
• Inputting a short Intro and Ending
Assign “Intro 2/Ending 2" to a pedal or pad.
Functions
* While songs are being loaded, the measure number in the
• Inputting a “Variation” or “Original” without a Fill-In
upper right of the screen is highlighted (text and background
Assign “Original/Variation” to a pedal or pad.
are inverted). Start editing the song only after the measure
• Using the keyboard to input slash chords (such as Fm/C)
number is no longer highlighted.
Assign “Leading Bass” to a pedal or pad.
Selecting the Editing Function
• Inputting a break somewhere within the song
Assign “Break” to a pedal or pad. 1. Press the [Menu] button and watch the indicator light up.
• Insert half fill-ins (fill-ins lasting half a measure) The Menu screen appears.
Assign “Half Fill In” to a pedal or pad. 2. Touch <Song Edit>.
Check the Accompaniment You Inserted A “Song Edit screen” like the following appears.
fig.d-edit1.eps_50
Here’s how to play back as much of the accompaniment as
you have input.

1. Press the [ (Reset)] button to return to the

beginning of the song.

2. When you press the [ (Play/Stop)] button, the

performance is played back.

3. Playback stops when you press the [ (Play/Stop)]

button once more.
3. Touch an editing function to select that function.
■ Inputting Chords without For more detailed information, refer to the
Playing the Keyboard corresponding page for each function.
Chapter 7

You can use <Chords> at the bottom left of the Chord

Function Explanation Page
Sequencer screen to specify chords on the screen.
Undoes editing operations that
1. At the Chord Sequencer screen, touch <Chords>. Undo p. 123
have been performed.
A screen like the one shown below appears. Copy Copies measures p. 123,
fig.d-chordinput.eps_50
Evens out sounds in recorded
Quantize p. 124
performances.
Delete Deletes measures. p. 124
Insert Inserts a blank measure. p. 125
Transpose Transposes parts individually. p. 125
Erases data in measures, creating
Erase p. 126
blank measures.
Part
Exchanges the sounds in parts. p. 126
Exchange
Allows corrections to be made
Note Edit p. 127
2. Touch in each to specify the chords. note by note.
Allows editing of the Tones
3. Touch <Execute> to enter the chord. PC Edit
changes that occur during a song.
p. 127

You are returned to the Chord Sequencer screen.

122
KR107_e.book 123 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs

→ ”PC” stands for “Program Change,” which is a command that ■ Copying Measures (Copy)
tells an instrument to change the sound it’s using. With songs
You can copy a portion of a performance to a different bar in
that rely on the use of a variety of sounds, a “PC” needs to be
the same Part or to a measure in another Part. This is handy
located at every point within the song where the Tone is to be
when you’re composing a song that repeats a similar phrase.
changed fig.e-copy.e

* Some edits can’t be undone, not even by choosing “Undo.” We Ex. To copy measures 5–7 to measure 8.
recommend saving songs to external memories or to user memory
before editing. For more on how to save songs, refer to “Saving 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Songs” (p. 102).

Editing 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4. Touch the item to be edited.
At Step 3 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 122), select
5. Set the value with the dial. <Copy>.
To cancel the operation once it is underway, press the A screen like the one shown below appears.
[Exit] button. fig.d-e-copy.eps_50

6. When you’re done making all the settings, touch

<Execute>.
When you are finished editing the setting, return to the
“Song Edit screen.”
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Menu screen.

→ You can play back edited songs by pressing the [ (Play/

Stop)] button in the “Song Edit screen.”

■ Undoing Edits (Undo) Item Content

You can cancel an editing operation that you’ve just carried
Measure number of the first measure of the
out. This is handy when you want to undo an edit and From
segment to be copied
restore data to the way it was before.
For Number of measures to be copied
* There are some edits that can’t be restored.
Copy-source Track button or part number
At Step 3 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 122), select
Choosing “All” copies all Parts. “- - -” appears

Chapter 7
<Undo>. in the <Dst> column.
Src
Editing functions that can be undone appear on screen. If you choose a Track, you can only copy to the
fig.d-e-undo.eps_50
selected Track. You cannot copy to the other
Track. “- - -” appears in the <Dst> column.
Dst Copy-destination part number
Data can be copied in the following three ways:
Replace
If there is a performance recorded at the copy
destination, this previous recording is erased,
and the copied data is written in its place.
Mix
If there is a performance recorded at the copy
destination, the copied data is layered over the
If you touch <Cancel>, the undo is cancelled, and you’re Mode previous recording. If the Tones used for the
returned to the Song Edit screen. copy source and copy destination are different,
the copy-destination Tone is used.
If you touch <OK>, the confirmation message appears on
screen. Touch <OK> to undone the most recent edit. Insert
If there is a performance recorded at the copy
destination, the copied portion is inserted
without erasing the previous recording. The
song is lengthened by the number of inserted
measures.

123
 KR107_e.book 124 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs

Item Content Item Content

Copy-destination measure number Quantization timing
To When “End” is selected, the data is copied to Select one of the following values
the end of the song. 1/2 (half note), 1/4 (quarter note),
Resolution 1/6 (quarter-note triplet), 1/8 (eighth note),
Times Number of times the data is to be copied
1/12 (eighth-note triplet), 1/16 (sixteenth
note), 1/24 (sixteenth-note triplet),
■ Correcting Timing 1/32 (thirty-second note)
Discrepancies (Quantize) When finished with the Quantize settings, return to the Song
You can correct for timing discrepancies in a recorded Edit screen.
performance by automatically aligning the music with the
timing you specify. This is called “Quantizing.” ■ Deleting Measures (Delete)
As an example, let’s say that the timing of some quarter- You can delete a part of a performance measure by measure.
notes in a performance is a little off. In this case, you can When a portion of a performance is deleted, the rest of the
quantize the performance with quarter-note timing, thus performance is shifted up to fill the gap. Erasing measures in
making the timing accurate. a specified passage is called “deleting.”
fig.e-quantize.e fig.e_delete.e

Example: Quarter-note resolution Ex. To delete measures (bars) 5–8

Actual note data

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Note data after quantization

Example: Sixteenth-note resolution 1 2 3 4 5 6

Actual note data At Step 3 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 122), select
1 2 3 4
<Delete>.
Note data after quantization
A screen like the one shown below appears.
At Step 3 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 122), select fig.d-e-del.eps_50

<Quantize>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-e-quant.eps_50
Chapter 7

Item Content
Measure number of the first measure of the
From
segment to be deleted
Item Content For Number of measures to be deleted
Measure number of the first measure of the Track button or part number to be deleted
From
segment to be quantized Tr/Pt When “All” is selected, the same portion of all
For Number of measures to be quantized parts is deleted.
Track button or part number to be
quantized
Tr/Pt
Choosing “All” quantizes the same passage
in all Parts.

124
KR107_e.book 125 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs

■ Inserting Blank Measures ■ Transposing Individual Parts

(Insert) (Transpose)
You can add a blank measure at a location you specify. This You can transpose specified parts and tracks individually.
addition of a blank measure is called “insertion.”
fig.e_insert.e At Step 3 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 122), select
Ex. To insert measures (bars) 5-7 <Transpose>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-e-trans.eps_50

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

At Step 3 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 122), select

<Insert>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-e-ins.eps_50

Item Content
Measure number of the first measure of the
From
segment to be transposed
For Number of measures to be transposed
Track button or part number to be transposed
Tr/Pt When “All” is selected, the same portion of all
parts is transposed.
The range of transposition
Item Content
Bias You can select the range to transpose the data,
Measure number of the first measure of the from -24 (two octaves down) to +24 (two
From
segment to be inserted octaves up), adjustable in semitones.
For Number of measures to be inserted * You cannot transpose performances of the drum sets and
sound effect sets (such as the Rhythm Track).

Chapter 7
Track button or part number where data will be
inserted
Tr/Pt
When “All” is selected, blank measures are
inserted at the same place in all parts.

125
 KR107_e.book 126 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs

■ Making Measures Blank Item Content

(Erase) Expression
You can delete the performance data in a specified block of Erases Expression (volume change) information.
Event
measures, turning them into blank measures without Lyric
reducing the length of the song. This process is called Erases only lyrics.
“erasing.”
fig.e_erase.e

Ex. To erase measures (bars) 5-8 ■ Exchanging Parts

(Part Exchange)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
You can exchange the notes recorded for a particular part
with the notes recorded for another part. This process of
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 exchanging parts is called “part exchange.”

At Step 3 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 122), select

Blank measures <Part Exchange>.
Follow the steps in “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 122) A screen like the one shown below appears.
to choose <Erase>. fig.d-e-partex.eps_50

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-e-erase.eps_50

Touch each to choose Parts you want to

exchange.
Item Content
Measure number of the first measure of the
From
segment to be erased
Chapter 7

For Number of measures to be erased

Track button or part number to be erased
Tr/Pt When “All” is selected, the same portion of all
parts is erased.
Select from the following types of performance
data to erase:
All
All performance data, including notes, tempos,
tones switches, volume changes, etc., are erased.
Tempo
Tempo data is erased. Erasing the tempo data for
Event all measures results in a single, constant tempo.
Prog.Change
Erases the data for switching Tones (p. 123).
Note
Erases only notes.
Except Notes
Erases all of the performance data except for the
notes.

126
KR107_e.book 127 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs

■ Correcting Notes One by One ■ Modifying the Tone Changes in

(Note Edit) a Song (PC Edit)
You can make corrections in a recorded performance one In some songs, the instrument sound changes during the
note at a time. This process of making changes in individual course of the song (that is, the Tone changes in the middle of
notes is called “note editing.” a Part). In such songs, an instruction to switch the Tone is
You can make these corrections by using note editing: inserted at the place where you want the sound to change.
• Deleting misplayed notes This instruction is called a “Program Change” (PC), and
• Changing the scale of a single note actions such as deleting program changes, or changing the
• Changing the force used in playing a single key (velocity) selected Tone by them are called “PC editing.”
• Change the finger number * It is not possible to insert a program change into a measure or
beat that does not contain a program change.
At Step 3 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 122), select
<Note Edit>. At Step 3 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 122), select
A screen like the one shown below appears. <PC Edit>.
fig.e-note.e
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-e-pc.eps_50

Location Pitch Velocity Finger

Number
Location Tone name
The note-location display uses “Measure: Beat: Tick: Finger
Number” as the format. A tick is a unit of time that’s shorter The PC-location display uses “Measure: Beat: Tick” as the
than a beat. format. A tick is a unit of time that’s shorter than a beat.

Touch to select the part with the note to be Touch to select the part with the program

Chapter 7
corrected. The Part number appears at the top of the screen. change to be edited.
The Part number appears at the top of the screen.
Use the [ (Bwd)] button and the [ (Fwd)] button or
use < >< > on the screen to find the note to be corrected. Use the [ (Bwd)] button and the [ (Fwd)] button or
use < > < > on the screen to find the program change to
When you’ve found the note you want to correct, touch
be edited.
“Pitch” or “Velocity” for the note.
When you’ve found the Program Change you want to
Use the dial to correct the pitch or velocity. If you want to
modify, touch “Tone Name” on the screen.
delete the note, touch <Delete>.
Press a Tone button to select a Tone group, then select a Tone
When you’re done making all the settings, press the [Exit] with the dial. When selecting Part 10 or 11, select the drum
button. set or effect sound.
If you want to delete the Program Change, touch <Delete>.
When you’re done making all the settings, press the [Exit]
button.

127
 KR107_e.book 128 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs

Changing the Beat in the Middle Changing the Tempo of

of a Song (Beat Map) Recorded Songs
You can create songs that have beat changes during the
You can change the basic tempo of a composition. The basic
course of the song.
tempo was initially set when the song was recorded.
* You can’t change a song’s beat once it’s been recorded. Before
recording the performance, determine the beat to be used.
1. Press the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons to choose a tempo.

1. Press the [Menu] button. 2. Hold down the [ (Rec)] button and press the

The Menu screen appears. [ (Reset)] button.

2. Touch <Beat Map>. The song’s basic tempo changes.

A screen like the one shown below appears. The change in basic tempo is discarded when you turn
fig.d-beatmap.eps_50 off the power or choose a different song. Save important
song data to external memory or to user memory (p.
102).

* If the song you’re working on has tempo changes, press the

[ (Reset)] button to go back to the beginning of the song
before you carry out this operation.

Changing the Tempo Within

3. Use < >< > in the screen or the [ (Bwd)] the Song
and [ (Fwd)] buttons to move to the measure
You can add tempo changes to a recorded composition.
whose beat you want to change.
The KR stores song tempo information and performance data
The measure number appears in the top-right area of the
separately. Therefore, when making changes to the tempo in
screen.
a song, you must record the changes in the tempo
Touch < > to move to the beginning of the song.
information independently of the performance data.
Touch < > to move to the end of the song.
This recording of the tempo is called “Tempo Recording.”

4. Touch ■ Adjusting the Tempo While

Chapter 7

in each to set the beat.

5. Touch <Execute>. Listening to a Song

The beat change starts with the measure you selected. You can add ritardando and other such gradual tempo
Repeat Steps 3–5 to make beat settings in other measures changes.
as needed.
Setting the Rec Mode to “Tempo”
Recording the Performance
1. Press the [Menu] button.
6. Press the [Exit] button twice.
The screen displayed before you pressed the [Menu] The Menu screen appears.
button appears. 2. Touch <Rec Mode>.
7. Press the [ (Reset)] button to return the measure A screen like the one shown below appears.
number to “1.”

8. Start a recording.
Record the performance using the procedures described
in “Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance”
(p. 90). Specify the measure, then change the beat.

128
KR107_e.book 129 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs

fig.d-rec-tempo.eps_50
■ Adjusting the Tempo at a
Particular Measure
You can create a tempo change at the beginning of a selected
measure. This is handy when you want to make a sudden
change in tempo.

First, carry out Steps 1–3 of “Changing the Tempo Within the
Song” (p. 128) to make the “Tempo Recording” settings.

1. Use the [ (Bwd)] and [ (Fwd)] buttons to move

to the measure where you want to change the tempo.
3. Touch the <Rec Mode> to select <Tempo>.
The measure number appears in the top-right area of the
This makes the setting for tempo recording. Basic screen.
Press the [Exit] button a number of times to switch to the 2. Press the [ (Rec)] button and watch the indicator is
screen where the measure number is indicated in the
flashing.
upper right of the screen.
The KR is put in recording standby.
When the KR goes into Tempo Recording, the tempo
indication is highlighted. 3. Use the TEMPO [-] [+] buttons or the dial to change the
tempo.
Recording the Tempo
4. Use the [ (Bwd)] and [ (Fwd)] buttons to 4. Press the [ (Play/Stop)] button.

move slightly before the measure where you want to The song’s tempo changes starts with the measure you
change the tempo. selected.

→ While tempo recording is being used to write tempo, the tempo

5. Press the [ (Rec)] button and watch the indicator is
display in the screen will be highlighted.
flashing.
5. When you press the [ (Play/Stop)] button, the
The KR is put in recording standby.
change in tempo stops.
6. When you press the [ (Play/Stop)] button,
* You cannot record performances while in Tempo Recording
recording begins.
mode. When you’re finished tempo recording, go back to the
7. When you get to the place where you want to change ordinary Replace Recording. Take a look at “Changing the

Chapter 7
the tempo, use the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons or the dial Recording Method (Rec Mode)” (p. 117).
to vary the tempo as desired. → If you want to restore the previous tempo, delete the tempo
data at the place where the tempo was recorded. For an
8. When you press the [ (Play/Stop)] button,
explanation of how to delete the information of tempo settings,
recording stops.
refer to “Making Measures Blank (Erase)” (p. 126).
The song’s tempo changes.

* You cannot record performances while in Tempo Recording

Tempo Recording Shortcut
mode. When you’re finished tempo recording, go back to the
Hold down the [ (Rec)] button and press one of the
ordinary Replace Recording. Take a look at “Changing the
Tempo [-] [+] buttons to switch to the Tempo Recording
Recording Method (Rec Mode)” (p. 117).
settings. Record tempo information. In this case, tempo
recording is canceled when recording ends.

129
 KR107_e.book 130 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles

Creating Original Styles ■ Creating New Styles by

(User Styles) Combining Internal Music
Styles (Style Composer)
Although the KR features a variety of internal Music Styles,
You can create a new style by selecting from among the
you can also create your own. These original Styles are called
Rhythm, Bass, Accompaniment 1, Accompaniment 2,
“User Styles.”
Accompaniment 3, Accompaniment 4, Accompaniment
You can use either of the two methods described below to 5,and Accompaniment 6 parts in different Styles. This
create a User Style. function is called the “Style Composer.”

Style Composer * You can only combine the KR’s built-in Styles.
With this method, you combine internal Music Styles to Displaying the Style Composer Screen
create new Styles. You can create a new Style by selecting
from among the Rhythm, Bass, Accompaniment 1, 1. Press the [Menu] button.
Accompaniment 2, Accompaniment 3, Accompaniment 4, The Menu screen appears.
Accompaniment 5, and Accompaniment 6 parts in different fig.d-menu1.eps_50

styles.

Style Converter (p. 132)

Create a new Style by extracting the portions you need from
songs composed with the 16-track sequencer.
When you’re composing a song, there’s no need to specify all
the chords. You can specify just some of the chords, and the
KR automatically chooses the other chords and arranges the
Style.
Style Converter features an “Auto mode” that allows you to
easily create Styles from songs with a single chord, and a 2. Touch <Style Composer>.
“Manual mode,” in which you create Styles from songs with * If a User Style has already been recorded, a message like the
three kinds of chords–major, minor, and seventh chords. one shown below appears.
fig.m-styledel.eps
Chapter 8

Touch <Cancel> to return to the Menu screen. Save User

Styles to external memories, or to user memory (p. 135).
When you touch <OK>, the previously recorded User Style is
deleted, and a new User Style is created.

130
KR107_e.book 131 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles

A “Style Composer screen” like the one shown below Selecting the Styles Assigned to Each Part
appears.
3. Touch the part to be set.
fig.d-stylecomp.eps_50

4. Press a Music Style button, then select a Style with the

touch screen or the and the dial.

When you have decided on a Style, press the [Exit]

button to display the Style Composer screen.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to determine the Styles for each
Part.

Deciding on a Style
6. Touch <Execute>.

Display Part You have created a new Style.

The User Style is recorded to the Music Style [User]
R Rhythm
button. Try playing with the new Style.
B Bass
* If you turn off the power or record a new User Style, any User
A1 Accompaniment 1 Style you’ve previously recorded is lost. If you do not want to
A2 Accompaniment 2 delete the Style, save it to an external memory or to user
memory. Take a look at “Saving a User Style” (p. 135).
A3 Accompaniment 3
❍ Muting Parts for a Particular Division
A4 Accompaniment 4
You can mute the sound of particular Parts in specific
A5 Accompaniment 5 Divisions.
A6 Accompaniment 6 For example, all parts are played when you use a “Variation”
accompaniment pattern, whereas if you select the “Original”
accompaniment pattern, every part other than
Icon Function “Accompaniment 1" is muted. With this arrangement, when
All Clear Deletes all of the settings. the accompaniment pattern changes from the original to the
variation, it creates a more elaborate effect in the
You can mute the sound of particular
accompaniment.
Parts in specific Divisions. For more
Mute
information, take a look at “Muting → For more on Divisions, refer to the “Style Arrangements” (p.
Parts for a Particular Division” (p. 131). 132).
Clear Deletes the Styles in selected parts.
1. Touch the Style Composer screen to choose the Part
The Part Settings screen is displayed,
Chapter 8

you want to mute out.

allowing you to make detailed settings
Part to each part. For more information, take 2. Press the Fill In [To Variation] or [To Original] button
a look at “Editing the Volume and Effect to switch to the division that you want to mute.
Settings for Each Part” (p. 132).
3. Touch <Mute> on the screen.
Records the created Style to the Music
Execute Style [User] button. Touch this when The Part you chose is only muted out in the Division you
you have finished creating the Style. selected.
If you want to hear the muted-out Part, touch <Mute>
again.

* To mute out a Division that changes after a few seconds (intro,

ending, or fill-in), touch <Mute> immediately after switching
to the Division.

131
 KR107_e.book 132 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles

❍ Editing the Volume and Effect Settings for ■ Creating a Style from a Song
Each Part You Composed Yourself
Displaying the Part settings screen (Style Converter)
1. At the Style Composer screen, touch <Part>. You can take a song you’ve composed yourself and extract
the portions you need to create your own original Style.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-scomp-part.eps_50
When you’re composing a song, there’s no need to specify all
the chords. You can specify some of the chords, and the KR
automatically chooses the other chords and arranges the
style. This function is called the “Style Converter.”
Style Converter features an “Auto mode” that allows you to
easily create Styles from songs with a single chord, and a
“Manual mode,” in which you create Styles from songs with
three kinds of chords–major, minor, and seventh chords.
When creating a song in order to create an music style, it’s
good practice to consider the arrangement of the music style.

Modifying the Settings of Each Part Style Arrangements

Music Styles created with the Style Converter function are
2. Touch the <Part> to select the part with
composed of eight parts: “Rhythm,”
the settings to be changed. “Bass,”“Accompaniment 1,“”Accompaniment 2,”
The part name and Tone name are indicated in the upper “Accompaniment 3,””Accompaniment 4,“”Accompaniment
part of the screen. 5,” “Accompaniment 6.”
A song progresses in predictable a sequence, such as intro,
3. Touch for each parameter to change the value.
melody A, melody B, bridge and ending.
You can also change the values by touching each
With the KR, such changes in songs are allocated to the
parameter name and then using the dial.
following six performance states. We call these six parts of a
song “Divisions.”
Display Explanation

Volume Adjusts the volume. Division Performance division

Adjusts the amount of reverb effect applied Intro The intro is played at the start of a song.
Reverb
to the sound.
Ending This is played at the end of a song.
Adjusts the amount of chorus effect applied
Chorus
to the sound. Original This is a basic accompaniment pattern.

Changes the left-right direction from which This is a developmental accompaniment

Chapter 8

Variation
the sound appears to come. pattern. It is a variation on an Original.

This is a one-measure phrase inserted at a

Panpot When you touch , the sound moves to Fill-In To
juncture where the mood changes. It is used
Variation
to make a song more lively.
the right; touch to move the sound to
the left. This is a one-measure phrase inserted at a
Fill-In To
juncture where the mood changes. It is used
Original
You can change the Tone for the selected Part by to make a song more sedate.
pressing a Tone button to change the Tone while this
screen is displayed. When selecting Rhythm Part, you You can make a song more lively or more restrained by
can touch <Drum Set> to select the drum set or effect increasing or reducing played parts by Divisions. You can
sound. also modify a song by changing the Tone of the parts in the
Finishing the Settings Divisions.

4. Press the [Exit] button.

The Style Composer screen appears.

132
KR107_e.book 133 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles

❍ Creating Styles in Auto Mode A “Style Converter screen” like the one shown appears.
fig.d-styleconv.eps_50
Points to note when creating songs
• Use one of the major, minor, or diminished seventh
chords to create the song. We recommend using
diminished seventh chords to compose the song.
• It is convenient to record the sounds shown below for
the Parts of the 16-track sequencer.

Rhythm Bass Accomp Accomp Accomp

1 2 3

D (10) 2 7 8 9

→ When using parts other than Part 2, 7, 8, 9, and D, refer to Parameter Settings Content
“Changing an Extracted Part” (p. 134). Name

Creating songs Conv.Mode Switches the mode (Auto/Manual)

Chord root for the segment to be

1. Use the 16-track sequencer to record the song. Chord Root
extracted
Record the song after referring to “Multitrack Recording
Chord type for the segment to be
with 16 Parts (16-Track Sequencer)” (p. 114) and other Chord Type
extracted (major/minor/seventh)
related sections.
Division Division
When using music data, first select a song (p. 65).
Measure number of the first measure of
Displaying the Style Converter screen From
the segment to be extracted
2. Press the [Menu] button. For Number of measures extracted
The Menu screen appears.
3. Touch <Style Converter>. Making the Settings
* If no song for use in creating a new Style is selected, the 4. Touch <Conv.Mode>, then use the dial to switch the
message “Please select a song” appears. Use the [Song] button mode to “Auto.”
to select a song (p. 65), then start the procedure again.
This makes the setting for the Auto mode.
* If a User Style has already been recorded, a message like the 5. Touch <Chord Root> and <Chord Type>, then use the
one shown below appears.
fig.m-styledel.eps
dial to input the chord root and type for the segment to
be extracted.

6. Touch <Division>, then use the dial to select the

Chapter 8

Division.

Display Performance division

Touch <Cancel> to return to the Menu screen. Please save the Intro Intro
User Style on an external memory or in the internal memory Original Original accompaniment pattern
(p. 135).
Fill To
When you touch <OK>, the previously recorded User Style is From the fill-in to the variation
Vari
deleted, and a new User Style is created.
Variation Variation accompaniment pattern

Fill To Ori From the fill-in to the original

Ending Ending

* Only one measure can be extracted when “Fill To Vari” or

“Fill To Ori” is selected for the Division. The number of

133
 KR107_e.book 134 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles

measures may also be limited in other Divisions. Creating Songs

7. Touch <From> and <For>, then use the dial to select the 1. Use the 16-track sequencer to record the song.
measures to be extracted. Record the song after referring to “Multitrack Recording
Touching <Play> at the bottom of the screen, you can with 16 Parts (16-Track Sequencer)” (p. 114) and other
listen to performance of the portion which you chose. related sections.
When using music data, first select a song (p. 65).
8. Repeat Steps 5–7 to create Styles for all of the
Divisions. Displaying the Style Converter screen

* If no setting is made for a Division, it uses a simple drum pattern. 2. Press the [Menu] button.

Deciding on a Style 3. Touch <Style Converter>.

9. When you’re done making all the Division settings, The “Style Converter screen” appears.

touch <Execute>. 4. Touch <Conv.Mode>, then use the dial to switch the
The User Style is recorded to the [User] button. mode to “Manual.”

* If you turn off the power or record a new User Style, any User This makes the setting for the Manual mode.
Style you’ve previously recorded is lost. If you do not want to After that, the steps are the same as for “Creating Styles
delete the Style, save it to an external memory or to user in Auto Mode” (p. 133).
memory. Take a look at “Saving a User Style” (p. 135). When you touch <Play> in the lower part of the screen,
* The following data is saved to the User Style. If a song you can listen to the performance of the part selected
includes data other than this, the results you get might not be with <Options>.
what was intended.
• Keyboard performance data ❍ Changing an Extracted Part
• Amount of Reverb effect applied You can extract and change part of a song created with 16-
• Amount of Chorus effect applied track sequencer.

❍ Creating a Style in Manual Mode 1. At the Style Converter screen (p. 133), touch <Part>.
When you create a Music Style in the Manual mode, you can A screen like the one shown below appears.
clearly point up the differences in accompaniment for each fig.d-styleconv.eps_50

individual chord.
Points to Note when Creating Songs
• Record your performance with the three chord types of
diminished seventh, major, and minor.
• It is convenient to record the sounds shown below for
the Parts of the 16-track sequencer.
Chapter 8

Accomp Accomp Accomp

Chords Rhythm Bass
1 2 3

Major D (10) 3 4 5 6 2. Touch the performance Part with settings you want to
Seventh - 2 7 8 9 change.

Minor - 12 13 14 15 3. Use the dial to specify which 16-track Sequencer

→ The chords all share the same Rhythm Part. performance part you want to extract.

→ If you want to use the performance of other part, check out → In the Manual mode, the type of chords appear at the bottom of
“Changing an Extracted Part” (p. 134) the screen. Set the Parts for all chords.
4. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Style Converter
screen.

The Style Converter screen appears.

134
KR107_e.book 135 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles

Saving a User Style fig.d-stylesave.eps_50

You can save the User Styles you create to external memories
and the user memory. When saved to the user memory, User
Styles are not deleted when the power is turned off. You can
also select Styles saved to the user memory by pressing the
Music Style [User] button.
You can save up to 99 User Styles in user memory.
What is the User Memory?
The user memory is the area within the instrument
where User Styles created with the KR, sets of User Determining the Name of the Style to be
Programs, and other such data are stored. Saved
You can also copy User Styles and sets of User Programs 5. Touch <Rename>.
saved on external memories. A “Rename screen” like the following appears.
Data saved to the user memory is not deleted, even fig.d-stylename.eps_50

when the KR’s power is turned off.

→ When you want to clear all of the content saved to the user
memory and restore the settings to the factory settings, refer to
“Formatting the User Memory” (p. 152).

Preparations for Saving Data

When saving to an external memory, first connect an external
memory to the external memory port.

1. Press the Music Style [User] button.

A “User Style screen” like the following appears. When you touch , the cursor moves.
fig.d-usrdisk.eps_50
When you touch the icon for the character to be input,
the character appears at the cursor position.
For example, touching the <ABC> icon in succession
cycles you through the available choices in that character
group (A→B→C→A...).
Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters
through “English (upper case),” “English (lower case),”
“numerals,” “symbols,” then back to “English (upper
case).”
Chapter 8

When you touch <Del>, the character at the cursor

2. Touch <User>. position is deleted.
When you touch <Ins>, a space is inserted at the cursor
3. Touch <File>.
position.
4. Touch <Save>.
6. When you have finished with the name, press the [Exit]
A “Save Style screen” like the following appears. button.

Determining the Save Destination

7. Touch <Media> to select the save-

destination strage media.

135
 KR107_e.book 136 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles

■ Deleting Saved User Styles

8. Touch to select the save-destination
This deletes User Styles that have been saved to external
number.
memories or in user memory.
If a Style name is displayed, a style is already saved to When deleting a User Style on an external memory, first
that number. connect the external memory to the external memory port.
If you select a number with a previously saved User
Style and then save to that number, the previously saved 1. Press the Music Style [User] button.
User Style is deleted. If you do not want to delete the A “User Style screen” appears.
User Style being saved, select a number in the save- If the User Style screen is not displayed, touch <User> in
destination column that does not yet have a name. the lower part of the screen.
9. Touch <Execute>. 2. Touch <File>.
The saving process starts. 3. Touch <Delete>.
* Never turn off the power or eject the external A “Delete Style screen” like the following appears.
fig.d-styledel.eps_50
memory from the external memory port while the
operation is in progress. Doing so will damage the
KR’s internal memory, making it unusable.

4. Touch <Media> to select the strage

media.

5. Touch or to select the Style to be deleted.

6. Touch <Execute>.
The selected Style is deleted.

* Never turn off the power or eject the external

memory from the external memory port while the
operation is in progress. Doing so will damage the
Chapter 8

KR’s internal memory, making it unusable.

136
KR107_e.book 137 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles

Copying Styles on External Specifying the Copy Destination

Memories to the User 7. Touch <User> to select the copy destination

Memory for the Style.

You can take User Styles saved on external memories and If a Style name is displayed, a style is already saved to
copy them to user memory. that number.

You can also take User Styles saved in user memory and If you select a number with a previously saved Style and
copy them to external memories. then copy to that number, the previously saved Style is
deleted. If you do not want to lose the Style being saved,
1. Connect the external memory with the Style to be select a number in the save-destination column that does
copied to the external memory port. not yet have a name.

2. Press the [User] button. 8. Touch <Execute>.

A “User Style screen” like the following appears. The Style on the external memory is copied to user
fig.d-usrdisk.eps_50 memory.

* Never turn off the power or eject the external

memory from the external memory port while the
operation is in progress. Doing so will damage the
KR’s internal memory, making it unusable.

■ Copying Styles Saved in the

User Memory to External
Memories
You can take Styles saved in user memory and copy them to
If the User Style screen is not displayed, touch <User> in
external memories.
the lower part of the screen.
In this case, touch the large arrow icon in the center of the
3. Touch <File>. “Copy Style screen” in Step 4 above so that the arrow points
4. Touch <Copy>. upwards. Turn the KR will copy user memory Styles to the
external memory.
A “Copy Style screen” like the following appears.
fig.d-copystyle.eps_50 The rest of the procedure is identical to that used for copying
Styles from external memories to user memory.

Chapter 8

Specifying the Copy Source

5. Touch <Media> to select the copy source

media.

6. Touch <File> to select the Style you want to

copy.

When “All” is selected, all of the Styles on the external

memory are copied to user memory.

137
 KR107_e.book 138 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 9 Various Settings

Changing the Settings for ■ Adjusting the Keyboard Touch
One-Touch Arranger (Key Touch)
You can vary the touch of the keyboard when you play the

■ Procedure keys.

1. Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button to At Step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 138), touch <Key Touch>.
fig.d-p-key.eps_50
display the Basic screen.
fig.d-arrbasic.eps_50

Display Explanation
2. Press the [Option] button. Notes sound at an unchanging volume level,
A screen like the one shown below appears. Fixed regardless of how lightly or forcefully you
fig.d-funcmenu1.eps_50
play the keyboard.

This sets the keyboard to a light touch. You

can achieve fortissimo (ff) play with a less
Light forceful touch than usual, so the keyboard
feels lighter. This setting makes it easier for
children, whose hands have less strength.

This sets the keyboard to the standard touch.

You can play with the most natural touch.
Medium
This setting is closest to the response of an
acoustic piano.

This sets the keyboard to a heavy touch. You

Parameter have to play the keyboard more forcefully
Explanation than usual in order to play fortissimo (ff), so
Name Heavy
the keyboard touch feels heavier. This
Refer to “Adjusting the Keyboard Touch setting allows you to add more expression
Key Touch
(Key Touch)” (p. 138). when playing dynamically.
Selects the setting to be specified when the
One Touch
One Touch Program [Arranger] button is Touch any of the icons <Fixed>, <Light>, <Medium>, or
Setting
pressed (p. 139).
<Heavy>, to set the key touch for the keyboard.
Sets the key at which the keyboard is divided
Split Point To make fine adjustments, touch the slider in the screen.
(the split point) (p. 139).
Move the slider to the right to add resistance, and to the left
Chapter 9

Arranger Sets the way the Automatic Accompaniment

Config. plays sounds (p. 139). to make the key touch lighter.

You can also change the key touch by pressing the

You set the tuning and make a variety of other settings
[Piano Designer] button. For more details, refer to the
for the KR107 starting with the second page of the
Quick Start.
settings screen.
3. Touch the name of the parameter to be set.
Refer to the corresponding page for each function.
4. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Basic screen.

138
KR107_e.book 139 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 9 Various Settings

■ Changing Music Styles Without ■ Changing the Keyboard’s Split

Changing the Tone or Tempo Point (Split Point)
(One Touch Setting) This sets the point (the split point) where the keyboard is
Normally, when you select a Music Style, the Tone and divided when specifying chords in the left hand while using
tempo settings suitable for that Music Style are selected the Automatic Accompaniment and when playing split
automatically. However, you can also set it so the tempo and performances (p. 27).
Tone settings don’t change when you change Music Styles. The setting is at “F#3” when the KR is powered up.
fig.splitpoint.e
At Step 3 “Procedure” (p. 138), touch <One Touch Setting>.
fig.d-1touchset.eps_50
F 3 (Split Point)

B1 B6

Split Point Settings Range

The key you chose for the split point belongs to the left-
hand section of the keyboard.
At Step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 138), touch <Split Point>.
Display Explanation fig.d-splitpoint.eps_50

Suitable The suitable tone for a Music Style is

Tone selected automatically.

Suitable The suitable tempo for a Music Style is

Tempo selected automatically.

Other Other settings (Style Orchestrator, etc.) are

Setting changed automatically.

Touch each icon to switch individual settings on and off.

All items are set to ON when you turn on the power.
Parameters switched to OFF (highlighted in orange) do not Touch either <C3>, <F#3>, <C4>, or <F#4> in the lower part
change, even when the Music Style is changed. of the screen.
The key you chose becomes the split point.

To set another key as the split point, touch in

the screen, then specify the key.
You can set the split point within a range of B1 to B6.

■ Changing How Chords Are

Played and Specified
Chapter9

(Arranger Config)
This changes the settings determining how Music Styles are
played, and how the keys are pressed to specify chords.
What are the Chord Tone and Bass Tone?
When the Automatic Accompaniment is stopped, and Sync
Start (p. 55) is turned off, chords are produced when you
play in the left-hand side of the keyboard. This is called the
“chord tone,” and the root of the chord that is played at the
same time is called the “bass tone.”

139
 KR107_e.book 140 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 9 Various Settings

At Step 3 “Procedure” (p. 138), touch <Arranger Config>. How to play chords in the Chord Intelligence mode:
fig.d-arrset.eps_50

• Intelligence 1

Major
Ex: C

Play the chord root.

Seventh
Ex: C 7
Play the root and
the second key below it.

Touch of each item to make settings.

Major Seventh
Parameter Ex: C maj 7
Value Explanation Play the root and
Name
the first key below it.
All Music Style parts
Accomp
are played.
Minor
Only Music Style Ex: C m
Accomp Play the root and
rhythm parts, chord the third key above it.
Chord&Bs
Tones, and bass
Tones are played.

OFF, Minor Seventh

Acoustic Bs., Ex: C m7
A. Bass+Cymbl, Play the root,
Fingered Bs., the third key above it, and
Selects the bass Tone. the second key below it.
Picked Bass.,
Bass Tone When set to “OFF,”
Fretless Bs.,
no tone is played.
Slap Bass1, Diminished
Organ Bass, Ex: C dim
Synth Bass 101, Play the root and
Thum Voice the sixth key above it.

OFF, E.Piano 1,
E. Piano 2, • Intelligence 2
Soft E. Piano, Selects the chord
Hard E. Piano, Tone. When set to
Chord Tone Major
Slow Strings, “OFF,” no tone is
Ex: C
Strings, played.
Choir, Play the root of the chord.
Doos Voice

This selects the way

chords are played Seventh
with the Chord Ex: C 7
Chapter 9

Chord Intelligence 1, Play the root of the chord

Intelligence function. and the white key to the
Recognition Intelligence 2,
When you set this to left of the root.
Mode Manual
“Manual,” play all of
the notes describing
the chord. Minor
Ex: C m
Play the root of the chord
What is Chord Intelligence?
and the black key to the
“Chord Intelligence” (p. 49) is the name of the function that left of the root.
recognizes the chords being specified for an accompaniment
when only one or two keys of the chords have been pressed, Minor Seventh
which can be used while automatic accompaniment is active. Ex: C m7
Play the root of the chord
and the black and white key
to the left of the root.

140
KR107_e.book 141 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 9 Various Settings

Placing a Marker in the Changing the Settings for the

Middle of a Measure Count
A marker is normally placed at the start of the selected
measure, but you can also set it so that a marker is placed at a
position partway through a measure. For detailed information about count, refer to “Match the
Tempo Before You Begin Playing (Count In)” (p. 83) and
“Having a Count Sound Play at the End of the Intro
For detailed information about Marker, refer to “Setting (Countdown)” (p. 57).
Markers for Repeated Practice (Marker)” (p. 85). 1. Press the [Count/Marker] button.
1. Press the [Count/Marker] button. The Count screen (p. 83) appears.
The Count screen appears.
2. Touch of each item to make settings.
2. Touch <Marker>.
The Marker screen appears. 3. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Metronome
screen.
3. Press the [Option] button.
fig.d-funcmenu2.eps_50
fig.d-funcmenu2.eps_50

Parameter Name Value

4. Touch <Resolution> to choose the marker
setting. Count In
(add a count before the
Indication Explanation performance),
Count Mode Countdown
This lets you place a marker at the Specify what type of count (add a count only before
Measure
beginning of the measure. will be added. you begin playing),
This lets you place a marker at the Count In/down
Beat
beginning of the beat. (add both a count-in and
a countdown)
5. Press the [Exit] button to go back to the Marker screen. Countdown Sound
Voice (Japanese),
Specify the countdown
Voice (English)
sound.
Chapter9

Countdown Track
Lower & Upper Tracks
Specify the track or part that
Lower Track
will determine the beginning
Upper Track
of the performance when
Part 1–16
added a countdown.

Stick, Click, Electronic,

Voice (Japanese), Voice
Count-In Sound (English), Wood Block,
Specify the count-in sound. Triangle Castanets,
Handclap
Animal

141
 KR107_e.book 142 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 9 Various Settings

Parameter Name Value Other Settings

Count In Measures You can change the tuning, the language shown on the
Specify the length (number of 1, 2 display, and other settings to make the KR easier to use.
measures) of the count-in.

Count In Repeat ■ Procedure

When “Repeat” is turned ON
on the Marker screen (p. 87)
1. Switch to the Basic screen, or press the One Touch
this specified whether the Program [Piano] button.
First time, Each time
count-in will sound each time
the range between the 2. Press the [Option] button.
markers is repeated, or only A “Functions screen” like the following appears.
the first time. fig.d-funcmenu2.eps_50

When you press the [Option] button on the Basic screen,

the first page displayed shows the parameters for the
Automatic Accompaniment settings (p. 138).

Parameter Explanation
Tuning Changing the tuning methods.
Pedal Assigns functions to the pedal and
Setting performance pad (p. 144).
Master Tune Sets the KR’s standard pitch (p. 146).
Selects the content to be shown on the
External Display
connected external display (p. 158).
Selects the language used in the
Language
display (p. 147).
User Image Selects the image data and display
Display used (p. 147).
Opening Sets the message that appears when
Message the power is turned on (p. 148).
MIDI Setting Refer to p. 161.
Program
Refer to p. 161.
Change
Stores edited settings and other data to
Memory Backup
Chapter 9

the KR (p. 148).

MIDI Ensemble Refer to p. 161.
Restores the content stored with
Factory Reset Memory Backup to the original factory
settings (p. 149).
V-LINK Refer to p. 159.
Changing the functions of the remote
Remote Control
control’s buttons (p. 149).
Sets the remote sensor’s on or off (p.
iR Function
150)
USB Driver Refer to p. 166.
Allows for calibration of the touch
Touch Screen
screen (p. 150).

142
KR107_e.book 143 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 9 Various Settings

Tuning
3. Touch the name of the parameter you want to set. system
Characteristics
Refer to the corresponding page for each function.
This temperament is a modification of
4. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Functions screen. meantone temperament and just
Kirnberger intonation, allowing more freedom of
■ Changing the Tuning (Tuning) modulation. Performances are possible
in all keys (III).
❍ Choosing the Tuning This temperament is based on the
You can play classical styles such as Baroque using historic theories of the Greek philosopher
temperaments (tuning methods). Pythagoras, and has pure fourths and
Pythagorean
fifths. Chords containing a third will
Most modern songs are composed for and played in equal sound impure, but melodies will sound
temperament, the most common tuning in use today. But at good.
one time, there were a wide variety of other tuning systems
This temperament is a partial
in existence. By playing in the temperament that was in use Meantone compromise of just intonation in order
when a composition was created, you can experience the to allow modulation.
sonorities of chords originally intended for that song.
This temperament is a combination of
meantone and Pythagorean
Werkmeister
temperaments. It allows you to play in
At Step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 142), touch <Tuning>.
all keys. (First method, number three.)
fig.d-p-temp.eps_50

Touch any one of the icons to choose the tuning system.

When playing in a temperament other than equal
temperament, you must specify the tonic (the note
corresponding to C for a major key, or to A for a minor key)
of the key in which you will play.

Touch <Key> to select the tonic.

If you have selected equal temperament, it is not necessary to
You can choose from among the eight tunings described select the tonic.
below. ❍ Setting the Tuning Curve (Stretch Tuning)
Tuning Pianos are generally tuned so that the low range is flatter and
Characteristics
system the high range is sharper than equal tempered pitches. This
method of tuning is unique to the piano, and is known as
This temperament divides the octave
into 12 equal parts. All intervals will be “stretched tuning.”
Equal slightly out of tune by the same amount. A graph that shows the changes in pitch of actual tuning
This setting is in effect when you turn on
compared with the changes in equal temperament pitch is
the power.
called a tuning curve. Changing the tuning curve produces
This temperament makes the 5th and subtle variations in the reverberations of the chords you play.
3rd intervals pure. It is unsuited to
Chapter9

Just (Maj) playing melodies and cannot be Touch the Stretch Tuning <ON> or <OFF> icon to select the
transposed, but is capable of beautiful
tuning curve.
sonorities.
When set to “ON,” the tuning curve features extended low
Just intonation differs between major
and high ranges (Stretch Tuning). It is suitable for piano
Just (min) and minor keys. The same results as
major can be obtained in a minor key. solos. This setting is selected when the power is turned on.
When set to “OFF,” the standard tuning curve is used. It is
This tuning is suitable for the music of
Arabic suitable when playing in an ensemble with other
Arabia.
instruments.

143
 KR107_e.book 144 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 9 Various Settings

■ Assigning Functions to Pedals

and Performance Pads (Pedal If you set the pedal as a dedicated switch for selecting
Setting/User Functions) User Programs, the function assigned to the pedal
You can assign a variety of functions to the left and center cannot be used. Refer to “Using the Pedal to Switch User
pedals, the expression pedals, and the performance pads. Programs” (p. 112).
You can call up the assigned functions just by pressing the ❍ Functions that Can be Assigned (Pedals,
corresponding pedal or pad. Performance Pads)
925

NOTE Function Explanation

Use only the specified expression pedal (EV-7/5; sold Toggles the Leading Bass function* on or
separately). By connecting any other expression pedals, you risk off. The function stays on as long as the
Leading pedal to which this is assigned is pressed.
causing malfunction and/or damage to the unit.
Bass When assigned to a Performance Pad, this
❍ Assigning Functions to Pedals is alternately switched on and off each time
the pad is pressed.
At Step 3 “Procedure” (p. 142), touch <Pedal Setting>.
fig.d-pedalset.eps_50
Only the Rhythm part is played. After No
Chord is switched on, specifying a chord
No Chord by playing the actual keys cancels the
function, and all of the accompaniment
parts are played.
During the performance of Automatic
Break Accompaniment, the accompaniment
stops for one measure only.
Fill In to Performs the same function as the Fill In
Variation [To Variation] button (p. 58).
Fill In to Performs the same function as the Fill In
Original [To Original] button (p. 58).

Touch to assign functions to each of the pedals. A fill-in is inserted, but the accompaniment
Fill In
pattern after that doesn’t change.
This plays a fill-in half a measure long,
Half Fill In to
Pressing the One Touch Program [Piano] button restores then switches to the Variation
Variation
accompaniment pattern.
the piano performance functions to the pedals (p. 19).
This plays a fill-in half a measure long,
❍ Assigning Functions to Performance Pads Half Fill In to
then switches to the Original
Original
accompaniment pattern.
1. Press the [User Function] button and watch the
Original/ This changes the accompaniment pattern
indicator light up.
Variation without inserting a fill-in.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
When this function is used during
fig.d-usrfunc.eps_50
Arranger Automatic Accompaniment, the
Reset accompaniment returns to the beginning of
the Division (p. 47).
Chapter 9

Performs the same function as the [Intro/

Intro 1/
Ending] button (p. 55). Intro 1 and Ending
Ending 1
1 are played.
Performs the same function as the [Intro/
Intro 2/
Ending] button (p. 55). Intro 2 and Ending
Ending 2
2 are played.
Arranger Performs the same function as the [Start/
Start/Stop Stop] button (p. 55).
Orchestrator This changes the accompaniment to a more
2. Touch to assign functions to each of the Up elavorate arrangement (p. 59).
Performance Pads.

144
KR107_e.book 145 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 9 Various Settings

Function Explanation ❍ Functions that Can be Assigned (Pedals

Only)
Orchestrator Changes the accompaniment to a simpler
Down arrangement (p. 59).
Function Explanation
Melody Turns the Melody Intelligence function on
Intelligence and off (p. 60). Pressing the pedal during playback of a song
stops the playback. When the pedal is
This starts Automatic Accompaniment released, playback resumes from the
with a fade-in (where the volume gets beginning of the measure that was playing
Fade In/Out progressively louder), ends it with a fade- Composer
when the pedal was pressed. When the pedal
out (where the volume gets progressively Assist
is pressed in rapid succession, the playback
softer), then stops. will resume backs up the same number of
Rotary Slow/ This switches the speed of the rotary effect* measures as the number of times the pedal is
Fast when you perform with an organ tone. pressed.

While the pedal or Performance Pad is held Upper The pedal functions as a sostenuto pedal
down, the pitch of the sound drops Sostenuto (p. 19).
temporarily, returning to the original pitch
Glide Upper Soft The pedal functions as a soft pedal (p. 19).
when the pedal or Pad is released. This can
be effective for simulating the performance
Applies a damper pedal effect to the sounds
of instruments like a Hawaiian guitar. Lower
in the left-hand side of the keyboard during a
Damper
Composer Performs the same function as the [ split performance.
Play/Stop (Play/Stop)] button (p. 65). This raises the pitch of notes you play on the
Bend Up
If a song is stopped with the score shown in keyboard.
Page the KR display, the notation in the KR
Bend This lowers the pitch of notes you play on the
Fwd 1 display scrolls to the next page when you
Down keyboard.
press the pedal.
If a song is stopped with the score shown in When the pedal is pressed during a layer
Page the KR display, the notation in the KR performance, the Tone volume changes
Bwd 1 display scrolls to the preceding page when between two levels, depending on how firmly
you press the pedal. the pedal is pressed.
EX1
Pressing the pedal with “Pedal EX1” selected
If a song is stopped with the score shown in increases the layer Tone volume. The layer
Page the external display, the notation in the Tone is played at a fixed volume, regardless of
Fwd 2 external display scrolls to the next page how forcefully the keys are played.
when you press the pedal.
Pressing the pedal with “Pedal EX2” selected
If a song is stopped with the score shown in increases the layer Tone volume.The layer
Page the external display, the notation in the EX2
Tone is played at a fixed volume, regardless of
Bwd 2 external display scrolls to the preceding how forcefully the keys are played.
page when you press the pedal.
Pressing the pedal with “Pedal EX3” selected
During Punch-in Recording, this starts and
Punch In/Out increases the layer Tone volume, while the
stops recording (p. 119).
volume of the left-hand Tone is decreased.
EX3
You can set the tempo according to the The layer Tone is played at a fixed volume,
Tap
interval at which the pedal or pad is regardless of how forcefully the keys are
Tempo
pressed (p. 82). played.

Pressing the pedal with “Pedal EX4” selected

Chapter9

* What is the leading bass function? EX4 increases the layer Tone volume, while the
The function that sounds the lowest note of a fingered chord volume of the right-hand Tone is decreased.
as the bass tone is called “Leading Bass.” When this function
NOTE
is turned on, the Bass Tone changes when chord inversions
are used. Usually the tonic of the chord you play sounds as The effect may not be applied correctly when you press a pedal
the bass tone. if “Pedal EX1–4” is assigned to more than one pedal.

* What is the rotary effect?

This adds a sort of spinning effect to the organ sound, similar Using the “Bend Up” or “Bend Down” function during a
to the sound when a rotary speaker is used. split performance (p. 26) changes the pitch of sounds in
Changing the speed increases or decreases the speed of this the right-hand side of the keyboard. Additionally, the
spinning effect. range in which the pitch can change when the Bender

145
 KR107_e.book 146 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 9 Various Settings

effect is used is called the “bend range”; refer to fig.d-pedalset.eps_50

“Changing the Bend Range (Pedal Setting)” (p. 146).

❍ Functions that can be assigned (Expression

Pedals Only)

Function Explanation

Expression Adjusts the overall volume.

When the pedal is pressed during a layer

performance, the Tone volume changes
between two levels, depending on how
firmly the pedal is pressed. Touch <Bend Range> to adjust the bend range
EX1 Pressing the pedal with “Pedal EX1” setting.
selected increases the layer Tone volume.
The layer Tone is played at a fixed volume, You can set this to any value within a range of 1 to 12 (in
regardless of how forcefully the keys are half-tone steps, up to one octave).
played.

Pressing the pedal with “Pedal EX2” ■ Changing Standard Pitch

selected increases the layer Tone volume. (Master Tune)
EX2 The layer Tone is played at a fixed volume,
regardless of how forcefully the keys are “Standard pitch” generally refers to the pitch that is heard
played. when you play middle A. When performing in an ensemble
with other instruments, adjust the standard pitch so that the
Pressing the pedal with “Pedal EX3”
selected increases the layer Tone volume, instruments of the ensemble match. Tuning all the
while the volume of the left-hand Tone is instruments to a standard pitch is called “master tuning.”
EX3
decreased. The layer Tone is played at a
fixed volume, regardless of how forcefully At Step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 142), touch <Master Tune>.
the keys are played. A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-tuning.eps_50
Pressing the pedal with “Pedal EX4”
selected increases the layer Tone volume,
EX4
while the volume of the right-hand Tone is
decreased.

■ Changing the Bend Range

(Pedal Setting)
The effect of smoothly raising or lowering the pitch of a
played note is called the “bender effect.”
You can assign the bender function to a pedal, then apply the Touch to change the pitch.
bender effect by depressing and releasing the pedal.
Standard pitch can be set to any value from 415.3–466.2 Hz.
You can also make a setting that determines how much the
pitch of the note changes when you apply the bender. The
Chapter 9

maximum range of change in pitch is called the “bend

range.”
At Step 3 “Procedure” (p. 142), touch <Pedal Setting>.

Touch to switch the screens.

146
KR107_e.book 147 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 9 Various Settings

■ Changing the Language fig.d-usrimage.eps_50

(Language)
Five choices are available for the language used in displaying
information on the screen.

At Step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 142), touch <Language>.

A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-lang.eps_50

Selecting the Display to be Set

1. Touch <KR Display> or <Ext. Display>.
Select the setting either for “KR display” or “Ext.
display” images.

Selecting the Images to be Displayed

First, take an external memory to which the image data
Touch to select the language. stored in the KR has been saved, and connect the
external memory to the external memory port.
Available settings
English, Japanese, German, French, Spanish 2. Touch <File>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
NOTE fig.d-usrimage2.eps_50

German, Spanish, and French are displayed for some functions.

Other screens will be displayed in English.

■ Selecting Images To Be Shown

on the KR and External
Displays
(User Image Display)
You can have image data from computers and other devices
shown on the onboard display, or on an external display
you’ve connected. You can store two types of image data, 3. Touch the name of the stored image data.
“KR display” data, and “Ext. display” data. When you touch <Preview>, you can then show the
selected image data on the display selected in Step 1.
4. Touch <Save>.
“KR-display-use” images appear on the KR’s display
when the instrument’s power is turned on. Refer to the The selected image data is stored.
procedure in “Changing the Settings for Showing 5. Press the [Exit] button to return to the previous screen.
Images with the External Display and the Television
Chapter9

To clear the stored image data, touch <Erase>.

(External Display)” (p. 158) to set the instrument so the
“Ext. display” image is displayed on the external
❍ Image data that KR can display
display.
At Step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 142), touch <User Image
320 x 240 pixels (for KR display)
Display>. Size
640 x 480 pixels (for external display)
A screen like the one shown below appears.
Format BMP format

Extension “.bmp”

147
 KR107_e.book 148 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 9 Various Settings

■ Changing the Screen Message ■ Remembering the Settings

When the Power Is Turned On Even When the Power is
(Opening Message) Turned Off (Memory Backup)
You can modify this screen to show your favorite phrase Normally, the various settings revert to their default values
when the power is turned on. when the power is turned off. However, you can specify that
the settings will be remembered even when the power is
At Step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 142), touch <Opening Message>. turned off. This function is called “Memory Backup.”
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-openmsg.eps_50

For more on the settings stored using Memory Backup,

refer to “Parameters Stored in Memory Backup” (p. 184).
At step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 142), touch <Memory Backup>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-memory.eps_50

Use to move the cursor.

When you touch the character icon, the character is input
where at the position.
When you touch the icon for the character to be input, the
Touch <Execute>.
character appears at the cursor position. For example,
The confirmation message appears on screen.
touching the <ABC> icon in succession cycles you through the
Touch <OK> to store the setting.
available choices in that character group (A→B→C→A...).
When the setting has been stored in memory, the previous
Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters through
screen will reappear.
“English (upper case),” “English (lower case),” “numerals,”
“symbols,” then back to “English (upper case).” NOTE

When you touch <Del>, the character at the cursor position is Never turn off the power while the display indicates
deleted. <Executing...>. Doing so will damage the KR’s internal

When you touch <Ins>, a space is inserted at the cursor memory, making it unusable.

position.

When you have finished inputting the characters, touch

<Execute>.

NOTE

Never turn off the power while the display indicates

Chapter 9

<Executing...>. Doing so will damage the KR’s internal

memory, making it unusable.

If you touch <All Clear> at the bottom of the screen and

then touch <Execute>, the display reverts to the screen
that normally appears when you turn on the power to
the instrument.

148
KR107_e.book 149 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 9 Various Settings

■ Restoring the Factory Settings ■ Changing the Functions of the

(Factory Reset) Remote Control’s Buttons
You can return the content stored with “Memory Backup” (p. You can change the functions assigned to the remote
148) and the User Programs (p. 108) to their original factory control’s buttons.
settings. This operation is referred to as “Factory Reset.” At step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 142), touch <Remocon Setting>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
NOTE

When you perform a Factory Reset, all settings that have been
stored in memory up to then are erased and reset to their
factory defaults.

This operation does not return the touch screen

calibration settings to the original factory condition. To
return the touch screen calibration settings to the
original factory settings, refer to “Returning the Touch
Screen Calibration Settings to the Original Factory
Settings” (p. 151)
Changing the [ ] (PLAY) Button Functions

When you want to restore the content registered to the 1. Touch <PLAY> to assign functions to
KR’s User memory to the factory condition, refer to [ ] (PLAY) button.
“Formatting the User Memory” (p. 152).
Display Explanation
At step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 142), touch “Factory Reset.”
A screen like the one shown below appears. Songs are played back continuously in
fig.d-factory.eps_50
sequence, starting from the currently
selected song.

Internal Song
Songs in the selected genre are played
back continuously.
All Song
Play “Favorites” Songs
Songs registered to the “Favorites” are
played back in sequence.
Songs on External Memories and
Floppy Disks
Songs within the selected folder are
played back continuously.
Touch <Execute>.
One Song Only the selected song is played back.
The confirmation message appears on screen. Play Playback stops when the song is finished.
Touch <OK> to restore the original factory settings.
The songs are played back in random
Chapter9

When you have finished making the settings, switch off the order.
power, then switch it back on again. Internal Song
The songs in all genres are played back in
When you touch <Cancel>, the settings are left untouched, random order.
and you’re returned to the previous screen. Random “Favorites” Songs
Play Songs registered to the “Favorites” are
NOTE played back in random order.
Never turn off the power while the display indicates Songs on External Memories and
<Executing...>. Doing so will damage the KR’s internal Floppy Disks
memory, making it unusable.
Songs within the selected folder are
played back in random order.

2. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Functions screen.

149
 KR107_e.book 150 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 9 Various Settings

Changing the [FUNC1] [FUNC2] Button Display Explanation

Functions
Fast forwards and rewinds the song.
When [-] button is pressed, the song
Bwd/Fwd
1. Touch <FUNC1> <FUNC2> to assign rewinds; when [+] button is pressed, the
functions to [FUNC1] [FUNC2] button. song is fast forwarded.

NOTE
Display Explanation
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Functions
Each time the [FUNC 1] or [FUNC 2]
screen.The remote control buttons’ original function
Lyric Color button is pressed, switch the color used
for lyric in the display. assignments are restored when the power is turned off. If you
want to save the changed settings, carry out the memory
Pressing the button while the song is
backup (p. 148).
playing back stops the playback. When
you release the button, playback resumes
from the beginning of the measure being ■ Switching the Remote Sensor
Replay played when you pressed the button.
Pressing the button a number of times in
On and Off (iR function)
rapid succession moves the playback You set the Remote Sensor to On (active) or Off (disabled).
position back by the same the number of When switched on, infrared transmission remote control
measures, after which playback resumes.
information is received.
Each time the [FUNC 1] or [FUNC 2] At step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 142), touch “iR function.”
button is pressed, the lower track is
Track 3 A screen like the one shown below appears.
switched on or off. When turned off, the
sound from the lower track does not play.

Each time the [FUNC 1] or [FUNC 2]

button is pressed, the upper track is
Track 4
switched on or off. When turned off, the
sound from the upper track does not play.

Zoom Displays an enlarged notation.

Playback repeats within the marked

Repeat
range.

2. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Functions screen.

Changing the TEMPO [-] [+] Button and the Touch <ON> or <OFF>
TRANSPOSE [-] [+] Button Functions
■ Calibrating the Touch Screen
1. Touch <TEMPO> or <TRANSPOSE> to (Touch Screen)
assign functions to TEMPO [-] [+] and TANSPOSE [-] If you’ve been using the touch screen for some time, the
[+] button. pointer may be shifted, making the KR react incorrectly. You
should correct this displacement when necessary by
Display Explanation performing calibration (repositioning).
Chapter 9

Changes the tempo. Pressing [-] button

At step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 142), touch “Touch Screen.”
Tempo slows the tempo down; pressing [+]
button speeds up the tempo. A screen like the one shown below appears.

Scrolls the notation in the external display.

Press [-] button to return to the previous
Notation
page; press [+] button to advance to the
next page.

Transposes the song. Pressing [-] button

lowers the pitch in semitone steps;
Transpose
pressing [+] button raises the pitch in
semitone steps.

150
KR107_e.book 151 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 9 Various Settings

fig.d-touchpanel.eps_50
Selecting the Part to Which
the Effect is Added
(EffectsPart)
You may find effects not being applied to certain parts when
different effects are applied to the upper tone, layer tone, and
lower tone. In such instances, you can select which effect is to
have priority.

1. Press any tone button, and select the tone (p. 23).
Touch <Execute>.
2. Touch <Effect>.
Touch the points indicated.
3. Touch <Part>.
NOTE
A screen like the one shown below appears.
Do this carefully, because touching a location that’s different
from the one indicated for the pointer may make the
displacement even worse. Be sure to touch the pointer
accurately.

When the calibration is finished, touch <Write> to store the

settings.

NOTE

If you don’t write them to memory, the calibration settings will

be discarded as soon as the power is switched off.

Returning the Touch Screen Calibration

Settings to the Original Factory Settings 4. Touch to select the part to which the effect
If you touch <Factory Reset> in the above screen, the touch is added.
screen calibration settings revert to the original factory
The effect will be applied to the selected part and other
settings.
parts to which the same effect has been applied.
Available settings
Upper, Layer 1, Layer 2, Lower 1, Lower 2

Chapter9

151
 KR107_e.book 152 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 9 Various Settings

Formatting the User Memory Automatically Starting the

The KR features an internal storage area where you can save
Quick Tour
recorded performances and User Styles. This space is called You can set the instrument so that the Quick Tour starts
the “User Memory.” automatically with no operation required.
The following content is stored to the user memory.
1. Hold down the [Transpose] button and press the
• Content registered to the “Favorites” (p. 69)
• Sets of saved User Programs (p. 109) [Ambience/Reverb] button.
• User Styles saved on user memory (p. 135) The Quick Tour screen appears.
• Image files set with the “User Image settings” (p. 147)
2. Press the [Option] button.
To delete all of the content held in the user memory and
A screen like the one shown below appears.
restore the original factory settings, carry out the following
fig.d-touchpanel.eps_50
procedure.

1. Press the [Song/File] button.

2. Touch <File>.
3. Touch <Format Media>.

4. Touch to select “User.”

5. Touch <Execute>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-touchpanel.eps_50 3. Touch of each parameter to make settings.

Item Display Explanation

This setting determines
whether or not Quick Tour
starts when no adjustment
Auto Start ON, OFF
or other operation is
performed within a fixed
period of time.
This setting determines
6. Touch <OK>. whether or not
BGM ON, OFF background music is
All of the content in the user memory is deleted. added when Auto Demo
If you touch <Cancel>, the deletion is cancelled, and begins.
you’re returned to the previous screen. When Auto Start is set to “ON,” a period of five to ten
minutes passes without the instrument being touched,
NOTE
the demo automatically starts. The demo stops playing if
Never turn off the power while the display indicates
the instrument is operated in any way. When Auto Start
<Formatting...>. Doing so will damage the KR’s internal
Chapter 9

is set to “OFF,” the demo does not start unless you touch
memory, making it unusable.
the icon in the Demo screen.
4. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Quick Tour
Carrying out this operation does not initialize any screen.
settings other than the user memory settings. To restore
→ This setting is saved even after the power is turned off.
settings other than those for the user memory to the
original factory settings, carry out Factory Reset (p. 149). * For more information about Quick Tour, refer to the Quick
Start.
* You cannot start the demo songs if you have any performance
recorded but not saved. Before starting the demo, either delete
or save the song when the song delete screen(p. 90) is
displayed.

152
KR107_e.book 153 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 9 Various Settings

Adjusting the Piano Designer Disabling Functions Other

Resonance Than Piano Performance
You can made precise changes to the Piano Designer
(Panel Lock)
“Resonance” setting. The “Panel Lock” function locks the KR in a state where only
More of the resonance effect is applied as the value is piano performance can be used, and all buttons will be
increased. disabled. This prevents the settings from being inadvertently
modified even if children press the buttons accidentally.
1. Press the [Piano Designer] button.
* In the Panel Lock state, only the grand piano sound can be
2. Press the [Option] button.
played.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-touchpanel.eps_50 1. Turn down the volume all the way.
2. Press the [Power] switch to turn off the power.
3. While holding down the [Wonderland/Game] button,
press the [Power] switch and turn on the power.

Hold down the button for at least ten seconds (until the
animation is displayed).
All buttons except for piano play are disabled.
Adjust the volume. When you play the keyboard, the
grand piano sound will be heard.
To undo the Panel Lock function, turn the volume down
3. Touch of each item to make settings.
to the minimum, and turn on the power once again.

Item Explanation

With an acoustic piano, playing a

note causes the strings for other keys
already being pressed to resonate.
String
The function that reproduces this
resonant sound is called “String
Resonance.”

When the damper pedal on an

acoustic piano is pressed, the sound
of the key that is played causes other
strings to resonate, adding rich
Damper reverberation and breadth to the
sound. This function reproduces the
resonant sound created by pressing
the damper pedal (Damper
Resonance).
Chapter9

This reproduces the “key off” sound

(the subtle sound made when the
Key off
keys are released) produced when
playing an acoustic piano.

153
 KR107_e.book 154 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 9 Various Settings

Detailed Song Playback ■ Viewing Song Information

Settings (Information)
You can view file names and other information concerning

■ Changing the Tone Settings songs.

When Playing Back Songs 1. Press the [Song/File] button.

(Play Mode) 2. Touch <File>.
With the normal setting, GS tones (sounds that are
3. Touch <Information>.
compatible with other GS instruments) will normally be used
to play back song data. By changing this setting, you can play A song information is displayed.
back song using KR-specific tones for certain portions of the
data. ■ Hiding the Lyrics (Lyrics)
Some commercially available music files for use in karaoke,
as well as some of the internal songs include lyrics data.
For detailed information about GS, refer to “About the When you play such music files, the lyrics automatically
KR Sound Generator” (p. 185). appear in the screen. If you do not want lyrics to appear
1. Press the [Menu] button. automatically, set this to “OFF.”

The Menu screen appears. 1. Press the [Menu] button.

The Menu screen appears.
Touch to switch the screens.
2. Touch <Play Mode>. Touch to switch the screens.

A screen like the one shown below appears. 2. Touch <Lyrics>.

fig.d-plymode.eps_60
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-lyric.eps_60

3. Touch the icon to choose the setting.

Icon Explanation 3. Touch to select the setting.

Playback uses GS-compatible tones for

GS performances that sound like other GS Display Explanation
instruments. Lyrics are displayed automatically (when
Chapter 9

Playback uses KR tones for greater ON performance data containing lyrics is played
expressiveness. However, differences may back).
KR
appear when playing back using devices Lyrics are not displayed, even if the song
other than the KR. OFF
data being played back contains lyrics data.

4. Press the [Exit] button to go back to the Menu screen. 4. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Menu screen.
5. After changing this setting, try selecting the song once
again.
Even when this is set to “OFF,” you can still have the lyrics be
For more detailed information about selecting a song,
displayed by touching < > when it appears in the Piano
refer to “Playing a Song” (p. 65). or Basic screen (p. 21).

154
KR107_e.book 155 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 9 Various Settings

4. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Menu screen.

After changing this setting, try selecting the song once
The screen may be switched when you press the button
again.
while the Lyrics screen is displayed. To have the lyrics
For more detailed information about selecting a song,
displayed again, touch < > on the Piano or Basic
refer to “Playing a Song” (p. 65).
screen, or stop playback of the song, then press the
[ (Play/Stop)] button.

■ Changing the Parts Assigned

to the Track Buttons During
SMF Playback (Track Assign)
Normally, when playing back Roland Piano Digital-
compatible SMFs (p. 185), the lower part is assigned to the
[3/Lower] button, and the upper part is assigned to the [4/
Upper] button. However, assignment of the upper and lower
parts may differ with some SMF data.
If you cannot get the upper and lower parts to work well set
on “Auto,” then change the setting to “2/1 Part” or “3/4
Part.”

This setting is effective with internal songs, registered

songs for favorites, and SMF format song data.

1. Press the [Menu] button.

The Menu screen appears.

Touch to switch the screens.

2. Touch <Track Assign>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-trkasgn.eps_60

Chapter9

3. Touch to select the setting.

Display Explanation
The part assigned to each track will be
Auto determined automatically,
depending on the song data.
Part 1 will be assigned to the upper part
2/1 Part track, part 2 to the lower part track, and part
3 to the user track.
Part 4 will be assigned to the upper part
3/4 Part track, part 3 to the lower part track, and part
1 to the user track.

155
 KR107_e.book 156 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices

You can connect the KR to external devices such as audio
Connecting an External
equipment, MIDI instruments and computer.
Display or Television
❍ Connecting an External Display or Television
You can connect a computer monitor or other external You can connect a computer monitor or other external
display or a television to the KR107, enabling you to display display or a television to the KR107, enabling you to display
the Song Select screen, your favorite images, song lyrics, and the Song Select screen, your favorite images, song lyrics, and
notations on a larger screen. notations on a larger screen.

❍ Connecting Video Equipment (p. 159)

With a V-LINK compatible device connected, you can switch You can switch screens with the remote control. For
images with the keyboard. details, see “Using the Remote Control” (p. 71).

❍Connecting MIDI Devices (p. 160)

You cannot simultaneously use both an external
You can connect a MIDI sequencer and record performance
display and a television with the KR107. Moreover,
data from the KR, or play performance data from the KR on
neither the external display nor the television will be
the sequencer. Also, when you connect a MIDI sound
able to display properly if both are connected at the
module, you can perform on the KR and hear the sounds
same time.
played through the MIDI sound module.
When using an external display, connect the display to
❍ Connecting Audio Equipment (p. 163) the Ext Display connector, but do not connect a
The KR has high-quality built-in stereo speakers, but you can television to the Video Out connector.
also hook it up a stereo system for an even more impressive If using a television, connect the television to the Video
sound. Out connector, but do not connect any external display
You can also connect it to a tape recorder or other recording to the Ext Display connector.
equipment and record your performances.
For more information about external display settings, refer to
❍ Connecting a Computer (p. 165) “Changing the Settings for Showing Images with the
You can use a sequencer program (such as Roland Visual- External Display and the Television (External Display)” (p.
MT) to record performance data from the KR and play 158).
performance data from the program on the KR.

❍Connecting an Expression Pedal ■ Connecting an External

You can connect an expression pedal to the KR. Display
Connect the Expression pedal to the Expression Pedal Displays That Can Be Connected to This
jack on the rear panel of the KR107. Instrument
925 In general, a great many of the VGA monitors and multiscan
monitors that are available on the market are compatible
NOTE
with this instrument. However, before you connect any
Use only the specified expression pedal (EV-7/5; sold
monitor, make sure it meets the following specifications:
separately). By connecting any other expression pedals, you risk
causing malfunction and/or damage to the unit. Resolution 640 x 480 pixels
Horizontal scan frequency 31.5 kHz
Vertical scan frequency 60 Hz
Connector 3-row, 15-pin D-Sub type
Chapter 10

Signal Analog

NOTE

Confirm that the display to be used is compatible with the

frequencies mentioned above. Using a display that is not
compatible with the above frequencies may result in incorrect
image output when images move, and in certain cases may even
damage the display.

156
KR107_e.book 157 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices

Making the Connections rest’s moving parts. Keep the base of the display within
one of the areas shown by the dotted lines in the
NOTE
illustration below.
To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other
Areas for placing the display
devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power
on all devices before making any connections.

D-sub 15 pin D-sub 15 pin

(Mini) (Mini)

Display Cable
KR Bottom (Sold separately)
Ext Display Connector • If you are placing the display on top of the KR, we
External Display
recommend using a liquid crystal display (LCD). If using
1. Turn off the power to the KR107 and the display to be a cathode ray tube (CRT) display, take extra care to
connected. ensure that the display rests stably on the instrument.

2. Use display cable (sold separately) to connect the Turning the Power Off
display to the Ext Display connector on the KR107.
After use, turn off the power using the following procedure.

NOTE 1. Turn the volume all the way down on the KR107.
You cannot display information or images with an external
2. Turn off the KR107.
display when a television is connected to the Video Out
jack. To use an external display, first disconnect the 3. Turn off the connected display.
television from the Video Out jack, then connect the
external display. ■ Connecting a Television
3. Switch on the KR107.
Video Cable
(Sold separately)
4. This sets the display format (p. 158).
5. Switch on the connected display.
KR107’s Jack Panel
Video Out jack
Television
For more on handling the external display, refer to your display’s
owner’s manual. Making the Connections
Always be sure to use the following procedure when
connecting a television.
You can also remove the music rest, then place the display there so
NOTE
that it faces forward. For instructions on removing the music rest,
refer to “Removing the Music Rest” (p. 18). You cannot display information or images with a television
when an external display is connected to the Ext Display
connector. To use an television, first disconnect the
external display from the Ext Display connector, then
connect the external display.

1. Turn off the power to the KR107 and the television to

be connected.
Chapter10

2. Use a video cable (sold separately) to connect the

KR107’s Video Out jack with the television’s video

When using the KR107 with a display placed on it, be sure to input jack.
note the following precautions. 3. Turn on the power to the KR107.
• Make sure the display sits stably on the KR107 before
use.
4. This sets the display format (p. 158).
• Do not let the base of the display rest on any of the music 5. Turn on the power to the television.

157
 KR107_e.book 158 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices

■ Changing the Settings for Showing Notes When Switching the Display on External
Images with the External Display Displays and Televisions
and the Television • Lyrics are not displayed with audio CDs.
(External Display) • You cannot display any lyrics screen when playing back
music data that does not include lyrics data.
This selects the content shown on the external display or the
• The internal songs include a number of jazz pieces that
television connected to the KR.
are played in an improvised fashion, and you may find
1. Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button. notes not conforming to measure lines, odd divisions of
the parts played in the left and right hand, and other
2. Press the [Option] button. such features that do not match what is shown in the
3. Touch <Ext Display>. notation.
• Neither the external display nor the television will be
A screen like the following appears.
fig.d-extdisp.eps_50
able to display properly if both are connected at the
same time.

Lyric Color
Selects the color used for lyric in the display.
Value: White, Black, Red, Yellow, Green, Blue, Cyan,
Magenta

Device
If you find that the image quality of the television is poor,
try switching the television format.
4. Touch the parameter to make the settings. Value: VGA, PAL, NTSC

5. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Function screen.

■ Explanation of Each Items

Mode

Settings
Explanation
Value

The display of notations, lyrics, notation

Auto + keyboard, and lyric are switched
automatically.

Screens are shown the same way they

Panel
appear in the KR107’s display.

The Notation screen is normally

Notation
displayed.

Notation +
The notation and keyboard are displayed.
Keyboard

The Lyrics screen is normally displayed.

However, lyrics are displayed only when
Chapter 10

Lyric
playing back music files that contains
lyrics data.

158
KR107_e.book 159 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices

Connecting Video Equipment While V-LINK is switched on, no sound is produced

when you press any of the twelve keys at the left end of
(V-LINK) the keyboard.

Connecting the KR107 to a V-LINK compatible image device 5. Touch <OFF> to cancel the V-LINK function.
allows you to control the images with the KR107.

V-LINK ( ) is functionality promoted by Roland

that allows linked performance of music and visual material.
By using V-LINK-compatible video equipment, visual effects
can be easily liked to, and made part of the expressive
elements of a performance.
921

NOTE

To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other

devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power
on all devices before making any connections.

Connection Examples:
fig.02-

V-LINK compatible image device

USB MIDI Interface

KR107 MIDI OUT

■ Using the V-LINK function

1. Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.
2. Press the [Option] button.
3. Touch <V-LINK>.
4. Touch <ON>.
Switches to Image Control mode.
You can control images using the twelve keys at the left
end of the keyboard.
When V-LINK is on, “V-LINK” is indicated in the Basic
screen and other screens.
Chapter10

fig.V-LINKkey

A0 B0 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1

A0 – G1#

159
 KR107_e.book 160 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices

Connecting MIDI Devices ■ Making the Connections

* To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other
By connecting an external MIDI device and exchanging
devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power
performance data, you can control one device from the other.
on all devices before making any connections.
For instance, you can output sound from the other
instrument or switch Tones on the other instrument. 1. Turn the volume all the way down on the KR and on
What’s MIDI? the device you’re about to connect.
MIDI, short for “Musical Instrument Digital Interface,” was 2. Switch off the power to the KR and the device you’re
developed as a universal standard for the exchange of about to connect.
performance data between electronic instruments and
computers. 3. Use a MIDI cable (sold separately) to connect the MIDI
connectors to each other.
The KR is equipped with MIDI connectors to let it exchange
performance data with external devices. These connectors Please refer to the connection examples below.
can be used to connect the KR to an external device for even 4. Switch on the power to the KR and the connected
greater versatility.
device.
984

* A separate publication titled “MIDI Implementation” is also 5. Adjust the volume level on the KR and the connected
available. It provides complete details concerning the way device.
MIDI has been implemented on this unit. If you should require
this publication (such as when you intend to carry out byte- 6. You should also set the MIDI settings as needed.
level programming), please contact the nearest Roland Service For details on the MIDI-related settings, refer to
Center or authorized Roland distributor. p. 161–p. 163.

Connection Examples:
■ Connectors Setup with a MIDI Sequencer
fig.09- fig.09-10

Roland MT Series

Out MIDI In

MIDI Out Connector

Connect this to the MIDI In connector on an external MIDI
KR107
device using a MIDI cable (sold separately).
Performance data when you play the keyboard or depress a
pedal is sent from this connector to the external MIDI
connector.
MIDI In Connector * When the KR is connected to a MIDI sequencer, set it to Local
Connect this to the MIDI Out connector on an external MIDI OFF. Refer to “Disconnecting the Internal Sound Generator
device using a MIDI cable (sold separately). and Keyboard (Local Control)” (p. 162).

This receives MIDI messages that are sent from external Connecting with a MIDI Sound Module
fig.09-
MIDI devices. The KR receiving MIDI messages can output
Sound Module
sounds, exchange tones and perform other operations. MIDI
THRU OUT IN

* External MIDI devices can’t be used for remotely changing the

Chapter 10

Tones played by the KR’s keyboard.

KR107

160
KR107_e.book 161 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices

Performing in Ensemble with MIDI Settings

MIDI Instruments You can make MIDI settings like those described below.
(MIDI Ensemble) <MIDI Setting>
fig.09-04.eps
You can connect an electronic percussion device or other
MIDI instrument to the KR’s MIDI In connector for ensemble
playing. Making the MIDI settings for the instrument
connected to the MIDI In connector is easy. The sounds from
the connected MIDI instrument are played from the KR’s
speaker.

1. Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.

2. Press the [Option] button.
3. Touch <MIDI Ensemble>.
A screen like the following appears. Display Explanation
fig.09-04.eps
Chooses the MIDI send channel
Tx Channel
(p. 162).

Switches Local Control on or off

Local Control
(p. 162).

<Program Change>
fig.09-04.eps

4. Select the method for using the MIDI In connector.

Displayed Meaning

Normal setting.
Normal Make changes in Tone and other settings
from the connected device.

Select this when you have percussion pads

connected to the KR’s MIDI In connector. Display Explanation
You do not need to make any MIDI settings
Pad on the KR. Select pad Tones and make other Sends Bank Select MSB messages
settings from the connected pads (for further Bank Select MSB
(p. 163).
details, refer to the Owner’s Manual
provided with the pads). Sends Bank Select LSB messages
Bank Select LSB
(p. 163).
Select this when you have a keyboard
connected to the KR’s MIDI In connector. Sends Program Change messages
Program Change
Keyboard You can select tones for the connected (Program Numbers) (p. 163).
keyboard from the KR. No MIDI settings
need be made on the KR.

5. When “Keyboard” is selected in Step 4 above, use

Chapter10

to select the Tone.

The connected keyboard plays using the selected Tone.

161
 KR107_e.book 162 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices

Making the Settings Local On: The keyboard and internal sound generator are
connected.
1. Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button. fig.09-

2. Press the [Option] button. Sound is emitted

3. Touch <MIDI Setting> or <Program Change>.

Sound Generator
4. Touch to make the setting for each Local On
item.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Functions screen.

■ Selecting the Transmit Channel Local Off: The keyboard and internal sound generator are
separated. No sound will be produced by the
(Tx Channel)
keyboard when it is played.
MIDI organizes things into “channels,” which are numbered fig.09-
from 1 through 16. Simply connecting a cable is not enough No sound produced
for communication to take place. The connected devices must
be set to use the same MIDI channels. Otherwise, no sound
will be produced, and no sounds can be selected. Sound Generator
Select the transmit channel (1–16) of the KR. Local Off

The channel setting is at “1” when the KR is powered up.

If the keyboard has been split into upper and lower sections,
messages from the left-hand section are fixed at “3.”
The KR receives messages on all channels from 1 through 16. → When connecting a unit in the Roland MT series, you don’t
need to switch off Local Control. MT units transmit Local Off
■ Disconnecting the Internal messages when their power is switched on. First turn on the
power to the KR107, then after a few moments, play a note on
Sound Generator and
the KR107; when you turn on the power to the MT Series
Keyboard (Local Control) device, Local Off is automatically enabled for the KR107.
When connecting a MIDI sequencer, set Local Control to
“OFF.” The setting is at “Local Control ON” when the KR is
powered up.
As illustrated, information describing what has been played
on the keyboard is passed to the sound module over two
different routes, (1) and (2). As a result, you hear overlapping
or intermittent sounds. To prevent this from happening,
route (1) must be disabled, by setting the unit to what is
known as “Local Off.”
fig.09-

(1) Local On
Sequencer
MIDI MIDI
Sound IN OUT
Generator
Memory

MIDI MIDI
Chapter 10

OUT IN

(2) Soft Tru On

Each note played is sounded twice

162
KR107_e.book 163 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices

■ Sending Tone Change Messages Connecting to Audio

(Program Change/Bank Select Equipment
MSB/Bank Select LSB)
When you connect the KR to audio equipment, you can play
A Program Change is a message that means “change to the
the sounds from the KR through the speakers on the audio
Tone of the specified number.” The device that receives this
equipment or record your performances on a tape recorder
changes to the Tone of the corresponding number.
or other recording device.
When you choose a Program Change message (Program
When connecting, please use audio cables (sold separately)
Number), the Program Number will be transmitted to the
with standard phone plugs.
MIDI device connected to the KR. The MIDI device that
receives the Program Number changes the tone to the
■ Connectors
corresponding Program Number. fig.09-

Normally, the Tone is selected from the 128 Tones available.

Some MIDI devices, however, have more than 128 Tones.
With such devices, the Tone is selected through a
combination of Program Change messages and Bank Select
messages. There are two parts of a Bank Select message: the Output Jacks
MSB (Controller 0, with a value of 0–127) and the LSB You can connect audio equipment using audio cables (sold
(Controller 32, with a value of 0–127). separately) and play the sounds from the KR through the
* Some MIDI instruments can’t handle Bank Select messages. speakers on the connected equipment, or record your
Others can handle Bank Selects, but do not recognize the LSB performances on a tape recorder or other recording device.
part. If the input of the connected device is monaural, you must
use the L (Mono) jack.
Input Jacks
Sending Recorded You can connect another sound source, such as audio

Performance Data to a MIDI equipment or an electronic instrument, using audio cables

(sold separately). Play the sounds from the connected device
Device (Composer MIDI Out) through the speakers on the KR.

When Composer Out is active, you can send performance If the input of the connected device is monaural, you must
data recorded with the KR to a connected MIDI device or use the L (Mono) jack.
computer. * You cannot use the KR to adjust the volume of the connected
When you turn on the power, this is set to “OFF” (data is not sound generating device.
926a
sent).
* When connection cables with resistors are used, the volume
1. Press the [Menu] button. level of equipment connected to the inputs jacks may be low. If
2. Touch <Composer MIDI Out>. this happens, use connection cables that do not contain
fig.09-04.eps
resistors, such as those from the Roland PCS series.
Chapter10

3. Touch to set ON or OFF.

4. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Menu screen.

163
 KR107_e.book 164 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices

■ Making the Connections Playing Audio Equipment Sounds Through the

Speakers on the KR
* To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other fig.09-

devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power Output R/L
on all devices before making any connections. (Line Out)

Playing Sounds from the KR Through the Speakers

on Audio Equipment or Recording Your
Performances on a Recording Device KR107
fig.09-

Input R/L
(Line In, Aux In)

KR107
1. Turn the volume all the way down on the KR and on
the device you’re about to connect.

2. Turn off the power to the KR and other connected

equipment.

3. Use audio cables (sold separately) to make the

1. Turn the volume all the way down on the KR and on
connection.
the device you’re about to connect.
4. Turn on the connected equipment.
2. Turn off the power to the KR and other connected
5. Turn on the KR.
equipment.
6. Adjust the volume level on the KR and the connected
3. Use audio cables (sold separately) to make the
device.
connection.

4. Switch on the KR. After use, turn off the power using the following procedure.
5. Switch on the connected device. 1. Turn the volume all the way down on the KR and on
6. Adjust the volume level on the KR and the connected the device you’re about to connect.
device. 2. Turn off the KR.

Recording KR Performances on a Recording Device 3. Turn off the connected equipment.

7. Start recording with the connected device.
8. Play the keyboard.
9. When the performance ends, stop recording on the
connected equipment.
Chapter 10

164
KR107_e.book 165 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices

Connecting a Computer ■ Connect to the USB Connector

You can connect you computer with a USB cable to the USB
■ Connect to the MIDI Connectors connector, located on the left underside of the KR107, and
exchange MIDI data between the instrument and the
You can use a USB MIDI interface cable (sold separately) to
computer. You can use the KR to play SMF data created with
connect the KR to your computer.
the computer and exchange performance data in the same
If the KR is connected to a computer in which sequencer
manner as with MIDI devices connected to the MIDI
software such as Roland’s “Visual MT” is installed, a song
connectors.
you’ve recorded on the KR can be saved on your computer.
Connecting your computer to the KR107 for the first time requires
Connection Examples installation of the “USB Driver” (on the included CD-ROM) to the
computer.
* To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other The correct driver and the installation procedure will depend on
devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power your system and on the other programs you are using. Be sure to
on all devices before making any connections. read the Readme file on the CD-ROM before installation.

* In order to make connections to your computer, you must

Windows XP/2000
install “MIDI driver” software on your computer. For details,
→ \W2kXP\Readme_E.htm
refer to the owner’s manual for your MIDI interface.
Windows Me/98/98SE

Use a USB MIDI interface cable to connect the USB → \W98Me\Readme_E.htm

Mac OS X
connector of your computer to the MIDI connectors of
→ \Driver (Mac OS X)\Readme_e.htm
the KR.
fig.comp.e

Bottom left of the KR

* Only MIDI data can be transmitted using USB.

* To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other devices,

always turn down the volume, and turn off the power on all devices
before making any connections.
MIDI OUT MIDI IN
* USB cables are not included. Consult your Roland dealer if you need

USB Connector to purchase.

of your Computer
* Turn on the power to the KR107 before starting up MIDI applications
on the computer. Do not turn the KR107 on or off while any MIDI
Computer USB MIDI Interface application is running.

* If not using USB, disconnect the USB cable from the KR107.

* If during the transmission/reception of data, the computer switches to

energy-saving mode or suspended mode, or if the KR107’s power is
switched on or off, the computer may freeze, or the KR107’s operation
may become unstable.

* Do not connect or disconnect the USB cable or turn off the power
during the transmission/reception of data.

For more on system requirements, refer to the “USB

Installation Guide.” However, note that the KR107 is
not compatible with Mac OS 9.
Chapter10

165
 KR107_e.book 166 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices

Connection examples
fig.comp.e

Bottom left of the KR

USB connector

USB Connector
of your Computer

Computer

1. Turn off the power to the KR107 and the computer.

2. Start up the computer.

3. Connect the KR107 and the computer with a USB cable.

4. Turn on the power to the KR107.

→ Refer to the owner’s manual that came with your computer

■ Making the Settings for the

USB Driver
This sets the USB driver used when you have a computer
connected to the USB connector.

1. Open the Basic screen or press the One Touch [Piano]

button.

2. Touch the [Option] button.

3. Touch <USB Driver>.

4. Touch to select the driver type.

Indication Description
Select this when using the supplied
driver with a USB connection.
Original
Under ordinary circumstances, use this
mode.
This is an auxiliary mode.
Original 2
It is not normally used.
Select this when using a generic USB
Generic driver included with the OS with a USB
connection.
Chapter 10

5. After changing the settings, turn the power off, then on

again.

166
KR107_e.book 167 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Appendices

Troubleshooting
If you think there’s a problem, read this first.
Case Cause/Remedy
Case Cause/Remedy

The power doesn’t

Screen on connected display or television
Is the power cord connected and plugged
come on in correctly? (p. 17) doesn’t look right

The button doesn’t Is the external display properly connected (p.

Is the panel locked? (p. 153)
156)?
work Turn the power off, then back on.
Is the external display’s power turned on?
The KR uses a liquid-crystal screen, so text
Nothing appears
may not be displayed when the ambient Are you using a display that is compatible
on screen
temperature is below freezing. with the KR?
Refer to “Displays That Can Be Connected
Vertical lines
These occur due to the nature of a liquid to This Instrument” (p. 156).
appear in the Images not shown
crystal display, and do not indicate a
screen/Color is on external display Do you have a television and external
malfunction. They can be minimized by
“washed out” at the display connected at the same time?
adjusting the brightness of the screen (p. when external
edges of the Connect only one of these.
20). display is
screen
connected Are the KR’s settings correct?
The positioning of the touch screen may Follow the instructions in “Selecting
The touch screen become displaced if some time has passed Images To Be Shown on the KR and
doesn’t respond since it was last used. Take a look at External Displays (User Image Display)”
correctly “Calibrating the Touch Screen (Touch (p. 147) to set the “External Display” image.
Screen)” (p. 150) to correct the positioning. Also refer to “Changing the Settings for
Showing Images with the External Display
Is the pedal connected correctly? and the Television (External Display)” (p.
Make sure the pedal cord extending from 158).
the stand is securely connected to the pedal
connector on the rear of the unit (p. 17). While narrow horizontal lines may be
Thin horizontal visible in the television screen, this is a
Depressing a Has a different function been assigned to lines visible in the particular characteristic of the television set
pedal has no the pedal?
television screen and does not indicate any problem with the
effect, or the pedal See “Assigning Functions to Pedals and KR107.
effect doesn’t stop Performance Pads (Pedal Setting/User
Functions)” (p. 144). Even when all recommended settings are
used, images may still not be displayed
Normal pedal operation is automatically Poor-quality of
well with the television set you are using
enabled when the One Touch Program images displayed
(images may not match the screen size, and
[Piano] button is pressed (p. 19). in television
may be clustered towards the center of the
Could you be using a connection cable that screen).
The volume level
contains a resistor?
of the instrument
Use a connection cable that does not
connected to Input contain a resistor. No sound is heard
jacks is too low 926b
Is the volume level of the KR (p. 19) or
Unable to read Are you using (optional) Roland memory? connected device turned all the way down?
from/write to Reliable performance cannot be guaranteed Are headphones plugged in? (p. 19)
external memory if you use non-Roland memory products. Has a plug remained connected to the
Phones jack?
Do you have different external devices
Low hum coming When headphones or plugs are connected,
plugged into different power outlets?
from external the keyboard’s speaker stops playing.
When connecting external devices, always
device
draw power from the same outlet. Has the Balance knob been moved all the
No sound is heard
way to the right or left?
No data from the remote control is received
Remote Control Has the volume been set to “0” using the
when the Remote Sensor is switched off.
Part Balance? (p. 63)
not functioning Check “Switching the Remote Sensor On
and Off (iR function)” (p. 150). Are all sliders in the Equalizer screen at the
minimum level? (p. 34)
Appendices

Has the footage been adjusted so that all

frequency components aren’t sounded? (p.
15 in the Quick Start)

167
 KR107_e.book 168 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Troubleshooting

Case Cause/Remedy Case Cause/Remedy

Is the speaker cable connected and plugged During automatic accompaniment,

in correctly? changing the Music Style automatically
changes the Tones and tempo of the upper
No sound from the left side is V-LINK
part of the keyboard to match the new
No sound is heard switched on? (p. 159)
Music Style. If you want to change only the
When V-LINK is switched on, the twelve
Music Style without also altering the tempo
keys at the left end of the keyboard are used
The Tone has and Tone, check out “Changing Music
to control images, and no sounds are
Styles Without Changing the Tone or
played with these keys. changed
Tempo (One Touch Setting)” (p. 139).
Have all devices been switched on?
When a performance made along with a
No sound is heard
Are the MIDI cables connected correctly? Music Files tune has been recorded,
(when a MIDI
(p. 160) recording the performance to button [1/
instrument is Whole] may make the Tones for buttons [3/
connected) Does the MIDI channel match the Lower] and [4/Upper] change as well.
connected instrument? (p. 162)
Since the KR’s piano sounds faithfully
Has Local Control been set to “Off”? reproduce the sense of spaciousness and
No sound is heard Reverberation still
When Local Control is set to Off, no sound reverberation of an actual acoustic piano’s
when the keyboard audible even with
is produced by playing the keyboard. sound, a certain amount of reverberation is
is played Reverb turned off
Set Local Control to On (p. 162). still perceptible, even with the reverb effect
The maximum number of notes can play deactivated.
simultaneously is 128. Frequent use of the Have you made the correct Advanced 3D
damper pedal during automatic settings for use with headphones?
Not all played Sound from the
accompaniment or when playing along Changing the Advanced 3D “Mode” to
notes are sounded Output jacks is not
with a song on external memory may result “Headphones” or “Auto” and connecting a
in performance data with too many notes, right
pair of headphones configures the settings
causing some notes to drop out. for use with headphones.

On an acoustic piano, notes in the upper

one and a half octaves of the keyboard
The sound is strange
continue to sound until they decay
In the upper range, naturally, regardless of the damper pedal.
Is the KR in layer play? (p. 26)
Sounds are heard the sound changes There is a difference in the timbre as well.
twice (doubled) When the KR is connected to an external abruptly beyond a Roland pianos faithfully simulate such
when the keyboard sequencer, set it to the Local OFF mode characteristics of the acoustic piano. The
certain key
(p. 162). Alternatively, the sequencer could range that is unaffected by the damper
is played
be set so its Soft Thru feature is OFF. pedal will change depending on the Key
Have you set transpose? (p. 88) Transpose setting.

The tuning or pitch Are the settings for the “Temperament” When listening through headphones:
of the keyboard or and “Stretch Tuning” correct? (p. 143) Some of the more flamboyant and
effervescent piano tones feature an ample
song is off
Is the setting for the “Master Tune” correct? high-end component, which may make the
(p. 146) sound appear to have metallic reverberation
added. Since this reverberation becomes
If different effects have been selected for
particularly audible when supplemented by
the upper, lower, Layer, and other Tones, A High-pitched
heavy reverb, you may be able to diminish
and the effects for the Parts don’t match, whine is produced
the problem by reducing the amount of
only one of the effects is applied.
reverb applied to the sound.
Effects cannot be It’s not possible to apply more than one
When listening through speakers:
applied to Tones effect at the same time, so when a
Here, a different cause (such as resonance
performance has been recorded on multiple
produced by the KR) would be suspect.
tracks or when playing along with a song as
Consult your Roland dealer or nearest
it’s played back, the desired effect may not
Roland Service Center.
be applied.
Appendices

Have the Chord Tone and Bass Tone been

A note doesn’t stop changed? (p. 139)
playing Some Chord Tone and Bass Tone notes may
be sounded continuously.

168
KR107_e.book 169 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Troubleshooting

Case Cause/Remedy Case Cause/Remedy

When listening through speakers: Is the light for the Track button
Playing at loud volumes may cause extinguished? (p. 84)
instruments near the KR to resonate. Only the sound of a If the button light is out, the music on that
Resonation can also occur with fluorescent particular track is not heard. Press the track button so
light tubes, glass doors, and other objects. the light is illuminated.
instrument in a
In particular, this problem occurs more
song does not play Have song settings been changed for each
easily when the bass component is
Part on the 16-Track sequencer screen (p.
increased, and when the sound is played at
The bass range 115)?
higher volumes. Use the following
sounds odd, or measures to suppress such resonance. Some music files may contain settings that
there is a vibrating • Place speakers so they are 10–15 cm from Pressing the [ stop play at a point partway through the
resonance walls and other surfaces. (Reset)] button
song. Press the [ (Reset)] button several
• Reduce the volume. doesn’t return to times more to return to the beginning of the
• Move the speakers away from any the beginning of tune.
resonating objects. the song
When listening through headphones: Has a Marker placed in the song? (p. 85)
Here, a different cause (such as resonance
The fast-forward and reverse buttons are
produced by the KR) would be suspect.
ignored while music files is being read in.
Consult your Roland dealer or nearest
Wait until processing finishes.
Roland Service Center.
The [ (Fwd)]
If you attempt to play back performance
and [ (Bwd)] data that contains more data than the entire
buttons don’t work capacity of the KR’s memory, you may find
The automatic accompaniment doesn’t play
that operations other than playback (such
correctly
as rewind or fast forward) become
Press the [Exit] button several times to unavailable.
Can’t select a tone
return to the Basic screen (p. 21), and then
or Music Style There is a slight There are two types of SMF music files:
select a tone or Music Style.
format 0 and format 1. If the song uses SMF
delay before
Has the Balance knob been moved all the format 1 data, there will be a slight delay
playback of a song
way to the right? (p. 63) until playback starts. Refer to the booklet
on external
that came with the music files you’re using
Have you pressed the One Touch Program memory starts to determine the format type.
Automatic [Arranger] button?
accompaniment is If the One Touch Program [Arranger] With some music files, the lyrics cannot be
not heard button has not been pressed, only the displayed correctly.
rhythm pattern is played (p. 54).
If you press a button while the lyrics are
Is the 16-track Sequencer screen displayed? being shown in the display, the lyrics will
Lyrics are not disappear. To recall them, touch
(p. 114)
indicated properly
< > in the Piano or Basic screen, or
Has Chord Intelligence been set to manual? in the display
Chord Intelligence (p. 139) press the [ (Play/Stop)] button.
can’t be used Is the setting for “Piano Style Arranger” In the notation screen, some lyrics or notes
active? (p. 62) could extend beyond the edges of the
screen, and not be displayed.
In certain cases, such as when playing
Accompaniment
Music Styles on external memories, the If you select a part that does not contain
tempo becomes
accompaniment may lag when excessive performance data, notes will not be
unstable
amounts of performance data are used. displayed in the notation. Change the part
that is displayed (p. 76).

The notation screen feature is particularly

Notation is not
Song doesn’t play back correctly unsuitable for the display of difficult,
indicated properly
complex musical works that demand
Does the screen indicate message, like “OK in the display
accurate notation. Refer to “Notes
to delete song?” (p. 90)
Regarding the Notation Display” (p. 74).
Song doesn’t play The internal songs cannot be played back
Appendices

back while recorded performance data remains In the notation screen, some lyrics or notes
in the KR’s memory. Try playing back the could extend beyond the edges of the
song after deleting the performance data. screen, and not be displayed.

169
 KR107_e.book 170 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Troubleshooting

Case Cause/Remedy Case Cause/Remedy

There may be times when a complex variety Any performance that has been recorded is
of information is being displayed or when a deleted when the power to the KR is turned
Movement of large amount of data is displayed at one off or a song is selected. A performance
The recorded
time. Change the notation display settings as cannot be restored once it’s been deleted.
notation or performance has
described below (p. 76). Be sure to save it on an external memory or
keyboard display disappeared
- Set “Bouncing Ball” to “Off” User Memory before you turn off the
not smooth - Set “Color Notation” to “Off” power
- Set “Keyboard” to “Off” (p. 102).
- Set “External Display (p. 158)” to “Panel”

In certain cases, such as when playing

Song becomes songs on external memories, the song may
unstable lag when excessive amounts of
performance data are used.

Unable to play
Have you pressed the remote control’s
back internal
[MUTE] button, muting the sound?
songs

The KR107 can play back audio files in the

following format.
Unable to play • “.WAV” extension
back audio files • 16bit linear
• Sampling rate of “44.1 kHz”
• Stereo

Can’t record
Has one of the track buttons for recording
been selected? (p. 96)

Has the setting for “Punch-in Recording”

(p. 119) or “Tempo Recording” (p. 128)
been made?
Select the replace recording method (p.
118).
Can’t record
It is not possible to record while the
notation is being generated. Once the unit
has finished generating the notation (i.e.,
when the measure number in the screen is
no longer highlighted), try the operation
once again.

You cannot overdub with audio files.

If you select an internal song in which the

tempo changes during the song, and then
record, the tempo will change in the same
way for the performances that are recorded
on the other tracks. The tempo of the
Tempo of recorded metronome will also change in the same
song or way.
metronome is off
If you record additional material without
erasing the previously recorded song, the
song will be recorded at the first-recorded
Appendices

tempo. Please erase the previously

recorded song before you re-record (p. 97).

170
KR107_e.book 171 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Error Messages

Indication Meaning

Error 01: You can only read the music file. It can not be saved.

An error occurred during writing. The storage media’s protect tab may be in the “Protect” (writing
Error 02:
prohibited) position, or the storage media may not yet be initialized.

No storage media is inserted.

Error 10:
Insert the storage media and try again.

There is not sufficient free memory in the save destination.

Error 11:
Either insert other storage media or delete unneeded files and try again.

An error occurred during writing. The storage media may be corrupted.

Error 14:
Insert other storage media and try again. Alternatively, you can initialize the storage media.

The file is unreadable.

Error 15:
The data format is not compatible with the KR107.

Data was not called up in time for playback of the song.

Error 16:
After waiting several seconds, you may be able to play back the song by pressing the [ ] button again.

The selected image data cannot be displayed.

Error 17:
Prepare image data that can be used with the KR107 (p. 147).

Error 30: The internal memory capacity of the KR107 is full.

The KR107 cannot deal with the excessive MIDI data sent from the external MIDI device.
Error 40:
Reduce the amount of MIDI data sent to the KR107.

A MIDI cable has been disconnected.

Error 41:
Connect it properly and securely.

A MIDI transmission error has occurred.

Error 43:
Check the MIDI cable and connected MIDI device.

There may be a problem with the system.

Error 51: Repeat the procedure from the beginning. If it is not solved after you have tried several times, contact the
Roland service center.

The Ext Memory port was subjected to excessive current.

Error 65:
Check the storage media to confirm that no damage has occurred to it.

Appendices

171
 KR107_e.book 172 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Tone List
[Piano] Ballad Bells Fretless Bs. Slow Strings French Horns
Bell Monitor Nylon Guitar SlowStrings2 French Horn2
NaturalGrand Timeline Requint Gtr Legato Str OrchestraBrs
Vintage EP Vibra Bells EX Ac.Guitar Warm Strings Brass 1
FM E.Piano Steel-str.Gt Sahara Str Brass 2
Natural Hps. [Organ] 12-str.Gt Decay Str2 BrassSection
Vibraphone Steel + Body Tremolo Str PowerBrass
Ariel Piano ChurchOrgan1
Nylon+Steel Orchestra Pop Orch
Natural Gnd2 Combo Jz.Org
EX A.Guitar3 Orchestra 2 Contemp'Orch
Honky-tonk Ballad Organ
Steel Vox Farewell Brass sfz
'60sE.Piano1 German Acco.
Ukulele Choir Str Brass Fall
Phase Clav.2 Blues Harp
Hawaiian Gt Bell Strings Trumpet Fall
Morning Lite L-Organ
Clean Gt. Pearly Harp EX Alto Sax
Jazzy Vib+Gt Jazz Organ1
JC Clean Gt. Harp AltoSax + Tp
Piano Str2 Masked Opera
Mid Tone GTR St. Harp Alto Sax
Piano Oohs Grand Pipe
TC Rear Pick Viola Grow Sax
Rock Piano Theater Org.
Acid Guitar Contrabass BreathyTenor
NaturalMello La Seine
Open Hard Santur Tenor Sax
Stage EP ParisRomance
Feedback Gt. Yang Qin Tenor Sax 2
Stage Phazer Mellow Bars
Power Guitar Yang Qin 2 Tenor Sax f
Vibrations Organ 1
Guitar Pinch Er Hu Tenor Sax B
Celesta Organ 2
Mystic Gtr Soft Pad Baritone Sax
Marimba Lower Organ1
Funk Gt. Soft Pad 2 English Horn
Xylophone Trem. Organ
Funk Gt.2 Syn.Strings1 Bassoon
NaturalC.Hps '70s E.Organ
Muted Gt. Syn.Strings2 Piccolo
Clav. '60s Organ
Muted Dis.Gt Syn.Slow Str Flute 2
Music Box Jazz Organ2
Rock Rhythm OB Strings Recorder
Glockenspiel Jazz Organ3
Dist Rtm GTR JP Saw Str Bottle Blow
Grand Piano1 Jazz Organ4
Wah Brush Gt Timpani Shakuhachi
Grand Piano2 Chorus Organ
Wood Bass Warm JP Str Whistle
MellowPiano1 Perc. Organ
W.Bass+Ride OrchestraHit Ocarina
PianoStrings Rock Organ1
Rockabilly Good Old Hit Bagpipe
Bright Piano Rotary Organ
Finger Slap Euro Hit Lochscape
DetunedPiano Rotary Org.S
Mr.Smooth 6th Hit Andes Mood
Honky-tonk 2 Rotary Org.F
Slap Bass 1 Bass Hit HimalayaPipe
MellowPiano2 ChurchOrgan2
Slap Bass 2 Philly Hit Wide SynBrss
PianoKidsCho Pipe Organ
Synth Bass 1 Philly Hit 2 DeepSynBrass
Air Grand Trem.Flute
Jungle Bass Mix Hit 1 Jump Brass
Ballad Piano Organ Flute
Hammer Mix Hit 2 Saw Brass1
UprightPiano Nason flt 8'
SynthBass101 Saw Brass2
Organ Bass
Mono Piano
Pipe Org. Bs
ResoSH Bass [Sax/Brass] Synth Brass1
FM+SA EP Acid Bass Synth Brass2
MIDI Piano1 Digi Church BlowAltoVib
Clavi Bass DetuneSawBrs
EG+E.Piano 1 VS Organ PowerBrass 2
Synth Bass 2 Pro Brass
EG+E.Piano 2 Metalic Org. Sax Section
Beef FM Bass SynBrass sfz
Bell Piano CheeseOrgan Flute
Attack Pulse
Accordion Fr Good Old Day
E. Grand
AccordionFr2
Rubber Bass
Brass Sect 2
[Voice]
Mild E.Grand Sitar
Soft E.Piano Accordion It EX Tp&Shake Aerial Choir
Sitar 2
Phase EP Bright Acco. Super Tenor Jazz Scat
Banjo
E.Piano 1 Soft Acco. AltoSax Soft Kid's Choir
Shamisen
Pop E.Piano Bandoneon Soprano Sax Dreaming Box
Koto
Tremolo EP Harmonica Clarinet Rich Choir
Taisho Koto
'60sE.Piano2 Oboe Angels Choir
E.Piano 2 [Guitar / Bass] [Strings] EX Trumpet Boys Choir
EP Phase Flugel Horn Opera Voice
EX Nylon Gtr
St.FM EP DolceStrings Pan Flute Mellow Choir
EX Steel Gt.
EP Legend Velo Strings Qu Di Holy Voices
Jazz Guitar2
Harpsichord Dolce Qrt SuperF.Horns Mystic Str
Fl.Gtr Roll
Coupled Hps. Lunar Strngs Angel Pipes Trancy X
Mandolin
Harpsichord2 R&B SoftPad Trumpet HPF Slicer
JC Chorus Gt
Comp Clav. Wind & Str Tp Shake Side Band X
TC Clean ff
Reso Clav. Aerial Harp Bright Tp. Glasswaves
Overdrive Gt
Phase Clav. Violin Warm Tp. Church Choir
DistortionGt
Pulse Clav Cello Dark Trumpet Voice Oohs
Amore Story
Celesta 2 Harp Strings Romantic Tp Voice Oohs 2
EX A.Guitar2
Soft Marimba Mellow Str Trombone Choir Hahs
Uncle Martin
Vibe Tr. EX Orchestra Trombone 2 Decay Choir
Flamenco Gtr
Marimba Tr. Slow Violin Twin bones Doos Voice
Jazz Guitar
Kalimba PizzicatoStr Bones Sect. Doot Accent
Appendices

Wild Ac.Bs
Music Box 2 Strings Bright Tb. Dat Accent
A.Bass+Cymbl
Music Bell Oct Strings Tuba Bap Accent
Acoustic Bs.
Music Bell 2 Strings 2 MutedTrumpet Thum Voice
Fingered Bs.
Tubular-bell DecayStrings MuteTrumpet2 Humming
Picked Bass
Church Bell Bright Str MuteTrumpet3 SynVox

172
KR107_e.book 173 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Tone List

Analog Voice Warm SquPad Glockenspiel Choir Fiddle

InfinitePhsr Voyager Music Box Pop Voice Shanai
X Super Saws Film Cue Vibraphone SynVox Tinkle Bell
Fat Stacks HumanKindnes Vibe.w OrchestraHit Agogo
Frgile Saws Bowed Glass Marimba Trumpet Steel Drums
SuperSawSlow Metal Pad Marimba w Trombone Woodblock
Electrostars Orbiting Xylophone Trombone 2 Castanets
Bending Logo Visionary Tubular-bell Tuba Taiko
2600 Sine Halo Pad Church Bell MutedTrumpet Concert BD
Square Wave JP8 Sqr Pad Carillon French Horns Melo. Tom 1
Mg Square Vox Sweep Santur French Horn2 Melo. Tom 2
JP8 Square Consolament Organ 1 Brass 1 Synth Drum
LM Square JP-8 Phase Organ 2 Brass 2 808 Tom
Syn.Square Sweep Pad Pop Organ 1 Synth Brass1 Elec Perc.
CC Solo Sweep Pad 2 Detuned Or.1 Synth Brass2 Reverse Cym.
Sleeper Ice Rain Detuned Or.2 Synth Brass3 Gt.FretNoise
Dual Sqr&Saw Clavi Pad Church Org.1 Synth Brass4 Gt.Cut Noise
Jupiter Lead Toy Box Church Org.2 AnalogBrass1 String Slap
Sinetific Soundtrack Church Org.3 AnalogBrass2 Breath Noise
FM Lead 1 Crystal Full Organ Soprano Sax Fl.Key Click
FM Lead 2 Syn Mallet Jazz Organ1 Alto Sax Seashore
Saw Wave ChristmasBel Rock Organ Tenor Sax Rain
Saw Clear Bells Reed Organ Baritone Sax Thunder
Doctor Solo Himalaya Ice Accordion Fr Oboe Wind
Mg Lead Glittery Pad Accordion It English Horn Stream
P5 Saw Lead Atmosphere Harmonica Bassoon Bubble
JP SuperSaw Harpvox Bandoneon Clarinet Bird
Rhythmic Saw Nylon Harp Nylon-str.Gt Piccolo Dog
Natural Lead Nylon + EP Nylon Gt.2 Flute Horse-Gallop
SequencedSaw HollowReleas Nylon Gt.o Recorder Bird 2
Waspy Synth Tubulence Ukulele Pan Flute Telephone 1
Velo SawLead Landing Pad Steel-str.Gt Bottle Blow Telephone 2
Attack Lead Shangri-La 12-str.Gt Shakuhachi DoorCreaking
DelyResoSaws Motion Pad Mandolin Whistle Door
Wezcoast Brightness Jazz Guitar Ocarina Scratch
Syn.Calliope Org Bells Hawaiian Gt Square Wave Windchime
JP8 Pulse Goblin Clean Gt. Square Helicopter
LM PureLead Saturn Siren Chorus Gt. Sine Wave Car-Engine
Orgaenia RandomEnding Muted Gt. Saw Wave Car-Stop
Chiffer Lead Echo Drops Funk Gt. Saw Car-Pass
Cheese Saw Echo Bell Funk Gt.2 Doctor Solo Car-Crash
JP OctAttack Echo Pan Overdrive Gt Syn.Calliope Siren
Charang Echo Pan 2 DistortionGt Chiffer Lead Train
Reso Saw Big Panner Feedback Gt. Charang Jetplane
Wire Lead Ai-yai-a Gt.Harmonics Solo Vox Starship
2600 SubOsc Saturn Rings Gt. Feedback 5th Saw Wave Burst Noise
Solo Vox Star Theme Acoustic Bs. Bass & Lead Applause
RAVE Vox Rising Osc Fingered Bs. Fantasia Laughing
5th Saw Wave Galaxy Way Picked Bs. Warm Pad Screaming
Freeze Synth 12th Planet Fretless Bs. Polysynth Punch
Bass & Lead PolySweep Nz Slap Bass 1 Space Voice Heart Beat
Fat & Perky En-co-re Slap Bass 2 Bowed Glass Footsteps
Delayed Lead Piano 1 SynthBass101 Metal Pad Gun Shot
Fantasia Piano 1w Synth Bass 1 Halo Pad Machine Gun
Fantasia 2 Piano 1d Synth Bass 2 Sweep Pad Lasergun
New Age Pad Piano 2 Synth Bass 3 Ice Rain Explosion
New Age Pad2 Piano 2w Synth Bass 4 Soundtrack
Sugar Key Piano 3 Rubber Bass Crystal
FreezinNight Piano 3w Violin Syn Mallet
New Year Day Honky-tonk Slow Violin Atmosphere
Warm Pad Honky-tonk 2 Viola Brightness
Sine Pad E.Piano 1 Cello Goblin
Nu Epic Pad E.Piano 2 Contrabass Echo Drops
Hollow Pad '60s E.Piano Tremolo Str Echo Bell
Decay Pad E.Piano 1v PizzicatoStr Echo Pan
Polysynth E.Piano 2v Harp Star Theme
P5 Poly Detuned EP 1 Timpani Sitar
Poly King Detuned EP 2 Strings Sitar 2
Octave Stack Harpsichord Orchestra Banjo
Appendices

Hoovercraft Coupled Hps. Slow Strings Shamisen

DOC Stack Harpsi.w Syn.Strings1 Koto
Bustranza Harpsi.o Syn.Strings2 Taisho Koto
Space Voice Clav. Syn.Strings3 Kalimba
Heaven II Celesta Choir Aahs Bagpipe

173
 KR107_e.book 174 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Drum Set List

* -----: No sound. instruments of the same number.
* [EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion

POP ROCK JAZZBRUSH HIP HOP VOX DRUM

21 R&B Snare R&B Snare R&B Snare Jungle BD 2 R&B Snare
22 Rock Snare m 1 Pop Snare m 2 Pop Snare m 1 Metronome E.Click Rock Snare m 1
23
Rock Snare m 2 Pop Snare m 1 Pop Snare m 2 Metronome Pi Rock Snare m 2
24 Pop Snare m 1 Pop Snare m 1 Pop Snare m 1 Concert SD Pop Snare m 1
25 Pop Snare Ghost Pop Snare Ghost Pop Snare Ghost Snare Roll Pop Snare Ghost
26 Pop Snare m 1 Pop Snare m 2 Pop Snare m 1 Finger Snap Pop Snare m 1
27 Finger Snap Finger Snap 2 Finger Snap 2 High Q Finger Snap
28 TR-707 Claps TR-707 Claps TR-707 Claps Slap TR-707 Claps
29
Hand Clap [EXC7] Hand Clap [EXC7] Hand Clap [EXC7] Scratch Push [EXC7] Hand Clap [EXC7]
30 Hand Clap 2 [EXC7] Hand Clap 2 [EXC7] Hand Clap 2 [EXC7] Scratch Pull [EXC7] Hand Clap 2 [EXC7]
31 Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Sticks Hand Clap
32 Pop Pedal HH [EXC1] Pop Pedal HH [EXC1] Pop Pedal HH [EXC1] Square Click Pop Pedal HH
33 Gospel Hand Clap Gospel Hand Clap Gospel Hand Clap Metronome Click Gospel Hand Clap
34 Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Roll Metronome Bell Vox Dut
35
Pop Kick 2 Rock Kick 2 Jazz Kick 2 Jungle BD 2 Vox Dom
C2 36 Pop Kick 1 Rock Kick 1 Jazz Kick 1 HipHop BD1 Vox Tuush
37 Pop Side Stick Rock Side Stick Jazz Snare Swing 1 TR-808 Rimshot Vox Hehho
38 Pop Snare s 1 Rock Snare s 1 Jazz Snare 1 Power Snare 1A Vox Doyear
39 Pop Snare Ghost Pop Snare Ghost Jazz Snare Swing 2 TR-707 Clap Vox Thu!
40 Pop Snare s 2 Rock Snare s 2 Jazz Snare 2 Power Snare 2A Vox That
41
Pop Low Tom f Rock Low Tom f Jazz Low Tom f Low Tom 2 Vox Aahhh
42 Pop CHH 1 [EXC1] Rock CHH 1 [EXC1] Pop CHH 1 [EXC1] Pop CHH 1 [EXC1] Vox Tu
43 Pop Low Tom Rock Low Tom Jazz Low Tom Low Tom 1 Vox Dooh
44 Pop CHH 2 [EXC1] Rock CHH 2 [EXC1] Pop CHH 2 [EXC1] Pedal Hi-hat 3 [EXC1] Vox Ptu
45 Pop Mid Tom f Rock Mid Tom f Jazz Mid Tom f Mid Tom 2 Vox Down
46 Pop OHH [EXC1] Rock OHH [EXC1] Pop OHH [EXC1] Pop OHH [EXC1] Vox Pa
47
Pop Mid Tom Rock Mid Tom Jazz Mid Tom Mid Tom 1 Vox Bom
C3 48 Pop High Tom f Rock High Tom f Jazz High Tom f High Tom 2 Vox Toear
49 Pop Crash Cymbal 1 Rock Crash Cymbal Jazz Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 3 Vox Aahhu
50 Pop High Tom Rock High Tom Jazz High Tom High Tom 1 Vox Toya
51 Pop Ride Cymbal 1 Rock Ride Cymbal 1 Jazz Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Vox Thu
52 Pop Chinees Cymbal Pop Chinees Cymbal Jazz Chinees Cymbal Reverse Cymbal Vox Cheey
53
Pop Ride Bell Pop Ride Bell Jazz Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Bell Vox Cymm
54 Tambourine 2 Tambourine 2 Tambourine 2 Shake Tambourine Vox Tub
55 Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Vox Pruru
56 Cha Cha CowBell Cha Cha CowBell Cha Cha CowBell TR-808 Cowbell Vox Tut
57 Pop Crash Cymbal 2 Chinees Cymbal Jazz Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Vox Tyun
58 Vibra-slap Vibra-slap Vibra-slap Vibra-slap Vox Tdum
59
Pop Ride Cymbal 2 Pop Ride Cymbal 3 Jazz Ride Cymbal 3 Ride Cymbal 2 Vox Afahhhh
C4 60 High Bongo 1 High Bongo 1 High Bongo 1 High Bongo 2 High Bongo 1
61 Low Bongo 1 Low Bongo 1 Low Bongo 1 Low Bongo 2 Low Bongo 1
62 Mute High Conga 1 Mute High Conga 1 Mute High Conga 1 Mute High Conga 2 Mute High Conga 1
63 Open High Conga 1 Open High Conga 1 Open High Conga 1 Open High Conga 2 Open High Conga 1
64 Low Conga 1 Low Conga 1 Low Conga 1 Low Conga 2 Low Conga 1
65
High Timbale High Timbale High Timbale High Timbale High Timbale
66 Low Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale
67 High Agogo High Agogo High Agogo High Agogo High Agogo
68 Low Agogo Low Agogo Low Agogo Low Agogo Low Agogo
69 Shaker 3 Shaker 3 Shaker 3 Cabasa Shaker 3
70 Shaker 4 Shaker 4 Shaker 4 Maracas Shaker 4
71
Short Hi Whistle [EXC2] Short Hi Whistle [EXC2] Short Hi Whistle [EXC2] Short Hi Whistle [EXC2] Short Hi Whistle [EXC2]
C5 72 Long Low Whistle [EXC2] Long Low Whistle [EXC2] Long Low Whistle [EXC2] Long Low Whistle [EXC2] Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
73 Short Guiro [EXC3] Short Guiro [EXC3] Short Guiro [EXC3] Short Guiro [EXC3] Short Guiro [EXC3]
74 Long Guiro [EXC3] Long Guiro [EXC3] Long Guiro [EXC3] HipVibraslap [EXC3] Long Guiro [EXC3]
75 Claves Claves Claves TR-808 Claves Claves
76 High Wood Block High Wood Block High Wood Block High Wood Block High Wood Block
77
Low Wood Block Low Wood Block Low Wood Block Low Wood Block Low Wood Block
78 Mute Cuica [EXC4] Mute Cuica [EXC4] Mute Cuica [EXC4] High Hoo [EXC4] Mute Cuica [EXC4]
79 Open Cuica [EXC4] Open Cuica [EXC4] Open Cuica [EXC4] Low Hoo [EXC4] Open Cuica [EXC4]
80 Mute Triangle1 [EXC5] Mute Triangle1 [EXC5] Mute Triangle1 [EXC5] Mute Triangle2 [EXC5] Mute Triangle1 [EXC5]
81 Open Triangle 1 [EXC5] Open Triangle 1 [EXC5] Open Triangle 1 [EXC5] Open Triangle 2 [EXC5] Open Triangle 1 [EXC5]
82 Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker
83
Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell
C6 84 Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree
85 Castanets Castanets Castanets Castanets Castanets
86 Mute Surdo [EXC6] Mute Surdo [EXC6] Mute Surdo [EXC6] Mute Surdo [EXC6] Mute Surdo [EXC6]
87 Open Surdo [EXC6] Open Surdo [EXC6] Open Surdo [EXC6] Open Surdo [EXC6] Open Surdo [EXC6]
88 Cana Cana Cana Applause 2 Cana
89 Hi-Timbale Flam Hi-Timbale Flam Hi-Timbale Flam HipHop SD 2 Hi-Timbale Flam
90 Lo-Timbale Flam Lo-Timbale Flam Lo-Timbale Flam LoFi SD Rim Lo-Timbale Flam
91 Timbale Phrase Timbale Phrase Timbale Phrase TR-808 Clap Timbale Phrase
92 Shekere 1 Shekere 1 Shekere 1 Room Snare 1 Shekere 1
93 Shekere 2 Shekere 2 Shekere 2 Standard 1 Snare 2A Shekere 2
94 Low Bongo Mute Low Bongo Mute Low Bongo Mute Room Snare 2 Low Bongo Mute
95
High Bongo Mute High Bongo Mute High Bongo Mute Standard 1 Snare 1 High Bongo Mute
C7 96 ---- ---- ---- Standard 1 Snare 2B ----
97 ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
98 ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
99 ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
100 Flamenco Hand Clap Flamenco Hand Clap Flamenco Hand Clap ---- Flamenco Hand Clap
101 Flamenco Hand Clap Flamenco Hand Clap Flamenco Hand Clap ---- Flamenco Hand Clap
102 Bongo CowBell Bongo CowBell Bongo CowBell ---- Bongo CowBell
103 ---- ---- ---- Tape Rewind ----
104 Bongo CowBell Bongo CowBell Bongo CowBell Phono Noise Bongo CowBell
Appendices

105 ---- ---- ---- Room Snare 1 ----

106 ---- ---- ---- Room Snare 2A ----
107
---- ---- ---- Elec Snare 4A ----
C8 108 ---- ---- ---- Elec Snare 4B ----

174
KR107_e.book 175 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Drum Set List

* -----: No sound.
* [EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number.

STD CHINA STANDARD 1 STANDARD 2 STANDARD 3 ROOM

21 ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
22 ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
23
---- ---- ---- ---- ----
24 Bar Chime Bar Chime Bar Chime Bar Chime Bar Chime
25 Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Roll
26 Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap
27 High Q High Q High Q High Q High Q
28 Slap Slap Slap Slap Slap
29
Scratch Push [EXC7] Scratch Push [EXC7] Scratch Push [EXC7] Scratch Push [EXC7] Scratch Push [EXC7]
30 Scratch Pull [EXC7] Scratch Pull [EXC7] Scratch Pull [EXC7] Scratch Pull [EXC7] Scratch Pull [EXC7]
31 Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks
32 Square Click Square Click Square Click Square Click Square Click
33 Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click
34 Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell
35
Standard 1 Kick 1 Standard 1 Kick 1 Standard 2 Kick 2 Standard 3 Kick 2 Room Kick 2
C2 36 Standard 1 Kick 2 Standard 1 Kick 2 Standard 2 Kick 1 Standard 3 Kick 1 Room Kick 1
37 Side Stick 1 Side Stick 1 Side Stick 2 Side Stick 2 Side Stick 2
38 Standard 1 Snare 1 Standard 1 Snare 1 Standard 2 Snare 1 Standard 3 Snare 1 Room Snare 1
39 TR-909 Clap TR-909 Clap TR-808 Clap TR-808 Clap TR-808 Clap
40 Standard 1 Snare 2 Standard 1 Snare 2 Standard 2 Snare 2 Standard 3 Snare 2 Room Snare 2
41
Low Tom 2 Low Tom 2 Low Tom 2 Low Tom 2 Room Low Tom 2
42 Close Hi-hat1 [EXC1] Close Hi-hat1 [EXC1] Closed Hi-hat 2 [EXC1] Closed Hi-hat 3 [EXC1] Closed Hi-hat 4 [EXC1]
43 Low Tom 1 Low Tom 1 Low Tom 1 Low Tom 1 Room Low Tom 1
44 Pedal Hi-hat 1 [EXC1] Pedal Hi-hat 1 [EXC1] Pedal Hi-hat 2 [EXC1] Pedal Hi-hat 2 [EXC1] Pedal Hi-hat 2 [EXC1]
45 Mid Tom 2 Mid Tom 2 Mid Tom 2 Mid Tom 2 Room Mid Tom 2
46 Open Hi-hat 1 [EXC1] Open Hi-hat 1 [EXC1] Open Hi-hat 2 [EXC1] Open Hi-hat 3 [EXC1] Open Hi-hat 4 [EXC1]
47
Mid Tom 1 Mid Tom 1 Mid Tom 1 Mid Tom 1 Room Mid Tom 1
C3 48 High Tom 2 High Tom 2 High Tom 2 High Tom 2 Room High Tom 2
49 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1
50 High Tom 1 High Tom 1 High Tom 1 High Tom 1 Room High Tom 1
51 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1
52 Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal
53
Ride Bell Ride Bell Ride Bell Ride Bell Ride Bell
54 Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine
55 Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal
56 Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell
57 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2
58 Vibra-slap Vibra-slap Vibra-slap Vibra-slap Vibra-slap
59
Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2
C4 60 ---- High Bongo 1 High Bongo 1 High Bongo 1 High Bongo 1
61 ---- Low Bongo 1 Low Bongo 1 Low Bongo 1 Low Bongo 1
62 ---- Mute High Conga 1 Mute High Conga 1 Mute High Conga 1 Mute High Conga 1
63 Cana Open High Conga 1 Open High Conga 1 Open High Conga 1 Open High Conga 1
64 Ban Gu 1 Low Conga 1 Low Conga 1 Low Conga 1 Low Conga 1
65
Taiko 1 High Timbale High Timbale High Timbale High Timbale
66 Nao Bo [EXC8] Low Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale
67 Taiko 2 High Agogo High Agogo High Agogo High Agogo
68 Xiao Bo 1 [EXC8] Low Agogo Low Agogo Low Agogo Low Agogo
69 Taiko 3 Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa
70 Open High HuYinLuo 2 [EXC8] Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas
71
Taiko 4 Short Hi Whistle [EXC2] Short Hi Whistle [EXC2] Short Hi Whistle [EXC2] Short Hi Whistle [EXC2]
C5 72 Taiko 5 Long Low Whistle [EXC2] Long Low Whistle [EXC2] Long Low Whistle [EXC2] Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
73 Open High HuYinLuo 1 Short Guiro [EXC3] Short Guiro [EXC3] Short Guiro [EXC3] Short Guiro [EXC3]
74 Taiko 6 Long Guiro [EXC3] Long Guiro [EXC3] Long Guiro [EXC3] Long Guiro [EXC3]
75 Shou Luo 1 Claves Claves Claves Claves
76 Mute Low HuYinLuo 2 High Wood Block High Wood Block High Wood Block High Wood Block
77
Shou Luo 2 Low Wood Block Low Wood Block Low Wood Block Low Wood Block
78 Xiao Bo 2 Mute Cuica [EXC4] Mute Cuica [EXC4] Mute Cuica [EXC4] Mute Cuica [EXC4]
79 Ban Gu 2 Open Cuica [EXC4] Open Cuica [EXC4] Open Cuica [EXC4] Open Cuica [EXC4]
80 Xiao Bo 3 Mute Triangle1 [EXC5] Mute Triangle1 [EXC5] Mute Triangle1 [EXC5] Mute Triangle1 [EXC5]
81 Open High HuYinLuo 3 Open Triangle 1 [EXC5] Open Triangle 1 [EXC5] Open Triangle 1 [EXC5] Open Triangle 1 [EXC5]
82 Mute High HuYinLuo Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker
83
Mute Low HuYinLuo 1 Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell
C6 84 ---- Bell Tree Bell Tree Bar Chime Bell Tree
85 ---- Castanets Castanets Castanets Castanets
86 ---- Mute Surdo [EXC6] Mute Surdo [EXC6] Mute Surdo [EXC6] Mute Surdo [EXC6]
87 ---- Open Surdo [EXC6] Open Surdo [EXC6] Open Surdo [EXC6] Open Surdo [EXC6]
88 ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
89 ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
90 ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
91 ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
92 ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
93 ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
94 ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
95
---- ---- ---- ---- ----
C7 96 ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
97 Open Sagat ---- ---- ---- ----
98 Close Sagat ---- ---- ---- ----
Appendices

99 Ban Gu 1 ---- ---- ---- ----

100 Ban Gu 3 ---- ---- ---- ----
101 ---- ---- ---- ---- ----

175
 KR107_e.book 176 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Drum Set List

* -----: No sound.
* [EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number.

POWER ELECTRONIC TR-808/909 DANCE

21 ---- ---- ---- ----

22 ---- ---- ---- ----
23 ----
---- ---- ----
24 Bar Chime Bar Chime Bar Chime Bar Chime
25 Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Roll
26 Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap
27 High Q High Q High Q High Q
28 Slap Slap Slap Slap
Scratch Push [EXC7] Scratch Push 2 [EXC7] Scratch Push 2 [EXC7] Scratch Push 2 [EXC7]
29
30 Scratch Pull [EXC7] Scratch Pull 2 [EXC7] Scratch Pull 2 [EXC7] Scratch Pull 2 [EXC7]
31 Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks
32 Square Click Square Click Square Click Square Click
33 Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click
34 Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell
35 TR-808 Kick 2
Power Kick2 Elec Kick 2 TR-909 Kick
C2 36 Power Kick1 Elec Kick 1 TR-808 Kick HipHop BD1
37 Side Stick 2 Side Stick 2 TR-808 Rimshot Side Stick 2
38 Dance Snare1 Elec Snare 1 TR-808 Snare 1 Power Snare 2
39 TR-808 Clap TR-808 Clap TR-808 Clap TR-808 Clap
40 Power Snare 1 Elec Snare 2 TR-909 Snare 1 Elec Snare 3
Power Low Tom 2 Elec Low Tom 2 TR-808 Low Tom 2 Elec Low Tom 2
41
42 Closed Hi-hat 4 [EXC1] Closed Hi-hat 3 [EXC1] TR-808 CHH [EXC1] CR-78 CHH [EXC1]
43 Power Low Tom 1 Elec Low Tom 1 TR-808 Low Tom 1 Elec Low Tom 1
44 Pedal Hi-hat 2 [EXC1] Pedal Hi-hat 2 [EXC1] TR-808 CHH [EXC1] TR-808 CHH [EXC1]
45 Power Mid Tom 2 Elec Mid Tom 2 TR-808 Mid Tom 2 Elec Mid Tom 2
46 Open Hi-hat 4 [EXC1] Open Hi-hat 3 [EXC1] TR-808 OHH [EXC1] CR-78 OHH [EXC1]
47 Elec Mid Tom 1
Power Mid Tom 1 Elec Mid Tom 1 TR-808 Mid Tom 1
C3 48 Power High Tom 2 Elec High Tom 2 TR-808 High Tom 2 Elec High Tom 2
49 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 TR-808 Cymbal Crash Cymbal 1
50 Power High Tom 1 Elec High Tom 1 TR-808 High Tom 1 Elec High Tom 1
51 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1
52 Chinese Cymbal Reverse Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Reverse Cymbal
Ride Bell Ride Bell Ride Bell Ride Bell
53
54 Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine
55 Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal
56 Cowbell Cowbell TR-808 Cowbell TR-808 Cowbell
57 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2
58 Vibra-slap Vibra-slap Vibra-slap Vibra-slap
59 Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2
C4 60 High Bongo 1 High Bongo 1 High Bongo 1 High Bongo 1
61 Low Bongo 1 Low Bongo 1 Low Bongo 1 Low Bongo 1
62 Mute High Conga 1 Mute High Conga 1 TR-808 High Conga Mute High Conga 1
63 Open High Conga 1 Open High Conga 1 TR-808 Mid Conga Open High Conga 1
64 Low Conga 1 Low Conga 1 TR-808 Low Conga Low Conga 1
High Timbale High Timbale High Timbale High Timbale
65
66 Low Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale
67 High Agogo High Agogo High Agogo High Agogo
68 Low Agogo Low Agogo Low Agogo Low Agogo
69 Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa
70 Maracas Maracas TR-808 Maracas TR-808 Maracas
71 Short Hi Whistle [EXC2]
Short Hi Whistle [EXC2] Short Hi Whistle [EXC2] Short Hi Whistle [EXC2]
C5 72 Long Low Whistle [EXC2] Long Low Whistle [EXC2] Long Low Whistle [EXC2] Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
73 Short Guiro [EXC3] Short Guiro [EXC3] Short Guiro [EXC3] Short Guiro [EXC3]
74 Long Guiro [EXC3] Long Guiro [EXC3] Long Guiro [EXC3] Long Guiro [EXC3]
75 Claves Claves TR-808 Claves TR-808 Claves
76 High Wood Block High Wood Block High Wood Block High Wood Block
Low Wood Block Low Wood Block Low Wood Block Low Wood Block
77
78 Mute Cuica [EXC4] Mute Cuica [EXC4] Mute Cuica [EXC4] High Hoo [EXC4]
79 Open Cuica [EXC4] Open Cuica [EXC4] Open Cuica [EXC4] Low Hoo [EXC4]
80 Mute Triangle1 [EXC5] Mute Triangle1 [EXC5] Mute Triangle1 [EXC5] Mute Triangle1 [EXC5]
81 Open Triangle 1 [EXC5] Open Triangle 1 [EXC5] Open Triangle 1 [EXC5] Open Triangle 1 [EXC5]
82 Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker
83 Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell
Appendices

C6 84 Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree

85 Castanets Castanets Castanets Castanets
86 Mute Surdo [EXC6] Mute Surdo [EXC6] Mute Surdo [EXC6] Mute Surdo [EXC6]
87 Open Surdo [EXC6] Open Surdo [EXC6] Open Surdo [EXC6] Open Surdo [EXC6]
88 ---- ---- ---- ----

176
KR107_e.book 177 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Drum Set List

* -----: No sound.
* [EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number.

■ SFX Set
JAZZ BRUSH ORCHESTRA SFX Set
21 ----- ----- ----- -----
22 ----- ----- ----- -----
23
----- ----- ----- -----
24 Bar Chime Bar Chime Bar Chime -----
25 Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Roll -----
26 Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap -----
27 High Q High Q Closed Hi-hat 3 [EXC1] -----
28 Slap Slap Pedal Hi-hat 2 [EXC1] -----
Scratch Push [EXC7] Scratch Push [EXC7] Open Hi-hat 3 [EXC1] -----
29
30 Scratch Pull [EXC7] Scratch Pull [EXC7] Ride Cymbal 1 -----
31 Sticks Sticks Sticks -----
32 Square Click Square Click Square Click -----
33 Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click -----
34 Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell -----
35 -----
Jazz Kick 2 Jazz Kick 2 Jazz Kick 1
C2 36 Jazz Kick 1 Jazz Kick 1 Concert BD -----
37 Side Stick 2 Side Stick 2 Side Stick 2 -----
38 Jazz Snare 1 Brush Tap Concert SD -----
39 Hand Clap 3 Brush Slap Castanets High Q
40 Standard 2 Snare 2 Brush Swirl Concert SD Slap
Low Tom 2 Brush Low Tom 2 Timpani F Scratch Push [EXC7]
41
42 Closed Hi-hat 3 [EXC1] Brush Closed Hi-hat [EXC1] Timpani F# Scratch Pull [EXC7]
43 Low Tom 1 Brush Low Tom 1 Timpani G Sticks
44 Pedal Hi-hat 2 [EXC1] Pedal Hi-hat 2 [EXC1] Timpani G# Square Click
45 Mid Tom 2 Brush Mid Tom 2 Timpani A Metronome Click
46 Open Hi-hat 3 [EXC1] Brush Open Hi-hat [EXC1] Timpani A# Metronome Bell
47 Guitar sliding Finger
Mid Tom 1 Brush Mid Tom 1 Timpani B
C3 48 High Tom 2 Brush High Tom 2 Timpani c Guitar cutting noise (up)
49 Crash Cymbal 1 Brush Crash Cymbal Timpani c# Guitar cutting noise (down)
50 High Tom 1 Brush High Tom 1 Timpani d String slap of double bass
51 Ride Cymbal 1 Brush Ride Cymbal Timpani d# Fl.Key Click
52 Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Timpani e Laughing
Ride Bell Brush Ride Bell Timpani f Screaming
53
54 Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Punch
55 Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Heart Beat
56 Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Footsteps1
57 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Concert Cymbal 2 Footsteps2
58 Vibra-slap Vibra-slap Vibra-slap Applause
59 Door Creaking
Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Concert Cymbal 1
C4 60 High Bongo 1 High Bongo 1 High Bongo 1 Door
61 Low Bongo 1 Low Bongo 1 Low Bongo 1 Scratch
62 Mute High Conga 1 Mute High Conga 1 Mute High Conga 1 Wind Chimes
63 Open High Conga 1 Open High Conga 1 Open High Conga 1 Car-Engine
64 Low Conga 1 Low Conga 1 Low Conga 1 Car-Stop
High Timbale High Timbale High Timbale Car-Pass
65
66 Low Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale Car-Crash
67 High Agogo High Agogo High Agogo Siren
68 Low Agogo Low Agogo Low Agogo Train
69 Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Jetplane
70 Maracas Maracas Maracas Helicopter
71 Starship
Short Hi Whistle [EXC2] Short Hi Whistle [EXC2] Short Hi Whistle [EXC2]
C5 72 Long Low Whistle [EXC2] Long Low Whistle [EXC2] Long Low Whistle [EXC2] Gun Shot
73 Short Guiro [EXC3] Short Guiro [EXC3] Short Guiro [EXC3] Machine Gun
74 Long Guiro [EXC3] Long Guiro [EXC3] Long Guiro [EXC3] Lasergun
75 Claves Claves Claves Explosion
76 High Wood Block High Wood Block High Wood Block Dog
Low Wood Block Low Wood Block Low Wood Block Horse-Gallop
77
78 Mute Cuica [EXC4] Mute Cuica [EXC4] Mute Cuica [EXC4] Birds
79 Open Cuica [EXC4] Open Cuica [EXC4] Open Cuica [EXC4] Rain
80 Mute Triangle1 [EXC5] Mute Triangle1 [EXC5] Mute Triangle1 [EXC5] Thunder
81 Open Triangle 1 [EXC5] Open Triangle 1 [EXC5] Open Triangle 1 [EXC5] Wind
82 Shaker Shaker Shaker Seashore
83 Stream
Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell
C6 84 Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bubble
85 Castanets Castanets Castanets Cat
86 Mute Surdo [EXC6] Mute Surdo [EXC6] Mute Surdo [EXC6] Bird
87 Open Surdo [EXC6] Open Surdo [EXC6] Open Surdo [EXC6] BabyLaughing
88 ----- ----- Applause Boeeeen
89
----- ----- ----- Glass & Glam
90 ----- ----- ----- Ice Ring
91 ----- ----- ----- Crack Bottle
92 ----- ----- ----- Pour Bottle
93 ----- ----- ----- Car Horn
94 ----- ----- ----- R.Crossing
95
----- ----- ----- SL 1
C7 96 ----- ----- ----- SL 2
97 ----- ----- ----- Seal
98 ----- ----- ----- Fancy Animal
Appendices

99 ----- ----- ----- Elephant

100 ----- ----- ----- Bike
101 ----- ----- ----- -----
102 ----- ----- ----- Small Club
103 ----- ----- ----- -----
104 ----- ----- ----- -----
105 ----- ----- ----- -----

177
 KR107_e.book 178 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Effects List
Effect Type Explanation Effect Type Explanation
Equalizer This is a four-band stereo equalizer (low, high). A chorus effect that lets you apply an effect inde-
Spectrum This is a stereo spectrum. 2 Band Chorus pendently to the low-frequency and high-frequen-
cy ranges.
Enhancer Adds sparkle and tightness to the sound.
The Rotary effect simulates the sound of the rotary
Adds a special effect to the sound by cutting the
Isolator Rotary speakers often used with the electric organs of the
volume in varying ranges. past.
Boosts the volume of the lower range, creating
Low Boost This type provides modified response for the rota-
powerful lows. Rotary2
ry speaker, with the low end boosted further.
This is a low-cut filter. It cuts the low-frequency
High Pass Filter It comprises vibrato/chorus, overdrive, and rotary
component. Rotary Multi
effects.
Creates a soft distortion similar to that produced
Overdrive This is a stereo delay. The delay time is set to a
by vacuum tube amplifiers. Stereo Delay1
length of one eighth note.
Produces a more intense distortion than Over-
Distortion This is a stereo delay. The delay time is set to a
drive. Stereo Delay2
length of one quarter-note triplet.
This is an overdrive that provides heavy distor-
Overdrive2 This is a stereo delay. The delay time is set to a
tion. Stereo Delay3
length of one dotted eighth note.
This is a distortion effect that provides heavy dis-
Distortion2 This is a stereo delay. The delay time is set to a
tortion. Stereo Delay4
length of one quarter note.
Speaker Simulates the speaker type and mic settings used
This is a stereo delay. The delay time is set to a
Simulator to record the speaker sound. Stereo Delay5
length of one half note.
Guitar Amp This is an effect that simulates the sound of a guitar Monaural Delay This is a monaural delay.
Simulator amplifier.
Modulation
A phase-shifted sound is added to the original Adds modulation to the delayed sound.
Phaser Delay
sound and modulated.
Triple Tap Delay Produces three delay sounds; center, left and right.
Multi Stage Extremely high settings of the phase difference
Phaser produce a deep phaser effect. 3D Delay This applies a 3D effect to the delay sound.
A phaser that continues raising/lowering the fre- A virtual tape echo that produces a realistic tape
Infinite Phaser Tape Echo
quency at which the sound is modulated. delay sound.

It produces a metallic resonance that rises and falls This is a reverse delay that adds a reversed and de-
Stereo Flanger Reverse Delay
like a jet airplane taking off or landing. layed sound to the input sound.

3D Flanger This applies a 3D effect to the flanger sound. This is an effect that intentionally degrades the
Lo-Fi
sound quality for creative purposes.
A flanger that lets you apply an effect indepen-
2Band Flanger dently to the low-frequency and high-frequency Telephone This applies a telephone sound.
ranges. This is a special type of reverb in which the rever-
Gate Reverb
Cyclically controls a filter to create cyclic change in berant sound is cut off before its natural length.
Auto Wah
timbre. Overdrive -> This effect connects an overdrive and a chorus in
Adds a vowel character to the sound, making it Chorus series.
Humanizer
similar to a human voice. Overdrive -> This effect connects an overdrive and a flanger in
This is an effect that applies amplitude modulation Flanger series.
Ring Modulator (AM) to the input signal, producing bell-like Overdrive -> This effect connects an overdrive and a delay in se-
sounds. Delay ries.
Cyclically modulates the volume to add tremolo Distortion -> This effect connects an distortion and a chorus in
Tremolo
effect to the sound. Chorus series.
Cyclically modulates the stereo location of the Distortion -> This effect connects an distortion and a flanger in
Auto Pan
sound. Flanger series.
By applying successive cuts to the sound, this ef- Distortion -> This effect connects an distortion and a delay in se-
Slicer fect turns a conventional sound into a sound that Delay ries.
appears to be played as a backing phrase. Enhancer -> This effect connects an enhancer and a chorus in
Flattens out high levels and boosts low levels, Chorus series.
Compressor
smoothing out fluctuations in volume. Enhancer -> This effect connects an enhancer and a flanger in
Compresses signals that exceed a specified volume Flanger series.
Limiter
level, preventing distortion from occurring. Enhancer -> This effect connects an enhancer and a delay in se-
Stereo Chorus This is a stereo chorus. Delay ries.
Uses a six-phase chorus (six layers of chorused Chorus -> Delay This effect connects a chorus and a delay in series.
Hexa Chorus sound) to give richness and spatial spread to the Flanger -> Delay This effect connects a flanger and a delay in series.
sound.
Chorus -> This effect connects a chorus and a flanger in se-
This is a chorus effect with added Tremolo (cyclic Flanger ries.
Tremolo Chorus
modulation of volume).
Appendices

On an acoustic piano, holding down the damper

Space D Produces a transparent chorus effect. pedal allows other strings to resonate in sympathy
Damper
3D Chorus This applies a 3D effect to the chorus sound. with the notes you play, creating rich and spacious
Resonance
resonances. This effect simulates these damper
resonances.

178
KR107_e.book 179 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Music Style List

[Pop/Rock] [Ballad/Acoustic] [Oldies/Country] [Gospel/Latin] [Trad/World]
Pop ModernBallad Detroit Pop Latin Pop 1 Musical
'80s Pop 1 '80s Ballad '60s Rock'n Orch Bossa Pub Boogie
Funky Disco AcoustBallad DreamSloRock Rhumba Vienna Waltz
AdultContemp AcoustEzLstn CountryRock1 GospelShuffl Kids Shuffle
Uptown Rock UnpluggedPop CountryBald1 ContPraise 1 Movie March
EZ Listening UnplugBallad Groovin R&B ContPraise 2 Music Hall
Strumin'Away Adult Pop 1 Oldies 1 Gospel Orch Bolero
'70s Disco 1 Adult Pop 2 Clock Rock'n Samba Orch Waltz
SmoothContmp 6/8 Ballad CountryPop 1 ModernChaCha Holiday 1
Simple Rock Love Beat SwinginCntry Salsa Classic
'60s Feelin' UnplugShuffl Soul Soft Gospel Jing Ju
16Beat Pop CoolLiveBand Rock'n Slow Gospel Shout MarchingBand
Light Pop Night Ballad Oldies 2 AcoustRhumba March
Bright Pop GuitarShuffl CountryBald2 Acoust Samba Slow Waltz
Heart Beat Euro Ballad CountrySwing Trad Rhumba Fast Waltz
Easy Pop Guitar Trio Rock'n Fever Gospel Pop Paris
'80s Pop 2 MidnightBald Country Beat GospelBallad Quiet Waltz
'80s Pop 3 Pop Ballad Slow Country Latin Dance Holiday 2
Cute Pop Piano Pop CountryRock2 Cha Cha Holiday 3
LovelyShuffl Love Songs Country Fox Trad Tango 2 Beat
'70s Disco 2 12/8 Ballad Blues SunshineBosa Lager Polka
'70s Dance Scat Ballad R&B Jazz Bossa Slow Polka
Fever Dance '60s Ballad Slow Dance Merengue AustrianPolk
Euro Dance Torch Song 1 Twist GuitarRhumba AustrianWalz
Hard Tekno Torch Song 2 '60s Beach Mambo Irish
Big House Strings Slow Oldies Fast Samba Tejano
'90s House 8BeatBallad1 Early Rock Fast Bossa Celtic
House Pop 8BeatBallad2 Go Go Rock Big Samba Musette
Ibiza Dance Fireside Mersey Beat Luv Bossa Scotland
Cool Rap Piano Ballad CountryPop 2 Mid Bossa Japan
Now Hip Hop Story Ballad Cajun Latin Pop 2 Ireland
Twostep SimpleBallad Country Reggae Paso Doble
HipHop Beat ClassicBalad Cntry Dreams Tango China Pop
Hip'n Hop Symph Ballad Charleston Beguine Jiang Nan
Easy Hop R.8-Beat 1 Bluegrass Oye Son Xi Bei
MorningShffl R.8-Beat 2 Deep Country Revival SchlagerBeat
Groovy Pop R.16-Beat 1 Gospel Piano PartySchlagr
Smile Pop R.16-Beat 2 Asian Rhumba '70sSchlager
Warm Pop R.16-Beat 3 [Big Band/ Disco Fox
Sunny Pop R.16-Beat 4 Party Polka
Feel Good R.Afro&Swing
Swing] RockSchlager
US Groove R.5BeatSwing MidnitSloSwg ShufflSchlgr
Steady Rock R.Shuffle 1 BigBand Slow SimpleMarch1
Shuffle Rock R.Waltz 1 Big Band SimpleMarch2
Dyno Rock R.March 1 BigBand Med Simple Waltz
Power Rock R.5-Beat BigBand Fast Kids 4/4
Heavy Rock R.7-Beat Medium Swing Kids 6/8
Thump Rock P.Pop 1 Jive Kids
Asian Pop P.Classic 1 Slow Swing Kids Dance
P.Night Quick Step Cinema 2Beat
P.Bossa Nova StringsSwing
P.Ragtime Foxtrot
P.Classic 2 Swing Fox
P.Ballad Fox Band
P.Swing Pop Gipsy Swing
P.Rock'nRoll Fast Swing
P.Concerto 1 JzGuitrSwing
P.Concerto 2 Jazz Waltz
P.Swing Blue Boogie
P.Shuffle BigBandBalad
P.Boogie '30s BigBand
P.'50s Rock Big Band 2
P.Latin Jazz Ballad
LooseBigBand
Smooth Jazz
A Cappella
Scat Swing
Organ Swing
Appendices

Dixieland
Hawaiian
Hula

179
 KR107_e.book 180 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chord List
* ● symbol: Indicates the constituent note of chords.
* ★ symbol: Chord shown with an “★”can be played by pressing just the key marked with the “★” (p. 49).

C C# D E E F

Cmaj7 C#maj7 Dmaj7 E maj7 Emaj7 Fmaj7

C7 C#7 D7 E 7 E7 F7

Cm C#m Dm E m Em Fm

Cm7 C#m7 Dm7 E m7 Em7 Fm7

Cdim C#dim Ddim E dim Edim Fdim

Cm7 ( 5 ) C#m7 ( 5 ) Dm7 ( 5 ) E m7 ( 5 ) Em7 ( 5 ) Fm7 ( 5 )

Caug C#aug Daug E aug Eaug Faug

Csus4 C#sus4 Dsus4 E sus4 Esus4 Fsus4

C7sus4 C#7sus4 D7sus4 E 7sus4 E7sus4 F7sus4

C6 C#6 D6 E 6 E6 F6

Cm6 C#m6 Dm6 E m6 Em6 Fm6

Appendices

180
KR107_e.book 181 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Chord List

* ● symbol: Indicates the constituent note of chords.

* ★ symbol: Chord shown with an “★”can be played by pressing just the key marked with the “★” (p. 49).

F# G A A B B

F#maj7 Gmaj7 A maj7 Amaj7 B maj7 Bmaj7

F#7 G7 A 7 A7 B 7 B7

F#m Gm A m Am B m Bm

F#m7 Gm7 A m7 Am7 B m7 Bm7

F#dim Gdim A dim Adim B dim Bdim

F#m7 ( 5 ) Gm7 ( 5 ) A m7 ( 5 ) Am7 ( 5 ) B m7 ( 5 ) Bm7 ( 5 )

F#aug Gaug A aug Aaug B aug Baug

F#sus4 Gsus4 A sus4 Asus4 B sus4 Bsus4

F#7sus4 G7sus4 A 7sus4 A7sus4 B 7sus4 B7sus4

F#6 G6 A 6 A6 B 6 B6

F#m6 Gm6 A m6 Am6 B m6 Bm6

Appendices

181
 KR107_e.book 182 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Internal Song List

Folks Kids
Classical
1 Greensleeves 8 Joy To The World
→ Song files of this genre corresponds to
2 Entertainer 9 Puppy’s March the included collection of printed music
entitled “Roland 60 Classical Piano
3 Annie Laurie 10 Frog Song
Masterpieces.”
4 Londonderry Air 11 Little Fox
1 Sonate No.15
5 Ave Maria 12 Lightly Row
2 Liebestraume 3
6 Amazing Grace 13 The Cuckoo
3 Etude, op.10-3
7 Little Brown Jug
4 Je te veux
When The Saints Go Marchin’ EZ Classical
8 5 Valse, op.64-1
In
1 La Fille Aux Cheveux De Lin
6 Golliwog’sCakewalk
9 Stagecoach
2 La Campanell
7 FantaisieImpromptu
10 Hallelujah!
3 Eine Kleine Nachtmusik
8 Arabesque 1
4 Les patineurs, Valse
9 Blauen Donau
Jazzy
5 Divertimento
10 Auf Flugeln des Gesanges
1 Fly Free
6 Impromptu, Op.90-2
11 Mazurka No.5
2 Secret Agent
7 Gnossienne 1
12 Gymnopedie 1
3 Late Night Chopin
8 Die Lorelei
13 Etude, op.25-1
4 Blue Sky Rag
9 Brindisi
14 Clair de Lune
5 Preludelight
10 Air sul G
15 Etude, op.10-5
6 Sun Daze
11 FantaisieImpromptu
16 Dr.GradusAdParnassum
7 Keepers Tale
12 Grande Valse Brillante
17 Grande Valse Brillante
8 Count On The Blues
13 Gymnopedie 1
18 La priere d’une Vierge
9 One Down And Easy
14 Liebestraume 3
19 Course en Troika
10 A Prelude To ...
15 Mondschein
20 To The Spring
11 Bach’s A Boppin’
16 Nocturne No.2
21 Valse, op.64-2
12 Kismet’s Salsa
17 Valse, op.64-1
22 Radetzky Marsch
13 From Matthew’s Passion
18 Prelude, op.28-15
23 Traumerei
14 Roll Over Ludwig
19 Traumerei
24 Moments Musicaux 3
20 Turkischer Marsch(Mozart)
25 Prelude, op.28-15
Kids
21 Ungarische Tanze 5
26 Harmonious Blacksmith
1 Grandfather’s Clock
22 O’sole Mio
27 Ungarische Tanze 5
2 Old MacDonald Had A Farm
23 La Primavera
28 Turkischer Marsch(Beethoven)
3 Twinkle Twinkle, Little Star
24 Trepak
29 Nocturne No.2
4 Mary Had A Little Lamb
25 Canon (Pachelbel)
30 Fruhlingslied
5 London Bridge
26 Ombra maifu
Appendices

31 Praludium
6 Jingle Bells
27 Sonata (Haydn)
32 Jagerlied
7 Silent Night, Holy Night
28 Italian Concerto

182
KR107_e.book 183 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Internal Song List

Classical Practice Practice

33 Menuet Antique 7 Gracefulness 43 Beyer 25

34 Fur Elise 8 The Hunt 44 Beyer 29

35 Turkischer Marsch(Mozart) 9 Tender Flower 45 Beyer 34

36 Standchen 10 The Young Shepherdess 46 Beyer 38

37 Humoreske 11 Farewell 47 Beyer 42

38 Blumenlied 12 Consolation 48 Beyer 46

39 Alpenglockchen 13 Austrian Dance 49 Beyer 51

40 Menuett G dur(Beethoven) 14 Ballad 50 Beyer 55

41 Venezianisches Gondellied 15 Sighing 51 Beyer 60

42 Alpenabendrote 16 The Chatterbox 52 Beyer 64

43 Farewell to the Piano 17 Restlessness 53 Beyer 67

44 Brautchor 18 Ave Maria 54 Beyer 73

45 Battle of Waterloo 19 Tarantella 55 Beyer 78

46 Wiener Marsch 20 Angelic Harmony 56 Beyer 81

47 Le Coucou 21 Gondola Song 57 Beyer 90

48 Menuett G dur(Bach) 22 The Return 58 Beyer 93

49 Spinnerlied 23 The Swallow 59 Beyer 98

50 Gavotte 24 The Knight Errant 60 Beyer 103

51 Heidenroslein 25 Openness 61 Czerny 100- 1

52 Zigeuner Tanz 26 Invention 1 62 Czerny 100-10

53 La Cinquantaine 27 Invention 2 63 Czerny 100-20

54 Csikos Post 28 Invention 3 64 Czerny 100-30

55 Dolly’s Dreaming Awakening 29 Invention 4 65 Czerny 100-38

56 La Violette 30 Invention 5 66 Czerny 100-43

57 Frohlicher Landmann 31 Invention 6 67 Czerny 100-60

58 Sonatine op.36-1(Clementi) 32 Invention 7 68 Czerny 100-75

59 Sonatine op.20-1(Kuhlau) 33 Invention 8 69 Czerny 100-86

60 Sonatine No.5(Beethoven) 34 Invention 9 70 Czerny 100-96

35 Invention 10 981a

* All rights reserved. Unauthorized use

Practice 36 Invention 11
of this material for purposes other than
1 Arabesque 37 Invention 12 private, personal enjoyment is a
violation of applicable laws.
2 Pastoral 38 Invention 13

3 A Small Gathering 39 Invention 14

4 Innocence 40 Invention 15
Appendices

5 Progress 41 Beyer 15

6 The Clear Stream 42 Beyer 21

183
 KR107_e.book 184 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Parameters Stored to Internal Memory

Parameters Stored in the User Program
Parameters that switch after the User Program name is
→ “Saving Performance Settings (User Program)” (p. 108)
touched for a few moments when <Option> on the User
Program screen is set to “Delayed”
Music Style
Parameters that switch immediately after the User Pro-
gram name is touched when <Option> on the User Pro- Tempo
gram screen is set to “Delayed” Part Balance Accompaniment Part
Rotary effect (Slow/Fast), Accompaniment On/Off,
Organ
Footage (Upper, Lower), Percussion Chord Recognize Mode,
Selected Leading Bass On/Off, Original/Variation,
Tone, Octave Shift, Arranger
Right-hand Tone, Sync Start On/Off,
Effect (Type, Control 1, Control 2, On/Off, Settings
Layer Tone, <Accomp> Setting for
The part to which the effect is added)
Left-hand Tone Arranger Configuration,
Style Orchestrator, Division
Bass Tone, Chord Tone
Part Balance Keyboard Parts Parameters Stored in Memory Backup
Melody
On/Off, Type → “Remembering the Settings Even When the Power is Turned Off (Memory
Intelligent
Backup)” (p. 148)
Split 1, Split 2, On/Off for the Part,
Keyboard Mode Layer 1, Layer 2, On/Off for the Part, Tuning (Tuning, Key, Stretch Tunings)
Keyboard Transpose, Split Point Master Tune
Functions Assigning to the Left Pedal and Effect: the part to which the effect is added
Center Pedal
Pedal Settings Metronome: Sound
Bend Range
Count-In: Measures, Sound
Functions Assigning to the Expression Pedal
Countdown: Sound
Performance Pad
User Function Language
Settings System
Reverb On/Off, Type, Depth Track Assign
Parameters
On/Off, Echo (Type, Depth), Reverb: On/Off, Type, Depth

Vocal Effects Transformer Type, Harmonist Type, Advanced 3D:

Transformer/Harmonist, Music Files Part On/Off, On/Off for Each Part,

MIDI Settings for Bank Select LSB, Bank Select MSB, Various Settings

User Program Program Change, MIDI Transmit Channel Remote Control’s Setting

Equalizer Each Sliders Level, Master Level External Display (Device)

Dynamic Emphasis On/Off, Type iR Function

Parameters That are Stored After the

Parameters Stored in the User Program Set Power is Turned Off
Pedal Shift
Touch Screen
Load Next
Opening Message
Start: On/Off
Auto Demo
BGM: On/Off
USB Driver
Equalizer User Settings
Jazz Organ Footage User Settings
Piano Designer User Settings
Appendices

184
KR107_e.book 185 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Music Files That the KR Can Use

What Are Music Files? ■ About the KR Sound Generator
Music Files contain information describing the details of a The KR come equipped with GM 2/GS sound generators.
musical performance, such as “the C3 key on a keyboard was
pressed for this amount of time, using this amount of force.” General MIDI
By connecting the external memory to the external memory The General MIDI is a set of recommendations which seeks to
port on the KR, the performance information is sent from the provide a way to go beyond the limitations of proprietary designs,
external memory to the piano, and played faithfully by the and standardize the MIDI capabilities of sound generating devices.
piano. This is different than a CD, since the music file does Sound generating devices and music files that meets the General
not contain a recording of the sound itself. This makes it MIDI standard bears the General MIDI logo. Music files bearing the
possible to erase certain parts, or to change instruments, General MIDI logo can be played back using any General MIDI
tempos and keys freely, allowing you to use it in many sound generating unit to produce essentially the same musical
different ways. performance.

Regarding Copyright
General MIDI 2
Other than for your own personal enjoyment, any use of the
song data programmed in this instrument without the The upwardly compatible General MIDI 2 recommendations pick up
where the original General MIDI left off, offering enhanced
consent of the copyright holder is prohibited by law.
expressive capabilities, and even greater compatibility. Issues that
Additionally, this data must not be copied, nor used in a
were not covered by the original General MIDI recommendations,
secondary copyrighted work without the permission of the
such as how sounds are to be edited, and how effects should be
copyright holder.
handled, have now been precisely defined. Moreover, the available
sounds have been expanded. General MIDI 2 compliant sound
■ The KR allows you to use the generators are capable of reliably playing back music files that carry

following music files either the General MIDI or General MIDI 2 logo.
In some cases, the conventional form of General MIDI, which does
● Floppy disks saved on a Roland MT Series, or Roland Piano not include the new enhancements, is referred to as “General MIDI
Digital HP-G/R and KR Series instrument 1” as a way of distinguishing it from General MIDI 2.

● Roland Digital Piano Compatible Music Files

Roland’s original music file is made specifically for practicing the GS Format
piano. Some follow an instructional curriculum, allowing for a The GS Format is Roland’s set of specifications for standardizing the
complete range of lessons, such as “practicing each hand performance of sound generating devices. In addition to including
separately” or “listening to only the accompaniment.” support for everything defined by the General MIDI, the highly
compatible GS Format additionally offers an expanded number of
● SMF Music Files (720KB/1.44MB format)
sounds, provides for the editing of sounds, and spells out many
SMFs (Standard MIDI Files) use a standard format for music file
details for a wide range of extra features, including effects such as
that was formulated so that files containing music file could be
reverb and chorus. Designed with the future in mind, the GS Format
widely compatible, regardless of the manufacturer of the
can readily include new sounds and support new hardware features
listening device. An enormous variety of music is available,
when they arrive. Since it is upwardly compatible with the General
whether it be for listening, for practicing musical instruments, for
MIDI, Roland’s GS Format is capable of reliably playing back GM
Karaoke, etc.
Scores equally as well as it performs GS music files (music files that
* If you wish to purchase SMF Music Files, please consult the have been created with the GS Format in mind). This product
retailer where you purchased your KR. supports both the General MIDI 2 and the GS Format, and can be
used to play back music data carrying either of these logos.

SMF with Lyrics

XG lite
“SMF with Lyrics” refers to SMF (Standard MIDI File) that XG is a tone generator format of YAMAHA Corporation, that
contains the lyrics. When Music Files carrying the “SMF with defines the ways in which voices are expanded or edited and the
Lyrics” logo are played back on a compatible device (one structure and type of effects, in addition to the General MIDI 1
bearing the same logo), the lyrics will appear in its display. specification. XGlite is a simplified version of XG tone generation
format. You can play back any XG music files using an XGlite tone
generator. However, keep in mind that some music files may play
Appendices

back differently compared to the original files, due to the reduced set
of control parameters and effects.

185
KR107_e.book 186 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

DIGITAL PIANO Date : Mar. 1, 2005

Model KR-107 MIDI Implementation Chart Version : 1.00

Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Function...

Basic Default 1 1–16

Channel Changed 1–16 1–16

Default Mode 3 Mode 3

Mode Messages x Mode 3, 4 (M=1) *2
Altered **************

Note 15–113 0–127

Number : True Voice ************** 0–127

Note ON O O
Velocity Note OFF O O

After Key’s x O *1
Touch Ch’s x O *1

Pitch Bend O O
0, 32 O O *1 Bank select
1 O *1 O *1 Modulation
5 O *1 O *1 Portamento time
6, 38 O *1 O *1 Data entry
7 O O *1 Volume
10 O *1 O *1 Panpot
Control 11 O *1 O *1 Expression
64 O O *1 Hold 1
Change 65 O O *1 Portamento
*1
66 O O *1 Sostenuto
67 O O *1 Soft
84 O *1 O *1 Portamento control
91 O O (Reverb) *1 Effect1 depth
93 O O (Chorus) *1 Effect3 depth
98, 99 O *1 O *1 NRPN LSB, MSB
100, 101 O *1 O *1 RPN LSB, MSB

Prog 0–127 O
Change : True # ************** 0–127 Program number 1–128

System Exclusive O O

: Song Pos x x
System
: Song Sel x x
Common
: Tune x x

System : Clock O x
Real Time : Commands x x
: All sound off x O (120, 126, 127)
: Reset all controllers x O
Aux : Local Control x O
Message : All Notes OFF x O (123–125)
: Active Sense O O
: Reset x x

Notes * 1 O x is selectable by SysEx.

* 2 Recognized as M=1 even if M=1.

Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO O : Yes

Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO X : No

186
KR107_e.book 187 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Main Specifications
<Keyboard> Copy
88 keys (Progressive hammer action Quantize
Keyboard Delete
keyboard with escapement)
Touch Sensitivity 100 levels Insert
Edit Erase
Whole
Transpose
Split (adjustable split point)
Part Exchange
Layer
Keyboard Mode Note Edit
Arranger
PC Edit
Piano Style Arranger
Manual Drums / SFX Touch the Notes
Replay
Super Tones
<Sound Generator> Piano Designer
Conforms to GM2 / GS / XG Lite Visual Lesson
Max. Polyphony 128 voices Wonderland/Game
Other Functions
Tones Demo
6 groups 736 variations (including 8 tone
(Tone Search by Audition
wheel Organs, 17 drum sets, SFX set)
terms and by letters) Panel Lock
Temperament 8 types, selectable tonic User Image Display
Stretched Tuning 2 types BMP Export
415.3 Hz–466.2 Hz (adjustable in V-LINK
Master Tuning
increments of 0.1 Hz)
Key Transpose (-6–+5 in units of semitone) <External Storage> USB Memory
Transpose Playback Transpose (-24–+24 in units of Song: Standard MIDI Files (Format 0/1),
semitone) Roland Original Format (i-Format)
Reverb (12 types, 127 levels) Playable Software Music Style: MSA, MSD, MSE
Chours, Rotary and 60 other types Audio File: WAV Format (44.1 kHz 16 bits
Effects Advanced 3D linear, stereo)
Dynamic Emphasis (3 types) Song: Standard MIDI Files (Format 0),
Equalizer (5 bands, Master level) Save Roland Original Format (i-Format)
Music Style: MSE
<Arranger>
Music Styles <Internal Memory>
6 groups 262 styles x 3 types (Style
(Style Search by
Orchestrator) Internal Songs
terms and by letters) (Song Search by Over 190 songs
Music Assistant terms and by letters)
Over 500 sets x 6 presets
(Search by terms
Visual Music Assistant Max. 200 songs on Favorites
and by letters) User Memory Max. 99 User Styles
Programmable Style Converter Max. 99 User Program Sets
Music Styles Style Composer
Melody Intelligence 24 types
<Others>
Rated Power Output 60 W x 2
<User Programs> Speakers 20 cm x 2, 5 cm x 2, 10 cm x 2
Internal 36 Bouncing Beat Indicator
External Memory Max. 70 sets Display Graphical Color LCD 320 x 240 dot (backlit
LCD)
<Metronome> Grand staff / G Clef staff / F Clef staff,
Notation
Tempo Quarter note = 10–500 with note name /lyrics/ chords / fingering
2/2, 0/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 6/4, 7/4, 3/8, English / Japanese / German / French /
Beat Language
6/8, 9/8, 12/8 Spanish
Volume 10 levels Lyrics Yes (built-in, external display, MIDI output)
Metronome Pattern 11 patterns One Touch Piano
One Touch Program
Metronome Sound 8 types One Touch Arranger
Damper Pedal (half-pedal recognition)
Soft Pedal (half-pedal recognition,
<Composer> Pedals
functions assignable)
Tracks 5 tracks / 16 tracks Sostenuto Pedal (functions assignable)
Song 1 song Echo
Note Storage Approx. 30,000 notes Voice Transformer
Resolution 120 ticks per quarter note Vocal Effects
Vocal Keyboard
Realtime (Replace, Mix, Auto Punch In, Harmonist
Manual Punch In, Loop, Tempo)
Recording Method
Step (Chord Sequencer)
Appendices

Beat Map

187
 KR107_e.book 188 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Main Specifications

USB memory connector

FDD connector
Output jacks (L/Mono, R)
Input jacks (L/Mono, R)
Mic Input jack
Headphones jack (Stereo) x 2
Connectors
MIDI In connector x 2
MIDI Out connector
USB connector
Ext Display connector (15-pin D-Sub type)
Video Out jack
Expression Pedal jack
AC 115 V, AC 117 V, AC 220 V, AC 230 V,
Power Supply
AC 240 V (50/60 Hz)
Power Consumption 155 W
1421 (W) x 550 (D) x 901 (H) mm
Dimensions 56 (W) x 21-11/16 (D) x 35-1/2 (H) inches
(including the piano Including the music rest
stand) 1421 (W) x 550 (D) x 1116 (H) mm
56 (W) x 21-11/16 (D) x 43-15/16 (H) inches
Weights (including
84 kg / 187 lbs
the piano stand)
Quick Start
Owner’s Manual
Roland 60 Classical Piano Masterpieces
Remote Control
Dry-cell Batteries
Accessories USB Installation Guide
CD-ROM (Roland Digital Piano USB
Driver)
Power cord
Headphones Hook
Anti-theft lock screws
USB Memory
Options
Floppy Disk Drive

* In the interest of product improvement, the specifications and/or

appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior
notice.
962a
Appendices

188
KR107_e.book 189 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Index
Numerics Computer .........................................................................165
16-Track Sequencer ..........................................................114 Connected
Expression Pedal ........................................................156
A Connecting
AC inlet .............................................................................17
Audio Equipment ......................................................163
Accompaniment
Computer ...................................................................165
Start and Stop ...............................................................55
External Display .........................................................156
Sync Start .....................................................................55
MIDI device ...............................................................160
Adjuster .............................................................................19
Television ...................................................................156
Advanced 3D .....................................................................31
Video Equipment .......................................................159
[Ambience/Reverb] button ...............................................31
Contrast .............................................................................20
Arranger basic screen ........................................................59
Contrast knob ....................................................................20
Arranger Config ..............................................................139
Copy (Song Edit) .............................................................123
Audio Equipment ............................................................163
Copying
Auto Punch-In/Out .........................................................119
Songs ..........................................................................106
Automatic Accompaniment ...............................................47
User Program .............................................................111
AutoSync DigiScore ...........................................................75
User Styles .................................................................137
B Count In .............................................................................83
Balance ..............................................................................63 Countdown ........................................................................57
Balance Knob .....................................................................63
Bank Select LSB ...............................................................163
D
Damper pedal ....................................................................19
Bank Select MSB ..............................................................163
Demo ..................................................................................... QS 4
Basic Screen .......................................................................21
Delete (Song Edit) ............................................................124
Basic tempo .....................................................................128
Deleting
Bass Tone ................................................................... 56, 139
A song ........................................................................105
Beat
User Style ...................................................................136
Metronome ..................................................................45
[DigiScore] button .................................................74, QS 10
Beat Map ..........................................................................128
Divisions ............................................................................47
Bend Range ......................................................................146
Drum Set List ...................................................................174
Blank Recording ..............................................................119
Drums ................................................................................24
Bouncing Ball .....................................................................78
Dynamic Emphasis ............................................................33
[Brilliance] knob ................................................................19
[Song] button .....................................................................65 E
[Bwd] button .....................................................................66 Echo ...................................................................................38
Editing .............................................................................122
C Effects ................................................................................36
Calibration .......................................................................150
Effects List .......................................................................178
Chord Finder .....................................................................50
EffectsPart ........................................................................151
Chord Intelligence .............................................................49
Ending .........................................................................47, 56
Chord List ........................................................................180
Equalizer ............................................................................34
Chord Sequencer .............................................................121
Erase (Song Edit) .............................................................126
Chord Tone ................................................................ 56, 139
Erasing
Chord Type .......................................................................49
Performance on specific tracks .....................................97
Chords ......................................................................... 49, 77
Recorded performance .................................................97
Clef L .................................................................................78
Error Messages ................................................................171
Clef R .................................................................................78
Export ................................................................................79
Color Notation ...................................................................78
Expression Pedal ..............................................................156
Composer MIDI Out ........................................................163
Ext Display connector ......................................................157

189
KR107_e.book 190 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Index

External Display ...................................................... 156, 158 Local Control ...................................................................162

External Memory ...............................................................99 Loop Recording ...............................................................118
Lower Tone ........................................................................61
F Lyrics ................................................................... 21, 77, 154
Factory Reset ...................................................................149
Factory Setting M
Touch Screen ..............................................................151 Manual Punch-In/Out .....................................................119
User Memory .............................................................152 Marker .......................................................................85, 141
Favorites .................................................................... 69, 102 Erasing .........................................................................86
Registering ...................................................................69 Moving .........................................................................86
Removing .....................................................................70 Placing .........................................................................85
Fill In .................................................................................58 Repeat ..........................................................................87
Fill In To Original ..............................................................47 Master Tuning .................................................................146
Fill In To Variation ............................................................47 Melody Intelligence ...........................................................60
Finger Numbers .................................................................77 [Melody Intelligence] button .............................................60
Format .............................................................................100 Memory Backup ..............................................................148
Functions .........................................................................138 Metronome ........................................................................44
[Fwd] button ......................................................................66 Beat ..............................................................................45
Pattern ..........................................................................46
G
Sound ...........................................................................45
General MIDI ...................................................................185
Volume .........................................................................45
General MIDI 2 ................................................................185
[Metronome] button ..........................................................44
GS ....................................................................................185
Mic In jack .........................................................................20
GS Format ........................................................................185
[Mic Volume] knob ............................................................20
H Microphone .......................................................................20
Harmonist ..........................................................................39 MIDI ................................................................................160
Harmony ...........................................................................60 MIDI Connector ...............................................................160
Headphones ......................................................................19 MIDI Devices ...................................................................160
MIDI Ensemble ................................................................161
I
MIDI Settings ...................................................................161
Icon ....................................................................................21
Minus One .........................................................................84
i-format ............................................................................104
Mix Recording .................................................................118
Insert (Song Edit) .............................................................125
Multitrack Recording .......................................................114
Internal Song List ............................................................182
[Music Assistant] button ............................................ QS 16, 18
Intro ............................................................................. 47, 55
Music Files .........................................................................42
[Intro/Ending] button .......................................................55
Music Holder .....................................................................17
iR function .......................................................................150
Music Style ........................................................................47
K On External Memory ...................................................53
Karaoke .............................................................................43 Rhythm Pattern ............................................................54
Key ....................................................................................78 Music Style Buttons ...........................................................51
Key Touch .......................................................................138 Music Style List ................................................................179
Mute ..........................................................................84, 115
L
Language .........................................................................147 N
Layer ..................................................................................26 New Song ..........................................................................91
Layer tone ..........................................................................26 Notation .............................................................................74
Leading bass ....................................................................145 Saving as image data ....................................................79
Lid .....................................................................................18 Settings .........................................................................76

190
KR107_e.book 191 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Index

Note Edit (Song Edit) .......................................................127 Q

Quantize (Song Edit) .......................................................124
O Quick Tour
Octave Shift .......................................................................28
Automatically starting ...............................................152
One Touch Program [Arranger] button .............................48
One Touch Program [Piano] button ..................................22 R
One Touch Settings ..........................................................139 Rec Mode ...................................................................97, 117
One-Touch Arranger .........................................................48 Record/Playback Buttons ..................................................66
Settings ......................................................................138 Recording ..........................................................................90
One-Touch Piano ...............................................................22 16-Track Sequencer ....................................................116
Opening Message ............................................................148 A new song ..................................................................91
Original .............................................................................47 Along with a Song ........................................................95
[Original] button ................................................................58 Redoing recordings ......................................................96
Output Jacks ....................................................................163 Track buttons ...............................................................96
With Accompaniment ..................................................93
P Remote Control ................................. 71–72, 149–150, QS 7
Panel Lock .......................................................................153
Remote Sensor .................................................................150
Part Balance .......................................................................63
Repeat ................................................................................87
[Part Balance] button .........................................................63
Replace Recording ...........................................................118
Part Exchange (Song Edit) ...............................................126
[Reset] button ....................................................................66
PC Edit (Song Edit) ..........................................................127
Resolution ..........................................................................78
Pedal ............................................................................ 19, 78
Restoring the Factory Settings .........................................149
Pedal Cable ........................................................................17
Reverb ................................................................................29
Pedal connector .................................................................17
Root note ............................................................................49
Pedal jack .........................................................................156
Rotary effect .....................................................................145
Pedal Settings ..................................................................144
Percussion .........................................................................24 S
Performance Pad ....................................................... 59, 144 Saving ..............................................................................102
Phones jack ........................................................................19 User Style ...................................................................135
Piano ..................................................................................22 Screens
[Piano Designer] button ............................................... QS 6 16-track Sequencer screen ..........................................114
Piano Screen ......................................................................21 Advanced 3D screen ....................................................31

Pickup ................................................................................98 Basic screen ............................................................21, 48

Pitches ...............................................................................77 Chord Sequencer screen .............................................121

Play Mode ........................................................................154 Copy Song screen .......................................................106

[Play/Stop] button ............................................................66 Copy Style screen .......................................................137
Playing ...............................................................................65 Copy User Programs screen .......................................111

All of the internal songs ...............................................65 Count settings screen ...................................................83

At a fixed tempo (Tempo Mute) ..................................82 Countdown settings screen ..........................................57
In random ....................................................................65 Delete Song screen .....................................................105

Repeat ..........................................................................87 Delete Style screen .....................................................136

Power Cord .......................................................................17 Delete User Program screen .......................................111
Power On and Off .............................................................18 Effects screen ................................................................36
[Power] switch ...................................................................18 Equalizer screen .....................................................34–35
Preset .................................................................................51 File screen ..................................................................100
Program Change ..............................................................163 Functions screen .........................................................142
PU (Pickup) .......................................................................98 Load User Program screen .........................................110
Punch-in Recording .........................................................119 Marker screen ..............................................................85

191
KR107_e.book 192 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Index

Melody Intelligence screen ..........................................60 Style Converter ................................................................132

Metronome screen .......................................................44 Style Orchestrator ..............................................................59
MIDI Setting Screen ...................................................161 [Style Orchestrator] button ................................................59
Notation screen ............................................................74 Style Search ........................................................................52
Part Balance screen ......................................................63 Sync Start ...........................................................................55
PEDAL screen ............................................................112 [Super Tones] button......................................................... QS 14
Piano screen ........................................................... 21–22
T
Program Change Screen .............................................161
Tap Tempo .........................................................................81
Rec Mode screen ........................................................118
Television ........................................................................157
Rename screen ........................................... 103, 108, 135
Temperament ..................................................................143
Reverb screen ...............................................................29
Tempo .................................................................... 45, 54, 81
Save Song screen ........................................................102
Tempo [-] [+] buttons .........................................................81
Save Style screen ........................................................135
Tempo Mute ......................................................................82
Save User Program screen .........................................109
Tempo Recording ............................................................128
Song Edit screen .........................................................122
Tone Buttons ......................................................................23
Song Search screen .......................................................68
Tone List ..........................................................................172
Song Selection screen ...................................................65
Tone Search .......................................................................25
Style Composer screen ...............................................131
Tone Set ...........................................................................116
Style Converter screen ...............................................133
Touch Screen .............................................................20, 150
Style Search screen .......................................................52
Touch the Notes .................................................................75
Style Selection screen ...................................................51
Track Assign ....................................................................155
Tone search screen .......................................................25
Track Buttons ......................................................... 84, 92, 94
Tone selection screen ...................................................23
Transformer .......................................................................38
Transpose screen ..........................................................88
Transpose ..........................................................................88
User Program screen ..................................................108
Transpose (Song Edit) ......................................................125
Vocal Effects screen ......................................................37
[Transpose] button .............................................................88
Write User Program screen ........................................108
Troubleshooting ..............................................................167
Search
Tuning .............................................................................143
Music Style ...................................................................52
Tuning Curve ..................................................................143
Song .............................................................................68
Tx Channel .......................................................................162
Tone .............................................................................25
SMF .................................................................................185 U
SMF Music files ...............................................................185 Undo (Song Edit) .............................................................123
Soft pedal ...........................................................................19 Upper tone .........................................................................26
Solo ..................................................................................115 USB Driver .......................................................................166
[Song] button........................................................................ QS 8 User Functions .................................................................144
Song Search .......................................................................68 User Image Display .........................................................147
Sostenuto pedal .................................................................19 User Memory ...................................................................135
[Sound Control] button .....................................................34 Formatting .................................................................152
Sound Effects .....................................................................24 User Program ...................................................................108
Sound Generator .............................................................185 Calling up ..................................................................109
Speaker Cable ....................................................................17 Copying .....................................................................111
Split ...................................................................................62 Deleting ......................................................................111
Split Point ........................................................................139 Loading ......................................................................110
[Start/Stop] button ............................................................55 Registering .................................................................108
Stretch Tuning .................................................................143 Saving ........................................................................109
Style Composer ...............................................................130 Transmitting PC Numbers .........................................113

192
KR107_e.book 193 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Index

User Style ................................................................... 53, 130

Copying .....................................................................137
Deleting .....................................................................136
Saving ........................................................................135

V
Variation ............................................................................47
[Variation] button ..............................................................58
V-LINK ............................................................................159
[Visual Lesson] button...................................................... QS 12
Vocal Count-In ..................................................................40
Vocal Effect ........................................................................37
[Vocal Effect] button ..........................................................37
Vocal Keyboard .................................................................41
Volume
Metronome ..................................................................45
Microphone ..................................................................20
Overall .........................................................................19
Remote Control ............................................................73
[Volume] knob ...................................................................19

W
[Wonderland] button ........................................................ QS 19

X
XG lite ..............................................................................185

Z
Zoom .................................................................................77

193
KR107_e.book 194 ページ ２００６年４月５日 水曜日 午前９時４０分

Information When you need repair service, call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland
distributor in your country as shown below.

AFRICA SINGAPORE COSTA RICA TRINIDAD NORWAY JORDAN

SWEE LEE MUSIC JUAN Bansbach Instrumentos AMR Ltd Roland Scandinavia Avd. MUSIC HOUSE CO. LTD.
EGYPT COMPANY PTE. LTD. Musicales Ground Floor Kontor Norge FREDDY FOR MUSIC
Al Fanny Trading Office 150 Sims Drive, Ave.1. Calle 11, Apartado 10237, Maritime Plaza Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95 P. O. Box 922846
9, EBN Hagar A1 Askalany SINGAPORE 387381 San Jose, COSTA RICA Barataria Trinidad W.I. Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo Amman 11192 JORDAN
Street, TEL: 6846-3676 TEL: 258-0211 TEL: (868) 638 6385 NORWAY TEL: (06) 5692696
ARD E1 Golf, Heliopolis, TEL: 2273 0074
SRI LANKA CURACAO URUGUAY KUWAIT
Cairo 11341, EGYPT POLAND
Penguin Electronics (Pvt) Ltd. Zeelandia Music Center Inc. Todo Musica S.A. EASA HUSAIN AL-YOUSIFI
TEL: 20-2-417-1828
115, Maya Avenue, Orionweg 30 Francisco Acuna de Figueroa MX MUSIC SP.Z.O.O. & SONS CO.
REUNION Colombo 06, SRI LANKA Curacao, Netherland Antilles 1771 UL. Gibraltarska 4. Abdullah Salem Street,
Maison FO - YAM Marcel TEL: (11) 2552376 TEL:(305)5926866 C.P.: 11.800 PL-03664 Warszawa POLAND Safat, KUWAIT
25 Rue Jules Hermann, Montevideo, URUGUAY TEL: (022) 679 44 19 TEL: 243-6399
TAIWAN DOMINICAN REPUBLIC TEL: (02) 924-2335
Chaudron - BP79 97 491 PORTUGAL
Ste Clotilde Cedex,
ROLAND TAIWAN Instrumentos Fernando Giraldez LEBANON
ENTERPRISE CO., LTD. Calle Proyecto Central No.3 VENEZUELA Roland Iberia, S.L. Chahine S.A.L.
REUNION ISLAND
Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung Ens.La Esperilla Instrumentos Musicales Portugal Office Gerge Zeidan St., Chahine
TEL: (0262) 218-429
Shan N.Road Sec.2, Taipei, Santo Domingo, Allegro,C.A. Cais das Pedras, 8/9-1 Dto Bldg., Achrafieh, P.O.Box: 16-
SOUTH AFRICA TAIWAN, R.O.C. Dominican Republic Av.las industrias edf.Guitar 4050-465, Porto, PORTUGAL 5857
T.O.M.S. Sound & Music TEL: (02) 2561 3339 TEL:(809) 683 0305 import TEL: 22 608 00 60 Beirut, LEBANON
(Pty)Ltd. #7 zona Industrial de Turumo TEL: (01) 20-1441
THAILAND ECUADOR Caracas, Venezuela ROMANIA
11 Melle St., Braamfontein, OMAN
Theera Music Co. , Ltd. Mas Musika TEL: (212) 244-1122 FBS LINES
Johannesbourg,
330 Soi Verng NakornKasem, Rumichaca 822 y Zaruma Piata Libertatii 1, TALENTZ CENTRE L.L.C.
SOUTH AFRICA
New Road, Sumpantawongse, Guayaquil - Ecuador 535500 Gheorgheni, Malatan House No.1
TEL: (011) 403 4105
FAX: (011) 403 1234
Bangkok 10100, THAILAND TEL:(593-4)2302364 EUROPE ROMANIA Al Noor Street, Ruwi
TEL: (02) 224-8821 TEL: (266) 364 609 SULTANATE OF OMAN
EL SALVADOR AUSTRIA TEL: 2478 3443
Paul Bothner(PTY)Ltd. VIETNAM OMNI MUSIC RUSSIA
Royal Cape Park, Unit 24 Roland Elektronische QATAR
SAIGON MUSIC 75 Avenida Norte y Final MuTek
Londonderry Road, Ottery 7800 Musikinstrumente HmbH. Dorozhnaya ul.3,korp.6 Al Emadi Co. (Badie Studio &
DISTRIBUTOR Alameda Juan Pablo II,
Cape Town, SOUTH AFRICA Austrian Office 117 545 Moscow, RUSSIA
(TAN DINH MUSIC) Edificio No.4010 San Salvador, Stores)
TEL: (021) 799 4900 EL SALVADOR Eduard-Bodem-Gasse 8, TEL: (095) 981-4967 P.O. Box 62, Doha, QATAR
138 Tran Quang Khai Street
TEL: 262-0788 A-6020 Innsbruck, AUSTRIA TEL: 4423-554
Dist. 1, Ho Chi Minh City SPAIN
TEL: (0512) 26 44 260
VIETNAM
ASIA TEL: (08) 848-4068
GUATEMALA
BELGIUM/FRANCE/
Roland Iberia, S.L. SAUDI ARABIA
Casa Instrumental Paseo Garca Faria, 33-35 aDawliah Universal
CHINA Calzada Roosevelt 34-01,zona 11 HOLLAND/ 08005 Barcelona SPAIN
Electronics APL
Roland Shanghai Electronics Ciudad de Guatemala LUXEMBOURG TEL: 93 493 91 00
Corniche Road, Aldossary
Co.,Ltd. AUSTRALIA/ Guatemala Roland Central Europe N.V. SWEDEN Bldg., 1st Floor, Alkhobar,
TEL:(502) 599-2888
5F. No.1500 Pingliang Road NEW ZEALAND Houtstraat 3, B-2260, Oevel Roland Scandinavia A/S SAUDI ARABIA
Shanghai 200090, CHINA (Westerlo) BELGIUM
HONDURAS SWEDISH SALES OFFICE P.O.Box 2154, Alkhobar 31952
TEL: (021) 5580-0800 TEL: (014) 575811
AUSTRALIA/ Almacen Pajaro Azul S.A. de C.V. Danvik Center 28, 2 tr. SAUDI ARABIA
NEW ZEALAND BO.Paz Barahona CZECH REP. S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN TEL: (03) 898 2081
Roland Shanghai Electronics
3 Ave.11 Calle S.O TEL: (0)8 702 00 20
Co.,Ltd. Roland Corporation K-AUDIO
San Pedro Sula, Honduras Kardasovska 626. SYRIA
(BEIJING OFFICE) Australia Pty.,Ltd.
TEL: (504) 553-2029
SWITZERLAND
38 Campbell Avenue CZ-198 00 Praha 9, Technical Light & Sound
10F. No.18 3 Section Anhuaxili Roland (Switzerland) AG
Dee Why West. NSW 2099 CZECH REP. Center
Chaoyang District Beijing MARTINIQUE Landstrasse 5, Postfach,
Rawda, Abdul Qader Jazairi St.
100011 CHINA AUSTRALIA TEL: (2) 666 10529
Musique & Son CH-4452 Itingen,
Bldg. No. 21, P.O.BOX 13520,
TEL: (010) 6426-5050 Z.I.Les Mangle DENMARK SWITZERLAND
For Australia Damascus, SYRIA
97232 Le Lamantin TEL: (061) 927-8383
HONG KONG Tel: (02) 9982 8266 Roland Scandinavia A/S TEL: (011) 223-5384
Martinique F.W.I. Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880,
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. For New Zealand UKRAINE
TEL: 596 596 426860 DK-2100 Copenhagen TURKEY
Service Division Tel: (09) 3098 715 TIC-TAC
DENMARK ZUHAL DIS TICARET A.S.
22-32 Pun Shan Street, Tsuen Gigamusic SARL Mira Str. 19/108
TEL: 3916 6200 Galip Dede Cad. No.37
Wan, New Territories, 10 Rte De La Folie P.O. Box 180
Beyoglu - Istanbul / TURKEY
HONG KONG FINLAND 295400 Munkachevo,
TEL: 2415 0911
CENTRAL/LATIN 97200 Fort De France
UKRAINE
TEL: (0212) 249 85 10
Martinique F.W.I. Roland Scandinavia As, Filial
AMERICA TEL: 596 596 715222 Finland
TEL: (03131) 414-40 U.A.E.
Parsons Music Ltd. Zak Electronics & Musical
8th Floor, Railway Plaza, 39 MEXICO
Elannontie 5 UNITED KINGDOM
ARGENTINA FIN-01510 Vantaa, FINLAND Instruments Co. L.L.C.
Chatham Road South, T.S.T, Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v. Roland (U.K.) Ltd.
Instrumentos Musicales S.A. TEL: (0)9 68 24 020 Atlantic Close, Swansea Zabeel Road, Al Sherooq Bldg.,
Kowloon, HONG KONG Av.Santa Fe 2055 Av. Toluca No. 323, Col. Olivar No. 14, Grand Floor, Dubai,
TEL: 2333 1863 Enterprise Park, SWANSEA
(1123) Buenos Aires de los Padres 01780 Mexico GERMANY U.A.E.
D.F. MEXICO SA7 9FJ,
INDIA ARGENTINA Roland Elektronische UNITED KINGDOM TEL: (04) 3360715
TEL: (011) 4508-2700 TEL: (55) 5668-6699 Musikinstrumente HmbH.
Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd. TEL: (01792) 702701
409, Nirman Kendra NICARAGUA Oststrasse 96, 22844
BARBADOS Norderstedt, GERMANY
Mahalaxmi Flats Compound
Off. Dr. Edwin Moses Road,
A&B Music Supplies LTD Bansbach Instrumentos
TEL: (040) 52 60090 NORTH AMERICA
Musicales Nicaragua
Mumbai-400011, INDIA
12 Webster Industrial Park MIDDLE EAST
Wildey, St.Michael, Barbados Altamira D’Este Calle Principal GREECE/CYPRUS CANADA
TEL: (022) 2493 9051 de la Farmacia 5ta.Avenida
TEL: (246)430-1100 STOLLAS S.A. Roland Canada Ltd.
1 Cuadra al Lago.#503 BAHRAIN
INDONESIA BRAZIL
Music Sound Light (Head Office)
Managua, Nicaragua Moon Stores
PT Citra IntiRama 155, New National Road 5480 Parkwood Way
Roland Brasil Ltda. TEL: (505)277-2557 No.16, Bab Al Bahrain Avenue,
J1. Cideng Timur No. 15J-150 Patras 26442, GREECE Richmond B. C., V6V 2M4
Rua San Jose, 780 Sala B P.O.Box 247, Manama 304,
Jakarta Pusat PANAMA TEL: 2610 435400 CANADA
Parque Industrial San Jose State of BAHRAIN
INDONESIA SUPRO MUNDIAL, S.A. TEL: (604) 270 6626
TEL: (021) 6324170
Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL HUNGARY TEL: 17 211 005
TEL: (011) 4615 5666 Boulevard Andrews, Albrook, Roland East Europe Ltd.
Panama City, REP. DE IRAN Roland Canada Ltd.
KOREA CHILE
Warehouse Area DEPO Pf.83
PANAMA MOCO INC. (Toronto Office)
Cosmos Corporation H-2046 Torokbalint,
Comercial Fancy II S.A. TEL: 315-0101 No.41 Nike St., Dr.Shariyati Ave., 170 Admiral Boulevard
1461-9, Seocho-Dong, HUNGARY
Rut.: 96.919.420-1 Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad Mississauga On L5T 2N6
Seocho Ku, Seoul, KOREA PARAGUAY TEL: (23) 511011
Nataniel Cox #739, 4th Floor Tehran, IRAN CANADA
TEL: (02) 3486-8855 Distribuidora De
Santiago - Centro, CHILE IRELAND TEL: (021) 285-4169 TEL: (905) 362 9707
MALAYSIA TEL: (02) 688-9540 Instrumentos Musicales Roland Ireland
J.E. Olear y ESQ. Manduvira ISRAEL U. S. A.
Roland Asia Pacific Sdn. Bhd. G2 Calmount Park, Calmount
COLOMBIA Asuncion PARAGUAY Avenue, Dublin 12
Halilit P. Greenspoon & Sons Roland Corporation U.S.
45-1, Block C2, Jalan PJU 1/39,
Centro Musical Ltda. TEL: (595) 21 492147 Republic of IRELAND Ltd. 5100 S. Eastern Avenue
Dataran Prima, 47301 Petaling
Cra 43 B No 25 A 41 Bododega 9 TEL: (01) 4294444 8 Retzif Ha’aliya Hashnya St. Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938,
Jaya, Selangor, MALAYSIA PERU
Medellin, Colombia Tel-Aviv-Yafo ISRAEL U. S. A.
TEL: (03) 7805-3263
TEL: (574)3812529 Audionet ITALY TEL: (03) 6823666 TEL: (323) 890 3700
PHILIPPINES Distribuciones Musicales SAC Roland Italy S. p. A.
G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc. Juan Fanning 530 Viale delle Industrie 8,
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue Miraflores 20020 Arese, Milano, ITALY
Makati, Metro Manila 1200, Lima - Peru TEL: (02) 937-78300
PHILIPPINES TEL: (511) 4461388
TEL: (02) 899 9801

As of April 1, 2006 (ROLAND)

 To resize thickness, move all items on the front cover
and center registration marks to left or right.

WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture.

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an

CAUTION
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the
product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to
ATTENTION: RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). intended to alert the user to the presence of important
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the product.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING - When using electric products, basic precautions should always be followed, including the following:

1. Read these instructions. 10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched
2. Keep these instructions. particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
3. Heed all warnings. point where they exit from the apparatus.
4. Follow all instructions. 11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
5. Do not use this apparatus near water. manufacturer.
6. Clean only with a dry cloth. 12. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket,
7. Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in or table specified by the manufacturer, or
accordance with the manufacturers instructions. sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used,
8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus For EU Countries
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
This product complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89/336/EEC and LVD 73/23/EEC.
amplifiers) that produce heat. 13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when
9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or unused for long periods of time.
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with 14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing For the USA
one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any
blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the
third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug
way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid
has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus,
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
replacement of the obsolete outlet. not operate normally, or has been dropped.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
For the U.K. television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
IMPORTANT: THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE. interference by one or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
BLUE: NEUTRAL – Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
BROWN: LIVE – Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Under no circumstances must either of the above wires be connected to the earth terminal of a three pin plug. Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.

For Canada

NOTICE
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

AVIS
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.

2
 To resize thickness, move all items on the front cover
and center registration marks to left or right

Owner’s Manual
Owner’s Manual

Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: “IMPORTANT SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS” (p. 2), “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” (p. 3, 4, 5), and “IMPORTANT NOTES”
(p. 6, 7, 8). These sections provide important information concerning the proper operation
of the unit. Additionally, in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of
every feature provided by your new unit, Owner’s Manual should be read in its entirety.
The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference

202
Copyright © 2005 ROLAND CORPORATION
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without
the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.
* 0 3 9 0 3 1 0 1 - 0 4 * 03903101 ’06-04-4N